GF PE IEC ACP Ax ENG PDF

Preface, Table of Contents
Single-Point Information 1
SICAM RTUs Double-Point Information 2
Integrated Totals via Count Pulses 3
Common Functions Currents 4
Peripheral Elements
Voltages 5
According to IEC 60870-5-101/104
Measurement in Single-Phase Systems 6
Measurement in Three-Phase and Single-
Phase Systems 7
Measurement in Three-Phase Systems –
Extended Frequency Range 8
Measurement in Three-Phase Systems –
I/O Module 9
Temperatures 10
Pulse commands 11
Binary Information Output 12
Binary Information- and Command Output 13
Setpoint Values by means of Currents and
Voltages 14
Return Information to Pulse Command
Assignment 15
DC0-011-2.06
Note
Please observe Notes and Warnings for your own safety in the Preface.
Disclaimer of Liability Copyright

Although we have carefully checked the contents of this publication Copyright © Siemens AG 2017
for conformity with the hardware and software described, we cannot The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its
guarantee complete conformity since errors cannot be excluded. contents is not permitted without express written authority.
The information provided in this manual is checked at regular Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights
intervals and any corrections that might become necessary are created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design,
included in the next releases. Any suggestions for improvement are are reserved.
welcome.
Subject to change without prior notice.
Document label: SICRTUs-HBGFPEIECACPAX-ENG_V2.06

Release date: 2017-05-02
Siemens AG Bestellnr.: DC0-011-2.06

Preface
This document is applicable to the following product(s)
• Peripheral elements acc. to IEC 60870-5-101/104 that are supported on SICAM RTUs
platforms and the former system families ACP 1703 and Ax 1703
Purpose
This document describes the standardized, parameter-settable acquisition, processing and

output functions of the process periphery signals, taking into account the methods and
procedures according to IEC 60870-5-101/104 for:
• Single-Point Information
• Double-Point Information
• Integrated Totals via Count Pulses
• Currents
• Voltages
• Measurement in Single-Phase Systems
• Measurement in Three-Phase and Single-Phase Systems
• Measurement in Three-Phase Systems – I/O Module
• Measurement in Three-Phase Systems – I/O Module
• Temperatures
• Pulse commands
• Binary Information Output
• Binary Information- and Command Output
• Setpoint Values by means of Currents and Voltages
In addition, functions are described, that do not uniquely belong to tose listed above:
• Return Information to Pulse Command Assignment
In the corresponding system-element data sheets and system-element handbooks of those

system elements that contain and carry out one or more of these functions,
• Reference is made to this description

• Supplementary information and features that may possibly deviate are specified
SICAM RTUs, Common functions / Peripheral Elements 3

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Preface
Target Group
The document you are reading right now is addressed to users, who are in charge of the
following engineering tasks:
• Conceptual activities, as for example design and configuration

• System parameterization and system diagnostic, using the designated engineering tools
• Technical system maintenance
Above applies, as far as these tasks do not involve manipulations of the hardware.
Manipulating the hardware itself, as for example "unplugging" and "plugging" printed circuit
boards and modules, or working on terminals and/or connectors – for instance when applying
changes to the wiring – are – also if they are an issue in the context of configuration,
parameterization and diagnostic – not subject of this document
Caution
For activities, which comprise hardware manipulations, it is essential to pay attention to the appropriate
safety instructions and to strictly adhere to the appropriate safety regulations.
Safety Instructions
In this document, reference is often made to important information, notifications and

limitations. For clarification, the following conventions are thereby adhered to.
Note
Is an important note concerning characteristic or application of the described function.
Attention
Provides information and explanations, the non-observance of which can lead to faulty behavior of the
system.
4 SICAM RTUs, Common functions / Peripheral Elements

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Preface
Conventions Used
technical term, phrase, or function designation This syntax, for the purpose of easier
readability, identifies a term (also consisting
of several words), a phrase, or a function
designation
The following syntax identifies a parameter or a parameter group. The context in which the
syntax is used shows whether it refers to a parameter or to a parameter group.
<parameter group> | <parameter Parameter (qualified reference, includes

group> | <parameter> "path")
Time management | Daylight saving
time | Daylight saving time ena-
bling
<parameter group> | <parameter Parameter group (qualified reference,

group | *> includes "path")
Time management | Daylight saving
time
<parameter> Parameter
Daylight saving time enabling
IEC_Enable
<parameter group | *> Parameter group

Daylight saving time
<parameter_*> A parameter name that ends with "_*", as

for example Inversion_*, can mean one
or all of the following (uniqueness results
from context), as for example
Inversion
Inversion_0
Inversion_1
# "#" in a parameter group or in a parameter

in a <parameter group | *> or corresponds a number between 0 to 9, as
in a <parameter> for example
PRE# … PRE0, PRE1
S#_U4_min … S0_U4_min, S1_U4_min

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Preface
Several Fundamental Terms
periodical Information A periodical information is an information with a deterministic

transmission behavior and is used for the exchange of a
process signal or a derived information between the peripheral
element and the higher-level open-/closed-loop control function.
Periodical information items are always transmitted in groups
and consequently with the transmission already have a
chronologically consistent interrelationship.
spontaneous information A spontaneous information object is an object, which with

object change is transmitted spontaneously in a message, and is used
for the exchange of a process signal or a derived information
(including Status) between the peripheral element and the
particular automation unit, another automation unit or a control
system.
A spontaneous information object is always transmitted
individually and normally has a time stamp, in order to be able to
establish a chronologically consistent interrelationship later.
system-internal A system-internal information is used exclusively for the

information exchange of control information between peripheral elements
and system functions and is not available to the user. It can be
transported through the system like a periodical information or
like a spontaneous information object.
They are only mentioned in order to explain the behavior of the
described functions.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Table of Contents
1 Single-Point Information .................................................................................................19
1.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................20

1.2 Block Diagram ....................................................................................................21
1.3 Processing Functions .........................................................................................22
1.3.1 Revision .........................................................................................................22
1.3.2 Sensor Voltage Monitoring (Power Monitoring) ............................................22
1.3.3 Inversion ........................................................................................................23
1.3.4 Firmware Filter...............................................................................................23
1.3.4.1 Special Case: Delay of the ON Status .....................................................23
1.3.5 Bounce Suppression .....................................................................................24
1.3.6 Determination of the Cause of Transmission ................................................25
1.4 Common Functions ............................................................................................26
1.4.1 Checking the Binary Information Change due to a Command Initiation .......26
1.5 Data Interface .....................................................................................................27
1.5.1 Spontaneous Information Objects from the Peripheral Element ...................27
1.5.1.1 Single-Point Information ...........................................................................27
1.5.2 Spontaneous Information Objects to the Peripheral Element .......................28
1.5.2.1 Revision ....................................................................................................28
1.5.3 Periodical Information from the Peripheral Element......................................29
2 Double-Point Information ................................................................................................31
2.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................32

2.2 Block Diagram ....................................................................................................34
2.3.1 Acquisition .....................................................................................................35
2.3.2 Revision .........................................................................................................36
2.3.3 Sensor Voltage Monitoring (Power Monitoring) ............................................36
2.3.4 Inversion ........................................................................................................36
2.3.5 Firmware Filter...............................................................................................37
2.3.6 Bounce Suppression .....................................................................................38
2.3.7 Monitoring intermediate- and faulty positions ................................................39
2.3.8 Determination of the Cause of Transmission ................................................40
2.3.8.1 Ax 1703 Platform ......................................................................................40
2.3.8.2 ACP 1703 Platform ...................................................................................41
2.3.9 Reporting switching operations in progress ..................................................42
2.3.10 Breaker Tripping Detection ............................................................................42
2.3.10.1 Local/Remote Criterion.............................................................................43
2.3.11 Breaker Tripping Suppression during Auto-Reclose .....................................44
2.3.11.1 Successful reclosure ................................................................................45
2.3.11.2 Unsuccessful reclosure ............................................................................46

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Table of Contents
2.4 Common Functions ............................................................................................ 47

2.4.1 Checking, whether binary information change is due to command output ... 47
2.4.1.1 Ax 1703 Platform ..................................................................................... 47
2.4.1.2 ACP 1703 Platform .................................................................................. 48
2.5 Data Interface .................................................................................................... 49
2.5.1 Spontaneous Information Objects from the Peripheral Element .................. 49
2.5.1.1 Double-Point Information ......................................................................... 49
2.5.1.2 Switching Operation in Progress ............................................................. 50
2.5.1.3 Breaker Tripping ...................................................................................... 51
2.5.1.4 Automatic Reclosure ............................................................................... 52
2.5.2 Spontaneous Information Objects to the Peripheral Element ...................... 54
2.5.2.1 Revision ................................................................................................... 54
2.5.2.2 Local/Remote Criterion ............................................................................ 55
2.5.2.3 Control Location ...................................................................................... 56
2.5.3 Periodical Information from the Peripheral Element ..................................... 57
3 Integrated Totals via Count Pulses ............................................................................... 59
3.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................ 60

3.2 Acquisition by Firmware ..................................................................................... 62
3.2.1 Block Diagram .............................................................................................. 62
3.2.2 Revision ........................................................................................................ 63
3.2.3 Sensor Voltage Monitoring (Power Monitoring) ............................................ 63
3.2.4 Inversion ....................................................................................................... 64
3.2.5 Pulse Counter ............................................................................................... 64
3.3 Acquisition by Submodule or I/O Module .......................................................... 65
3.3.1 Block Diagram Submodule SM-0574 ........................................................... 65
3.3.2 Block Diagram I/O-module TE-6430 ............................................................. 66
3.3.3 Revision ........................................................................................................ 67
3.3.4 Inversion ....................................................................................................... 68
3.3.5 Pulse Counter ............................................................................................... 68
3.3.6 Non-Volatile Storage..................................................................................... 68
3.4 Common Functions ............................................................................................ 69
3.4.1 Counter Value Formation.............................................................................. 69
3.4.1.1 Count Pulse Evaluation ........................................................................... 69
3.4.1.2 Set Counter.............................................................................................. 69
3.4.2 Formation of Counts (Integrated Totals)....................................................... 70
3.4.2.1 Counter Interrogation ............................................................................... 71
3.4.2.2 Interval Control ........................................................................................ 72
3.4.3 Integrated Total Transmission According to IEC 60870-5-101/104 ............. 73
3.5 Data Interface .................................................................................................... 75
3.5.1 Spontaneous Information Objects from the Peripheral Element .................. 75
3.5.1.1 Integrated Total ....................................................................................... 75
3.5.2 Spontaneous Information Objects to the Peripheral Element ...................... 76
3.5.2.1 Counter Interrogation ............................................................................... 76

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Table of Contents
3.5.2.2 Set Counter ..............................................................................................77

3.5.2.3 Revision ....................................................................................................78
3.5.3 Periodical information from the peripheral element.......................................79
3.5.4 Periodical information to the peripheral element ...........................................79
4 Currents ............................................................................................................................81
4.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................82

4.2 Block Diagram ....................................................................................................83
4.3.1 Revision .........................................................................................................84
4.3.2 Acquisition .....................................................................................................84
4.3.2.1 Noise Rejection ........................................................................................86
4.3.2.2 Automatic Calibration ...............................................................................86
4.3.3 Overflow Suppression ...................................................................................86
4.3.4 87
4.3.5 Adaptation .....................................................................................................87
4.3.5.1 Linear Adaptation .....................................................................................87
4.3.5.2 Zero-Range Suppression .........................................................................88
4.3.5.3 Plausibility Check .....................................................................................88
4.3.5.4 Characteristics ..........................................................................................89
4.3.5.4.1 Unipolar measurement ........................................................................89
4.3.5.4.2 Bipolar measurement ..........................................................................91
4.3.5.4.3 Live zero measurement.......................................................................93
4.3.6 Change monitoring ........................................................................................95
4.4 Data Interface .....................................................................................................97
4.4.1 Spontaneous Information Objects from the Peripheral Element ...................97
4.4.1.1 Measured value ........................................................................................97
4.4.2 Spontaneous information objects to the peripheral element .........................98
4.4.2.1 Revision ....................................................................................................98
5 Voltages ............................................................................................................................99
5.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................100

5.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................101
5.3 Processing Functions .......................................................................................102
5.3.1 Revision .......................................................................................................102
5.3.2 Acquisition ...................................................................................................102
5.3.2.1 Noise Rejection ......................................................................................104
5.3.2.2 Automatic Calibration .............................................................................104
5.3.3 Overflow Suppression .................................................................................104
5.3.4 Smoothing ...................................................................................................105
5.3.5 Adaptation ...................................................................................................105
5.3.5.1 Linear Adaptation ...................................................................................105
5.3.5.2 Zero-range suppression .........................................................................106
5.3.5.3 Plausibility Check ...................................................................................106

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Table of Contents
5.3.5.4 Characteristics ....................................................................................... 107

5.3.5.4.1 Unipolar measurement ..................................................................... 107
5.3.5.4.2 Bipolar measurement ....................................................................... 109
5.3.5.4.3 Live zero measurement .................................................................... 111
5.3.6 Change monitoring ..................................................................................... 113
5.4 Data Interface .................................................................................................. 115
5.4.1 Spontaneous Information Objects from the Peripheral Element ................ 115
5.4.1.1 Measured value ..................................................................................... 115
5.4.2 Spontaneous Information Objects to the Peripheral Element .................... 116
5.4.2.1 Revision ................................................................................................. 116
6 Measurement in Single-Phase Systems ..................................................................... 117
6.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 118

6.2 Block Diagram .................................................................................................. 119
6.3 Transformer Currents (Quadratic Rectification) ............................................... 120
6.4 Transformer Voltages (Quadratic Rectification) .............................................. 121
6.5 Processing Functions ...................................................................................... 122
6.5.1 Revision ...................................................................................................... 122
6.5.2 Acquisition .................................................................................................. 122
6.5.2.1 Noise Rejection ..................................................................................... 122
6.5.2.2 Automatic Calibration ............................................................................ 122
6.5.3 Smoothing ................................................................................................... 123
6.5.4 Adaptation ................................................................................................... 123
6.5.4.1 Linear Adaptation .................................................................................. 123
6.5.4.2 Zero-Range Suppression ...................................................................... 124
6.5.4.3 Characteristic Curve Current ................................................................. 124
6.5.4.4 Characteristic Curve Voltage ................................................................. 125
6.5.5 Change Monitoring ..................................................................................... 126
6.6 Data Interface .................................................................................................. 128
6.6.1.1 Transformer Current or Voltage............................................................. 128
6.6.2.1 Revision ................................................................................................. 129
6.6.3 Periodical Information from the Peripheral Element ................................... 130
7 Measurement in Three-Phase and Single-Phase Systems ....................................... 131
7.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 132

7.2 Block Diagram .................................................................................................. 133
7.3 Transformer Currents ...................................................................................... 134
7.3.1 Acquisition .................................................................................................. 135
7.3.2 Linear Adaptation ........................................................................................ 136
7.3.3 Calculation of the Zero System .................................................................. 136
7.4 Transformer Voltages ...................................................................................... 137
7.4.1 Assignment of the Voltage Transformer Inputs .......................................... 139

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Table of Contents
7.4.2 Acquisition ...................................................................................................140

7.4.3 Linear Adaptation ........................................................................................141
7.4.4 Calculation of the Phase-to-Phase Voltage ................................................141
7.4.5 Calculation of the Phase Voltage ................................................................142
7.4.6 Calculation of the Zero Voltage ...................................................................143
7.4.7 Calculation of the Voltage Difference ..........................................................144
7.4.8 Calculation of the Phase Difference ............................................................145
7.4.8.1 Phase Correction ....................................................................................145
7.4.9 Monitoring of the Voltage Transformer MCB’s ............................................146
7.5 Frequency .........................................................................................................148
7.5.1 Frequency Instantaneous Value..................................................................149
7.5.2 Frequency Mean Value ...............................................................................150
7.5.3 Acquisition ...................................................................................................150
7.5.4 Plausibility Check for Frequency Instantaneous Value and Frequency Mean
Value ...........................................................................................................150
7.5.4.1 Substitute Values ...................................................................................151
7.5.4.2 Failure Strategy ......................................................................................152
7.5.5 Frequency Difference ..................................................................................152
7.6 Active and Reactive Power ...............................................................................154
7.6.1 Power Calculation........................................................................................155
7.6.2 Power Factor ...............................................................................................155
7.6.2.1 Plausibility Check for the Power Factor .................................................156
7.6.3 Calculation of the Active and Reactive Power ............................................157
7.7 Synchrocheck ...................................................................................................159
7.7.1 Block Diagram .............................................................................................161
7.7.2 Revision .......................................................................................................161
7.7.3 Determination of Synchrony ........................................................................162
7.7.3.1 Connection Criteria .................................................................................163
7.7.4 Creation of the Signal "Synchrocheck ok" ...................................................164
7.7.4.1 Signal Set-up Time .................................................................................164
7.7.4.2 Output Duration ......................................................................................165
7.7.4.3 Calculation of the Connection Moment ..................................................166
7.7.5 Relay Output ................................................................................................166
7.7.5.1 Logic Operation ......................................................................................167
7.7.5.2 Monitoring ...............................................................................................167
7.7.6 Synchronoscope ..........................................................................................168
7.7.7 Parameter Switch-Over ...............................................................................169
7.7.7.1 Parameter Bank Selection......................................................................169
7.7.7.2 Special Cases ........................................................................................170
7.7.8 Connecting a De-Energized Line to a System ............................................170
7.8 Common Functions ..........................................................................................173

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Table of Contents
7.8.1 Revision ...................................................................................................... 173

7.8.2 Smoothing ................................................................................................... 173
7.8.3 Format Conversion ..................................................................................... 174
7.8.3.1 Zero-Range Suppression ...................................................................... 174
7.8.3.2 Overrange .............................................................................................. 175
7.8.3.3 Characteristic Transformer Current ....................................................... 176
7.8.3.4 Characteristic Transformer Voltage ....................................................... 178
7.8.4 Change Monitoring ..................................................................................... 180
7.9 Data Interface .................................................................................................. 182
7.9.1.1 Values .................................................................................................... 182
7.9.1.1.1 Resolution, Significant Digits and Unit ............................................. 183
7.9.1.1.2 Error Handling for Spontaneous Information Objects ...................... 185
7.9.1.2 Synchroch. Ux zero active, Synchroch. U4 zero active ........................ 187
7.9.1.3 Synchroch. param.bank x active ........................................................... 188
7.9.2.1 Revision ................................................................................................. 189
7.9.2.2 VT U1 U2 U3 nok, VT U4 nok ............................................................... 190
7.9.2.3 Synchroch. disable Ux zero, Synchroch. disable U4 zero .................... 191
7.9.2.4 Synchroch. param.bank x select ........................................................... 192
7.9.3.1 Error Handling for Periodical Information .............................................. 194
8 Measurement in Three-Phase Systems – Extended Frequency Range................... 197
8.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 198

8.2 Block Diagram .................................................................................................. 199
8.3.1 Acquisition .................................................................................................. 201
8.3.3 Calculation of the Zero Current .................................................................. 202
8.3.4 Calculation of the Positive and Negative Phase Sequence Current .......... 203
8.4.1 Assignment of the Voltage Transformer Inputs .......................................... 206
8.4.2 Acquisition .................................................................................................. 207
8.4.4 Calculation of the phase-to-phase voltage ................................................. 208
8.4.5 Calculation of the Zero Voltage .................................................................. 209
8.4.6 Calculation of the Positive and Negative Phase Sequence Voltage .......... 209
8.4.7 Calculation of the Voltage Difference ......................................................... 210
8.4.8 Calculation of the Phase Difference ........................................................... 211
8.4.8.1 Phase Correction ................................................................................... 211
8.4.8.2 Plausibility Check .................................................................................. 212
8.4.9 Monitoring of the Voltage Transformer-MCB’s ........................................... 212
8.5 Frequency ........................................................................................................ 214

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Table of Contents
8.5.1 Frequency Instantaneous Value..................................................................215

8.5.2 Frequency Mean Value ...............................................................................216
8.5.3 Acquisition ...................................................................................................216
8.5.4 Plausibility Check for Frequency Instantaneous Value and Frequency Mean
Value ...........................................................................................................216
8.5.4.2 Failure Strategy ......................................................................................218
8.5.5 Calculation of the Frequency Difference .....................................................218
8.6.1 Power Calculation........................................................................................221
8.6.2 Apparent Power ...........................................................................................221
8.6.3 Power Factor ...............................................................................................222
8.6.3.1 Plausibility check for the Power Factor ..................................................222
8.6.4 Calculation of the Active and Reactive Power ............................................223
8.6.5 Calculation of the Active and Reactive Energy ...........................................226
8.7 Synchrocheck ...................................................................................................227
8.7.1 Block Diagram .............................................................................................229
8.7.2 Revision .......................................................................................................229
8.7.3 Determination of Synchrony ........................................................................230
8.7.3.1 Connection Criteria .................................................................................231
8.7.4 Creation of the Signal "Synchrocheck ok" ...................................................232
8.7.4.1 Signal Set-up Time .................................................................................232
8.7.4.2 Output Duration ......................................................................................232
8.7.4.3 Calculation of the Connection Moment ..................................................234
8.7.5 Relay Output ................................................................................................234
8.7.5.1 Logic Operation ......................................................................................235
8.7.5.2 Monitoring ...............................................................................................235
8.7.6 Synchronoscope ..........................................................................................236
8.7.7 Parameter Switch-Over ...............................................................................237
8.7.7.1 Parameter Bank Selection......................................................................237
8.7.7.2 Special Cases ........................................................................................238
8.7.8 Connecting a Dde-Energized Line to a System ..........................................238
8.8.1 Revision .......................................................................................................241
8.8.2 Smoothing ...................................................................................................241
8.8.3 Format Conversion ......................................................................................242
8.8.3.1 Zero-Range Suppression .......................................................................242
8.8.3.2 Overrange ..............................................................................................243
8.8.3.3 Characteristic Transformer Current ........................................................244
8.8.3.4 Characteristic Transformer Voltage .......................................................246
8.8.4 Change Monitoring ......................................................................................248
8.9 Data Interface ...................................................................................................250

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Table of Contents
8.9.1.1 Values .................................................................................................... 250
8.9.1.1.1 Resolution, significant digits and unit ............................................... 251
8.9.1.1.2 Error Handling for Spontaneous Information Objects ...................... 254
8.9.1.2 Synchroch. Ux zero active, Synchroch. U4 zero active ........................ 256
8.9.1.3 Synchroch. param.bank x active ........................................................... 257
8.9.2.1 Revision ................................................................................................. 258
8.9.2.2 VT U1 U2 U3 nok, VT U4 nok ............................................................... 259
8.9.2.3 Synchroch. disable Ux zero, Synchroch. disable U4 zero .................... 260
8.9.2.4 Synchroch. param.bank x select ........................................................... 261
8.9.3.1 Error Handling for Periodical Information .............................................. 263
9 Measurement in Three-Phase Systems – I/O Module ................................................ 267
9.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 268

9.2 Block Diagram .................................................................................................. 269
9.3.1 Acquisition .................................................................................................. 271
9.3.3 Calculation of the Ground Current .............................................................. 272
9.4.1 Acquisition .................................................................................................. 274
9.4.3 Calculation of the Phase-to-Phase Voltage ................................................ 275
9.4.4 Calculation of the Zero Voltage .................................................................. 276
9.4.5 Monitoring of the Voltage Transformer-MCB .............................................. 276
9.5 Frequency ........................................................................................................ 277
9.5.1 Acquisition .................................................................................................. 277
9.6 Active and Reactive Power .............................................................................. 278
9.6.1 Power Calculation ....................................................................................... 279
9.6.2 Apparent Power .......................................................................................... 279
9.6.3 Power Factor .............................................................................................. 279
9.6.4 Calculation of the Active and Reactive Power ............................................ 280
9.7 Fault Detection ................................................................................................. 281
9.7.1 Phase Fault and Ground Fault ................................................................... 281
9.7.1.1 Fault Reset Mechanism ......................................................................... 283
9.7.2 Determination of Fault Direction ................................................................. 284
9.7.2.1 Direction Determination of Phase Elements.......................................... 285
9.7.2.2 Directional Ground Fault (Compensated/Resonant Grounded) ............ 285
9.7.2.3 Directional Ground Fault (Isolated Grounded) ...................................... 286
9.7.2.4 Ground Fault Direction for Solid Grounded Network ............................. 287
9.7.3 Wattmetric Method ...................................................................................... 287
9.7.4 3-Phase Angle Calculations ....................................................................... 288

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Table of Contents
9.7.5 Trip Time DMT (50) .....................................................................................289

9.8.1 Revision .......................................................................................................290
9.8.2 Format Conversion ......................................................................................290
9.8.2.1 Overrange ..............................................................................................291
9.8.2.2 Characteristic Transformer Current ........................................................292
9.8.2.3 Characteristic Transformer Voltage .......................................................294
9.8.3 Change Monitoring ......................................................................................296
9.9 Data Interface ...................................................................................................298
9.9.1 Spontaneous Information Objects from the Peripheral Element .................298
9.9.1.1 Analog Values ........................................................................................298
9.9.1.1.1 Resolution, Significant Digits and Unit ..............................................299
9.9.1.1.2 Error Handling for Spontaneous Information Objects .......................302
9.9.1.2 Binary Data .............................................................................................303
9.9.2 Spontaneous Information Objects to the Peripheral Element .....................304
9.9.2.1 Revision ..................................................................................................304
9.9.2.2 VT U1 U2 U3 nok ...................................................................................305
10 Temperatures .................................................................................................................307
10.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................308

10.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................309
10.3 Revision ............................................................................................................310
10.4 Acquisition ........................................................................................................311
10.4.1 Noise rejection .............................................................................................311
10.4.2 Automatic calibration ...................................................................................311
10.4.3 Calibration for 2-Wire Technique.................................................................311
10.5 Smoothing.........................................................................................................313
10.6 Adaptation.........................................................................................................314
10.7 Gradient monitoring ..........................................................................................315
10.8 Change monitoring ...........................................................................................316
10.9 Data Interface ...................................................................................................317
10.9.1.1 Temperature or Resistance ....................................................................317
10.9.1.2 Gradient 1 and Gradient 2 ......................................................................318
10.9.2.1 Revision ..................................................................................................319
10.9.3 Periodical information to the peripheral element .........................................319
11 Pulse commands............................................................................................................321
11.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................322

11.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................326
11.3 Command Output Procedure............................................................................327
11.3.1 Principle of the Command Output ...............................................................327
11.3.2 Command Output without Hardware-Related Checks (OC) .......................328

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Table of Contents
11.3.3 Command Output with Internal Checks (IC1) ............................................. 329

11.3.4 Command Output with Continuity Check (CC1) ......................................... 330
11.3.5 Command Output with Resistance Check (RC1) ....................................... 333
11.3.6 Dynamic Behaviour..................................................................................... 335
11.4 Circuitry Variants.............................................................................................. 336
11.4.1 1-pole Circuitry ............................................................................................ 337
11.4.2 1½-pole Circuitry......................................................................................... 338
11.4.3 2-pole Circuitry ............................................................................................ 339
11.4.4 Circuitry with Motor ..................................................................................... 340
11.4.5 Special Case Double Command ................................................................ 341
11.5 Functions Independent of the Hardware of the System Element .................... 342
11.5.1 Prepare Command Output Procedure ........................................................ 342
11.5.1.1 Formal Check ........................................................................................ 342
11.5.1.2 Retry Suppression ................................................................................. 343
11.5.1.3 Direct Command .................................................................................... 343
11.5.1.4 Select and Execute Command .............................................................. 344
11.5.2 Initiate Command Output Procedure .......................................................... 346
11.5.2.1 1-out-of-n Check .................................................................................... 346
11.5.2.2 System-Element Overlapping 1-out-of-n check..................................... 346
11.5.2.3 Control Location Check ......................................................................... 347
11.5.2.4 Set control location ................................................................................ 348
11.5.2.5 Command Locking ................................................................................. 349
11.5.2.6 Synchronization ..................................................................................... 349
11.5.2.7 Revision ................................................................................................. 352
11.5.3 Monitor Pulse Duration ............................................................................... 352
11.5.3.1 Command Output Time ......................................................................... 352
11.5.3.2 Return Information Monitoring ............................................................... 353
11.5.3.3 Command Prolongation ......................................................................... 354
11.5.3.4 Special Cases ........................................................................................ 355
11.6 Functions Dependent on the Hardware of the System Element ..................... 357
11.6.1 Idle Check ................................................................................................... 357
11.6.2 Selective Activation Check ......................................................................... 357
11.6.3 Continuity Check ......................................................................................... 357
11.6.4 Resistance Check ....................................................................................... 358
11.6.5 Current Flow Measurement ........................................................................ 358
11.6.6 Activation of Actuators with Series-Break Contacts ................................... 358
11.6.7 Earth Fault Check ....................................................................................... 359
11.6.7.1 Earth Fault Detection with 1.5- or 2-pole Circuitry................................. 359
11.6.7.2 Earth Fault Detection with 1-Pole Circuitry............................................ 360
11.7 Additional Functions ........................................................................................ 361
11.7.1 Error Handling ............................................................................................. 361
11.7.1.1 Cancel .................................................................................................... 361
11.7.1.2 Cancel with Additional (Extra) Information ............................................ 361
11.7.1.3 Cancel with Diagnostic .......................................................................... 361

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Table of Contents
11.7.1.4 Cancel with Locking ...............................................................................362

11.7.1.5 Acknowledgement of the Command Output Fault .................................362
11.7.2 Monitoring the Command Output Sequence ...............................................362
11.7.3 Periodical Control Circuit Check ..................................................................363
11.7.4 Switching Sequence ....................................................................................363
11.7.5 Regulating Step Command .........................................................................364
11.7.6 Regulating Command ..................................................................................364
11.7.7 Command Output Procedure for the Auto-Reclose Function .....................365
11.7.7.1 Principle of the Command Output ..........................................................367
11.7.7.2 Time Characteristic ................................................................................368
11.8 Data Interface ...................................................................................................369
11.8.1.1 Command ...............................................................................................369
11.8.1.2 Revision ..................................................................................................370
11.8.1.3 Control Location .....................................................................................371
11.8.1.4 Command Fault Acknowledgement (Direct Command) .........................372
11.8.2.1 Confirmation of the Command ...............................................................373
11.8.2.2 Synchronization in Progress ..................................................................374
11.8.2.3 Synchronization Abortion .......................................................................375
11.8.2.4 Sum Command Interlocked ....................................................................376
11.8.3 Periodical Information from the Peripheral Element....................................377
11.8.4 Periodical information to the peripheral element .........................................378
12 Binary Information Output ............................................................................................379
12.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................380

12.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................381
12.3 Selective Activation Check ...............................................................................382
12.4 Deactivation or Retention on Failure ................................................................383
12.5 Data Interface ...................................................................................................384
12.5.1.1 Binary Information Output ......................................................................384
12.5.2 Periodical information to the Peripheral Element ........................................385
13 Binary Information- and Command Output .................................................................387
13.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................388

13.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................390
13.3 Single-Point Information (TI 30) or Periodical Information ...............................391
13.4 Single Command (TI 45) or Double Command (TI46) .....................................392
13.4.1 Assignment to an Output Pair .....................................................................392
13.4.2 Formal Check ..............................................................................................393
13.4.3 Direct Command..........................................................................................393
13.4.4 Select and execute command .....................................................................394
13.4.5 Persistent command ....................................................................................396

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Table of Contents
13.4.6 Pulse command .......................................................................................... 397

13.5 Common Functions .......................................................................................... 398
13.5.1 Selective activation check........................................................................... 398
13.5.2 Deactivation or retention on failure ............................................................. 398
13.5.3 Cause of transmission of the belonging return information ........................ 399
13.6 Data Interface .................................................................................................. 400
13.6.1 Spontaneous information objects towards the peripheral element ............ 400
13.6.1.1.1 Binary information output ................................................................. 400
13.6.2.1 Confirmation of the Command............................................................... 402
13.6.2.2 Periodical Information to the Peripheral Element .................................. 403
14 Setpoint Values by means of Currents and Voltages................................................ 405
14.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 406

14.2 Block Diagram .................................................................................................. 407
14.3 Processing Functions ...................................................................................... 408
14.3.1 Formal Check ............................................................................................. 408
14.3.2 Direct Command ......................................................................................... 408
14.3.3 Select and Execute Command ................................................................... 408
14.3.4 Adaptation ................................................................................................... 410
14.3.4.1 Linear Adaptation .................................................................................. 410
14.3.4.2 Characteristic ......................................................................................... 411
14.3.5 Substitute value or retention on failure ....................................................... 412
14.4 Data Interface .................................................................................................. 413
14.4.1.1 Setpoint value ........................................................................................ 413
14.4.2.1 Confirmation of the Setpoint Value ........................................................ 415
14.4.3 Periodical information to the peripheral element ........................................ 415
15 Return Information to Pulse Command Assignment ................................................ 417
15.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 418

15.2 Sequential Procedure for Command Transmission ......................................... 419
15.2.1 Special Case of Switching Sequences ....................................................... 419
15.3 ACP 1703 Platform .......................................................................................... 420
15.3.1 Information Acquisition and Pulse Command Output on the Same Peripheral
Element ....................................................................................................... 420
15.3.2 Information Acquisition and Pulse Command Output on Different Peripheral
Elements ..................................................................................................... 422
15.4 Ax 1703 Platform ............................................................................................. 423
15.4.1 Information Acquisition and Pulse Command Output on the Same Peripheral
Element ....................................................................................................... 423
15.4.2 Information Acquisition and Pulse Command Output on Different Peripheral
Elements ..................................................................................................... 424

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
1 Single-Point Information
Content
1.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................20

1.2 Block Diagram ....................................................................................................21
1.5 Data Interface .....................................................................................................27

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Single-Point Information
1.1 Introduction
The acquisition of the binary inputs is carried out depending on the system element used, with
an acquisition grid of 1 ms or 10 ms.
The processing of the binary inputs to single-point information and the time-tagging of the
messages for the data transfer is carried out with a resolution corresponding to the acquisition
grid.
The assignment of the single-point information to the binary inputs in the OPM II takes place
for each data point by placing an image on a HW-PIN in the system technique with the
category firmware / DI_SI (single-point information). This category also contains all parameters
of the processing functions.
Each single-point information can be assigned an arbitrary binary input.
Processing functions:
• Revision
• Power Monitoring
• Inversion
• Firmware Filter
─ Special case: Delay of the ON-status
• Bounce Suppression
• Determination of the cause of transmission
Transported over the data interface are:
Information Category
Periodical information • Acquired process signals
− Single-point information firmware / DI_SI
• Derived information
− Voltage failure firmware / SW_DI
− Sum bounce faultacquisition firmware / SW_DI
failure
− Acquisition error firmware / SW_DI
• Control information
− Command C00 .. Cnn in system-internal information
progress
Spontaneous information • Acquired process signals
objects − Single-point information firmware / DI_SI
− Revision firmware / SW_REV
The column "Category" specifies, in which category
• the usage of the periodical information for CAEx II or CAEx plus is enabled.
• the message address of the spontaneous information object is to be parameterized.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
1.2 Block Diagram
Power Binary
monitoring inputs
PM0 .. PMn IN D00 … IN Dnn
Acquisition with
Power monitoring Revision
time stamp
Inversion
Firmware filter
Bounce suppression
Voltage failure Dxx..Dyy (for each group)
Determination of
cause of
transmission
(only on ACP 1703 platforms)
Sum bounce suppression
Single-point information
Command Cxx in
Acquisition error
progress
Revision
EM Dxx
IN Dxx
System Spontaneous information objects

Periodical information
internal
Data interface

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
1.3 Processing Functions
1.3.1 Revision
The revision enables the blocking of the acquisition of all inputs of a system element.
If a system element is in revision:
• the states of the inputs are frozen for the duration of the revision
• after revision is activated the spontaneous information objects are transferred with the
frozen state and the quality descriptor BL
On principle, the revision always acts on all datapoints of a periphery element.
The activation of the revision takes place by means of a spontaneous information object
"Revision". This spontaneous information object is transmitted in a message with process
information in the format "single-point information with CP56Time2a time stamp". The
classification of this message is carried out in the OPM II with the category firmware /
SW_REV.
By means of the parameter input function in the category firmware / DI_SI (single-point
information) binary inputs can be excluded from the revision.
Note
The activation of the revision does not thereby take place automatically, but must be programmed in an
application program of the open-/closed-loop control function.
1.3.2 Sensor Voltage Monitoring (Power Monitoring)
The sensor voltage of a group of binary inputs is monitored for failure. For this an individual
binary input (power monitoring) is provided for each group. This binary input is to be
connected to the fused sensor voltage of the group to be monitored. A sensor voltage failure
is detected when the binary input (power monitoring) is de-energized.
Only those inputs are affected by the consequences of the power monitoring which are
selected, on a per input basis, by using parameter SVM_monitoring.
Sensor voltage failure means, that
• the states of affected inputs are frozen

• for each group a periodical information "Voltage failure" is set in the process image of the
open- and closed-loop control function
• for each group a diagnostic information of the class "external" is set
• the spontaneous information objects of concerned inputs and information items derived
therefrom are transmitted with states before the sensor voltage failure and the quality
descriptor IV
• the spontaneous information objects of affected inputs with states before the sensor
voltage failure and the quality descriptor IV are transmitted

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
1.3.3 Inversion
The active state of the binary inputs (working current / closed-circuit current) can be
determined for each input with the parameter Inversion_*.
1.3.4 Firmware Filter
Pulses at the binary input, that are present for a shorter time than the parameterized filter time
(SW_Filter_t), are suppressed. The firmware filter acts on both positive as well as negative
pulses.
The firmware filter can be switched on for each binary input. The filter time can be set with a
resolution of the acquisition grid.
For the transfer as spontaneous information object, time-tagging takes place with the time of
the change of the binary input.
Binary
input
Filter time
Time tag Time tag

Spontaneous information object
Binary
information
1.3.4.1 Special Case: Delay of the ON Status
Positive pulses at the binary input, that are present for a shorter time than the parameterized
delay time (Delay_t) are suppressed. The delay time can be set in seconds for each input.
the change of the positive edge of the binary input. The transfer of the negative edge takes
place without delay.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
1.3.5 Bounce Suppression
The bounce suppression is used for suppressing and signaling unwanted, often repeating
changes of the binary input.
Often repeating changes then occur when several edge-changes take place within the
parameterized bounce suppression time. Each edge-change starts the bounce suppression
time anew.
The bounce suppression can be switched on for each binary input. The bounce suppression
time (Flutt_t) can be set with a resolution of 100 ms.
Before the bounce suppression is active, a parameterized number (parameter

Flutt_Number) of two successive edge-changes (so-called transients) is transferred without
time delay.
On reaching the parameterized number of transients, if it occurs within the bounce

suppression time, with the next transient:
• the state of the binary input is frozen

• the spontaneous information object is transferred with the frozen or parametrized (parame-
ter State_of_flutter_information) state and the quality descriptor BL or IV (parame-
ter Flutt_dp_qds)
• a sum "Bounce fault" is generated over all binary information of the system element and a
periodical information "Sum bounce fault" is set.
If the binary input remains stable for longer than the bounce suppression time,
• the spontaneous information object is transferred with the current state and without the
quality descriptor BL
• a sum "Bounce fault" is generated over all binary information of the system element and
transferred as periodical information "Sum bounce fault".
The following picture shows, which spontaneous information objects can be transmitted with a
parameterized number of two transients (Flutt_Number).
Binary Input
Bounce
suppression
time
Parameter „Flutt_Number“ = 2
Binary
information object
information
Spontaneous
Quality
descriptor
„blocked“

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
1.3.6 Determination of the Cause of Transmission
This function is only available when using the system element in ACP 1703 platforms.
The cause of transmission is derived from the originator address of the associated
spontaneous information object "Command".
On reaching the setpoint position during a valid command output procedure (see Checking the
Binary Information Change due to a Command Initiation) the cause of transmission is entered
in the spontaneous information object "single-point information" depending on the originator
address of the command currently running.
In all other cases (e.g. no valid command output procedure) changes to the state are
transferred with a cause of transmission "spontaneous".
The following table shows the derivation of the cause of transmission from the originator
address
Originator address Cause of Transmission

0 spontaneous
1…127 return information, caused by a remote command
128…255 return information, caused by a local command

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
1.4 Common Functions
Functions described here are used commonly by the previously described functions.
1.4.1 Checking the Binary Information Change due to a Command Ini-

tiation
The task is the checking of whether a binary information change has resulted from the
associated command being issued previously.
The result of this check is required for the processing of the following function:
Note
For this check the function return information monitoring (see pulse commands) must be activated for the
corresponding command.
If a command acts on the actuator, a system-internal periodical information "Command

C00...Cnn in progress" is made available by the assigned pulse command output.
This information is set on actuation of the actuator and reset after the command intiation is
concluded (spontaneous information object "Command" with the cause of transmission
"Termination of activation").
The validity of the command initiation exists as long as the system-internal periodical infor-
mation "Command C00 .. Cnn in progress" is set.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
1.5 Data Interface
1.5.1 Spontaneous Information Objects from the Peripheral Element
1.5.1.1 Single-Point Information
Elements of the Message

TI…Type identification TI 30 single-point information with time tag CP56Time2a
CASDU, IOA .. Message address can be set using parameters
SPI…single point information 0…OFF
1…ON
QDS…Quality descriptor
BL…blocked peripheral element marked for revision, or bounce error triggered
SB…substituted not substituted
NT…not topical created by the basic system element due to peripheral element
failure
IV…invalid sensor voltage lost, acquisition error or bounce error triggered
Cause of transmission
02…background scan not supported
03…spontaneous upon change of information state or quality descriptor
05…requested not supported
11…return information, caused by not supported
a remote command
a local command
20…interrogated by station inter- upon receipt of a GI request or
rogation automatically after startup, parameter change, etc.
21-36…interrogated by group not supported
1-16 interrogation
P/N…positive/negative confirma- positive
tion
T…test no test
Originator address default

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
1.5.2 Spontaneous Information Objects to the Peripheral Element
1.5.2.1 Revision
Elements of the message

TI…Type identification TI 30 single-point information with CP56Time2a time stamp
SPI…single point information 0…no revision
1…revision
QDS…quality descriptor
BL…blocked SPI is not evaluated
SB…substituted not evaluated
NT…not topical not evaluated
IV…invalid SPI is not evaluated
02…background scan SPI is evaluated depending on quality descriptor
03…spontaneous SPI is evaluated depending on quality descriptor
05…requested SPI is evaluated depending on quality descriptor
11…state information, caused by SPI is evaluated depending on quality descriptor
a remote command
a local command
20…interrogated by general SPI is evaluated depending on quality descriptor
interrogation
21-36…interrogated by group SPI is evaluated depending on quality descriptor
1-16 interrogation
P/N…positive/negative confirma- not evaluated
tion
T…test not evaluated
Originator address not evaluated

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
1.5.3 Periodical Information from the Peripheral Element
The shortest update interval depends on the peripheral element and can be found in
column A.
To the open-/closed-loop control function

The update interval of data points (OPM II) also depends on the cycle time of the open-/closed-
loop control function. This may lead to longer updating intervals than those stated.
Data Point (OPM Value Range Meaning A

II)
SI Dxx, binary single-point information, state of binary inputs 10 ms
SI IN Dxx, IN D00…IN Dnn after the inversion
SI IOMx IN Dxx
Voltage failure binary inverted state of the Power Monitoring input of the 10 ms
Dxx - Dyy group.
This information is only then relevant, if the power
monitoring is switched on for this group.
Sum bounce fault binary 100 ms
Acquisition error binary peridocal information SI D00 .. SI Dnn and voltage 10 ms
failure Dxx - Dyy invalid

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
2 Double-Point Information
Content
2.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................32

2.2 Block Diagram ....................................................................................................34
2.5 Data Interface .....................................................................................................49

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Double-Point Information
2.1 Introduction
The acquisition of the binary inputs is carried out depending on the system element used, with
an acquisition grid of 1 ms or 10 ms.
The processing of the binary inputs to double-point information and the time-tagging of the
messages for the data transfer is carried out with a resolution corresponding to the acquisition
grid.
The assignment of the double-point information to the binary inputs in the OPM II takes place
category firmware / DI_SI (double-point information). This category also contains all
parameters of the processing functions.
• Acquisition
• Revision
• Power Monitoring
• Inversion
• Firmware Filter
• Bounce Suppression
• Monitoring intermediate- and faulty positions
• Reporting switching operations in progress
• Breaker Tripping Detection
• Automatic Reclosure

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
The following information items are transported over the data interface
− Single-point information (only in dedicated CAEX link
Ax 1703 platforms)
− Double-point information (only in firmware / DI_DI
ACP 1703 platforms)
− Voltage failure firmware / SW_DI
− Sum bounce fault firmware / SW_DI
− Acquisition error firmware / SW_DI
− AR CB controllable firmware / SW_DO
− Command C00 .. Cnn in system-internal information
progress
objects − Double-Point Information firmware / DI_DI
− Switching operation in progress firmware / SW_DI_SOR
− Breaker Tripping firmware / SW_DI_BT
− Automatic Reclosure firmware / SW_DI_AR
− Control location (only in Ax 1703 firmware /
platforms) SW_CONTROL_LOCATION
− Local/remote criterion firmware / SW_LOC_REM

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
2.2 Block Diagram
Power Binary
monitoring inputs
PM0 … PMn IN D00 / D01 … IN Dnn(-1) / Dnn
Acquisition with
Power monitoring Revision
time stamp
Inversion
Firmware filter
Bounce suppression
EM Dxx (only on Ax 1703 platforms) / DM Dxx (only on ACP 1703 platforms)
Monitoring of the
intermediate- and Signaling of switching
faulty position operations in progress
Voltage failure Dxx..Dyy (for each group)
Breaker-tripping
detection
Determination of
cause of Automatic reclosing
Sum bounce suppression
transmission
Automatic reclosing
Switching operation
(only in Ax 1703 platforms)
Acquisition error
Breaker tripping
Control location
Command Cxx
Remote-local
Double-point
information
in progress
in progress
Revision
criterion
IN Dxx
Periodical System Spontaneous information objects

information internal
Data interface

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
2.3.1 Acquisition
For the further processing of the double-point information the circuitry of the binary inputs is of
vital importance. Normally following assignment is to be adhered to:
• OFF-Information at the less significant bit

• ON-Information at the more significant bit
The two binary information bits of a double-point information must lie within a half-nibble.
When using the system element in an ACP platform it is possible to overrule this circuitry rule
with the parameter ON_before_OFF.
Parameter ON_before_OFF = NO … the above mentioned normal case is valid
Parameter ON_before_OFF = YES … ON-Information at the less significant bit

OFF-Information at the more significant bit
Pay attention, that the parameters, which are marked with a wildcard (<parameter_*>), are
assigned to the input. These parameters must be treated as follows:
Parameter ON_before_OFF = NO … <parameter_0> OFF-Information

<parameter_1> ON-Information
Parameter ON_before_OFF = YES … <parameter_0> ON-Information

<parameter_1> OFF-Information
Note
When changing the parameter "ON_before_OFF" the parameters with a wildcard (<parameter_*>) must
be corrected.
If the double-point information items are used also for the return information of pulse commands, you need
to take care for the correct (uniform) circuitry of the pulse commands.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
2.3.2 Revision
SW_REV.

descriptor IV
2.3.4 Inversion

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
2.3.5 Firmware Filter
Pulses at the binary input, that are present for a shorter time than the parameterized filter time
(SW_Filter_t), are suppressed. The firmware filter acts on both positive as well as negative
pulses.
The firmware filter can be switched on for each binary input. The filter time can be set with a
resolution of the acquisition grid.
the change of the binary input.
Binary
input
Filter time
Time tag Time tag

Binary
information

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
2.3.6 Bounce Suppression
The bounce suppression is used for suppressing and signaling unwanted, often repeating
changes of the binary input.
Often repeating changes then occur when several edge-changes take place within the
parameterized bounce suppression time. Each edge-change starts the bounce suppression
time anew.
The bounce suppression can be switched on for each binary input. The bounce suppression
time (Flutt_t) can be set with a resolution of 100 ms.
Before the bounce suppression is active, a parameterized number (parameter

Flutt_Number) of two successive edge-changes (so-called transients) is transferred without
time delay.
On reaching the parameterized number of transients, if it occurs within the bounce

suppression time, with the next transient:
• the state of the binary input is frozen

• the spontaneous information object is transferred with the frozen or parametrized (parame-
ter State_of_flutter_information) state and the quality descriptor BL or IV (parame-
ter Flutt_dp_qds)
• a sum "Bounce fault" is generated over all binary information of the system element and a
periodical information "Sum bounce fault" is set.
If the binary input remains stable for longer than the bounce suppression time,
• the spontaneous information object is transferred with the current state and without the
quality descriptor BL
• a sum "Bounce fault" is generated over all binary information of the system element and
transferred as periodical information "Sum bounce fault".
The following picture shows, which spontaneous information objects can be transmitted with a
parameterized number of two transients (Flutt_Number).
Binary Input
Bounce
suppression
time
Parameter „Flutt_Number“ = 2
Binary
information object
information
Spontaneous
Quality
descriptor
„blocked“

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
2.3.7 Monitoring intermediate- and faulty positions
The transfer of an intermediate position (neither ON- nor OFF binary information exists) or a
faulty position (both ON- as well as OFF binary information exists) is suppressed for a
parameterizable time.
For the suppression of the intermediate position an intermediate-position suppression time

(Parameter int_posit_t) can be parameterized for each double-point information.
For the suppression of the faulty position, a faulty-position suppression time (faulty_pos_t)
can be parameterized for all double-point information of a peripheral element.
In order to signal the effect of a given command with long-time moving actuators, a
spontaneous information object "switching operation in progress" is transferred as soon as the
actuator leaves the present current position. (see"Reporting switching operations in progress")
Fault:
Intermediate position
Double-point information
„ON“
„OFF“
Intermediate-position
suppression time
Time tag
information object
ON ON
Spontaneous
Double-point information DIFF DIFF

OFF OFF
Switching operation
in progress

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
2.3.8 Determination of the Cause of Transmission
Depending on the use of the system element, various methods for determining the cause of
transmission are used.
2.3.8.1 Ax 1703 Platform
The cause of transmission is derived from the set control location. This control location is valid
for all binary information of the system element.
On reaching the setpoint position or after expiry of the intermediate-position suppression time
during a valid command initiation (see Checking, whether binary information change is due to
command output), the cause of transmission is entered in the spontaneous information object
"Double-point information" depending on the set control location.
In all other cases (e.g. without valid command initiation) changes to the state of the double-
point information items are transferred with a cause of transmission "spontaneous".
The following table shows the derivation of the cause of transmission from the set control
location
Control Location Cause of Transmission

No control location spontaneous
0 spontaneous
Not all control locations within the spontaneous
range
"remote" 1…127
Not all control locations within the spontaneous
range
"local" 128…256
The control location is set by the spontaneous information object "control location" and is valid
for all data points of a system element. This spontaneous information object is transmitted in a
message with process information. The classification of this message is carried out in the
OPM II with the category firmware / SW_CONTR_LOCATION.
Note
The selection of the control location and the generation of the spontaneous information object "Control
location" must be programmed in an application program of the open-/closed-loop control function.
If for the spontaneous information object "Control location" the format "measured value,
scaled value with CP56Time2a time stamp" is selected, only one control location can be set.
If for the spontaneous information object "Control location" the format "single command" is
selected, up to 256 control locations can be set at the same time. With a command with the
single command state "ON", the control location is added to the list of control locations.
Thereby it must be observed, that with several control locations, all these control locations
must lie within the ranges "remote" or "local".

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
For the spontaneous information object "Control location" with the format "Single command" a
check on formal correctness takes place (see section "Spontaneous Information Objects to
the Peripheral Element / Control Location") Depending on these check a positive or negative
ACTCON is sent. In case of a positive ACTCON also a positive ACTTERM is sent. Sending
the confirmation of the command (positive/negative ACTCON and ACTTERM) can be
switched on or off by the parameter ACTCON_yes_no.
With the spontaneous information object "Control location" in the format "Command" with the
single command state OFF, all control locations are deleted ("No control location"). In this
case the originator address is not evaluated.
Note:
If the spontaneous information object "Control location" with the format "Single command" is selected, the
control location(s) is (are) to be set at every startup of the system element.
2.3.8.2 ACP 1703 Platform
The cause of transmission is derived from the originator address of the associated
spontaneous information object "Command".
On reaching the setpoint position or after expiry of the intermediate-position suppression time
during a valid command initiation (see Checking, whether binary information change is due to
command output), the cause of transmission is entered in the spontaneous information object
"Double-point information" depending on the originator address of the command currently in
progress.
In all other cases (e.g. no valid command initiation) changes to the state are transferred with a
cause of transmission "spontaneous".
The following table shows the derivation of the cause of transmission from the originator
address
Originator address Cause of Transmission

0 spontaneous

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
2.3.9 Reporting switching operations in progress
The assignment of the message address for the spontaneous information object "switching
operation in progress" is carried out in the OPM II with the category firmware / SW_DI_SOR.
The reporting of current switching actions can be switched on for each peripheral element with
the assignment the message address.
The spontaneous information object "switching operation in progress" with the state ON is
then always transmitted when a change from the current position to the intermediate- or faulty
position is detected. The state OFF is transmitted, if either the other position has been
reached or the intermediate- or faulty position suppression time has expired.
Note
This function is also effective without valid command initiation.
2.3.10 Breaker Tripping Detection
The breaker tripping detection is used for signaling a change of state from ON to OFF of those
actuators, that was brought about without valid command initiation (see Checking, whether bi-
nary information change is due to command output).
The assignment of the message address for the spontaneous information object "breaker
tripping" is carried out in the OPM II with the category firmware / SW_DI_BT.
The function breaker tripping detection can be switched on for each peripheral element with
the assignment of the message address.
A breaker tripping is detected when the "Local/Remote Criterion" is in the state REMOTE and
a binary information change occurs without valid command initiation from the state "ON" to-
wards "OFF".
In this case a spontaneous information object "Breaker tripping" is transferred with a positive
transient.
Fault:
„ON“
„OFF“
suppression time
ON ON
information object
DIFF DIFF
Spontaneous
OFF OFF Time tag
Breaker tripping
Switching operation
in progress

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Note
With the automatic reclosure function switched on, the information object "Breaker tripping" is only
transmitted after unsuccessful reclosing.
2.3.10.1 Local/Remote Criterion
For the breaker tripping detection the so-called "Local/Remote criterion" can also be
evaluated.
The "Local/Remote criterion" can assume two states:
• The state REMOTE of the "Local/Remote criterion" means, that the actuator is controlled
by an associated spontaneous information object "Command".
• The state LOCAL of the "Local/Remote criterion" means, that the actuator is not controlled
by a spontaneous information object "Command", but rather e.g. by operating equipment
that actuate the actuator directly.
Note
The terms REMOTE and LOCAL do not correspond with those of the control location and the originator
address (see Determination of the Cause of Transmission).
The "Local/Remote criterion" is set by the spontaneous information object "Local/Remote

criterion" and is valid for all data points of the peripheral element.
The assignment of the message address for the spontaneous information object
"Local/Remote criterion" is carried out in the OPM II with the category firmware /
SW_LOC_REM.
The evaluation of the "Local/Remore criterion" can be switched on for each peripheral element
with the assignment of the message address.
If the evaluation of the "Local/Remote criterion" is switched off, the state REMOTE is
assumed.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
2.3.11 Breaker Tripping Suppression during Auto-Reclose
After a breaker tripping (see Breaker Tripping Detection) it is checked, whether the state "ON"
is achieved again (automatic reclosure) within a defined time (AR-monitoring time).
The function of the automatic reclosure can be switched on for each double-point information.
Differentiation is made between a successful and an unsuccessful reclosure.
The length of the AR-monitoring time is usually defined by the parameter AR_sign_t.
For special applications, the AR-monitoring time can be shortened or extended by the
periodical information "AR CB_controllable".
If, after a circuit breaker trip, during the period of time defined by the parameter AR_sign_t,
the periodical information "AR CB_controllable" becomes set or was already set, the duration
of the AR-monitoring time is only defined by this periodical information. In order to terminate
the AR-monitoring time interval a negative edge of the periodical information
"AR CB_controllable" is required.
AR-monitoring time truncated
„ON“
„OFF“
AR-Monitoring time
AWE_Sign_t
periodical information
AR CB_controllable
truncated
AR-monitoring time extended
„ON“
„OFF“
AR-Monitoring time
AR_Sign_t
AR CB_controllable
extended

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
2.3.11.1 Successful reclosure
A reclosure is considered successful when the original state "ON" is restored within the AR-
monitoring time after a breaker tripping.
• Changes of state in this time period are not transferred.

• With the successful reclosure the spontaneous information object "automatic reclosure" is
transmitted.
The assignment of the message address for the spontaneous information object "automatic
reclosure" is carried out in the OPM II with the category firmware / SW_DI_AR.
The transmission of the spontaneous information object "automatic reclosure" can be

switched on for each peripheral element with the assignment of the message address.
„ON“
„OFF“
suppression time
AR-Monitoring time
ON
Double-point information DIFF
OFF
information object
Spontaneous
Breaker tripping
Switching operation
in progress
Automatic reclosing

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
2.3.11.2 Unsuccessful reclosure
A reclosure is considered unsuccessful when the original state "ON" is not restored within the
AR-monitoring time after a breaker tripping.
• Changes of state in this time period are not transferred.

• On expiry of the monitoring time the curent state of the double-point information is
transmitted with the spontaneous information object "double-point information".
• On expiry of the monitoring time the spontaneous information object "breaker tripping" is
transmitted.
• A monitoring for faulty- and intermediate position is not carried out for this time period.
Normal Fault:
„ON“
„OFF“
ineffective
suppression time
AR-Monitoring time
ON ON
Double-point information DIFF DIFF
OFF Time tag OFF Time tag
information object
Spontaneous
Breaker tripping
Switching operation
in progress
Automatic reclosing

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
2.4.1 Checking, whether binary information change is due to command

output
The task is the checking of whether a binary information change has resulted from the
associated command being initiated previously. On Ax 1703 and ACP 1703 platforms the va-
lidity of a command output procedure is determined in a different way (see the following sec-
tions).
The result of this check is required for the processing of the following function:

• Breaker Tripping Detection
Note
For this check the function return information monitoring (see pulse commands) must be activated for the
corresponding command.
Depending on the usage of the system element, various methods are used.
2.4.1.1 Ax 1703 Platform
If a command acts on the actuator, a system-internal information "Command C00 .. Cnn in

progress" is made available by the assigned pulse command output. This information is active
for the duration of actuation of the actuator.
With the positive edge of the associated system-internal information "Command C00 .. Cnn in
progress" the validity of the command output procedure is checked.
The command output procedure is declared valid,
• when a command ON is given for a current-position OFF of the actuator.

• when a command OFF is given for a current-position ON of the actuator.
If after the command initition the actuator leaves the current position towards the desired
target position within the parameterized command assessment time (Parameter com-
mand_assessment_t), the validity of the command output procedure is extended by the
intermediate-position suppression time.
On reaching the target position or after expiry of the intermediate-position suppression time,
the command output procedure loses its validity.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Exceptional case
The command output procedure is also declared valid,
• if a command On or OFF is given to a stationary intermediate- or faulty position of the

actuator. I.e. the intermediate- or faulty position suppression is no longer active.
The period of validity of the command output procedure corresponds with the intermediate- or
faulty position suppression time depending on the current state of the double-point
information.
On reaching the target position or after expiry of the intermediate- or faulty position
suppression time, the command output procedure loses its validity.
2.4.1.2 ACP 1703 Platform
If a command acts on the actuator, a system-internal information "Command C00 .. Cnn in

progress" is made available by the assigned pulse command output.
This information is set on actuation of the actuator and reset after the command intiation is
concluded (spontaneous information object "Command" with the cause of transmission
"Termination of activation").
The validity of the command output procedure exists as long as the system-internal infor-
mation "Command C00 .. Cnn in progress" is set.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
2.5 Data Interface
2.5.1.1 Double-Point Information

TI…Type identification TI 31 double-point information with time tag CP56Time2a
DPI…double point information 0…undefined state, or intermediate state information
(intermediate position)
1…OFF
2…ON
3…undefined state (faulty position)
failure
IV…invalid power monitoring event triggered, acquisition error, or bounce
error triggered
03…spontaneous change of the state of the information
without command output procedure
with command output procedure and control location 0, or unde-
fined
on breaker tripping
alteration of the quality descriptor
11…return information, caused by change of the state of the information after a command initiated:
a remote command by a command message with indicator "remote command"
(control location 1…127)
12…return information, caused by change of the state of the information after a command initiated:
a local command by the locally connected local operation panel
by a command message with indicator "local command"
(control location 128…255)
20…interrogated by station upon receipt of a GI request or
interrogation automatically after startup, parameter change, etc.
1-16 interrogation
P/N…positive/negative positive
confirmation
T…test no test

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
2.5.1.2 Switching Operation in Progress

SPI…single point information 0 ... no switching operation in progress
1 ... switching operation in progress
failure
IV…invalid power monitoring event triggered, signaling controller failed, or
bounce error triggered
a remote command
a local command
1-16 interrogation
tion
T…test no test

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
2.5.1.3 Breaker Tripping

SPI…single point information positive transient after breaker tripping
failure
IV…invalid power monitoring event triggered, or signaling controller failed
03…spontaneous on breaker tripping or change of the quality descriptor
a remote command
a local command
1-16 interrogation
tion
T…test no test

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
2.5.1.4 Automatic Reclosure

SPI…single point information positive transient after successful reclosure
failure
IV…invalid power monitoring event triggered, or signaling controller failed
03…spontaneous after successful reclosure, or change of the quality descriptor
a remote command
a local command
1-16 interrogation
tion
T…test no test

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Confirmation of the Command "Control Location".

TI…Type identification TI 45 single command
CASDU, IOA .. Message address Corresponding to the received command message
SCS…single command state Corresponding to the received command message
QOC…qualifier of command
QU…code of qualifier of 0 … command output time corresponding to the
command parameter of each command
1 … Command output time in accordance with the
global parameter for short command output time
2 … Command output time in accordance with the
global parameter for long command output time
>2 ... not supported
S/E…select/execute Corresponding to the received command message
07…Confirmation of the activation Positive confirmation on "select" if all conditions for the select
command are met.
Positive confirmation on "execute" if all conditions for the execute
command are met.
otherwise there is a negative confirmation
09…Confirmation of deactivation Positive confirmation:
- command output is prepared ("select")
10…Termination of the activation Only if the command output has been answered by a positive
"confirmation of the activation".
Positive confirmation:
- command output ended properly and
- status information in the correct state
45…Unknown cause of negative confirmation
transmission
P/N…positive/negative see cause of transmission 07, 09, 10 and 45
confirmation
T…test Corresponding to the received command message
Originator address Corresponding to the received command message

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
2.5.2.1 Revision

1…revision
a remote command
a local command
interrogation
1-16 interrogation
tion

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
2.5.2.2 Local/Remote Criterion

SPI…single point information 0…REMOTE
1…LOCAL
11…return information, caused by SPI is evaluated depending on quality descriptor
a remote command
a local command
20…interrogated by station inter- SPI is evaluated depending on quality descriptor
rogation
1-16 interrogation
tion

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
2.5.2.3 Control Location
Measured Value, Scaled Value with time tag CP56Time2a

TI…Type identification TI 35 measured value, scaled value with time tag
CP56Time2a
SVA…scaled value control location
BL…blocked SVA is not evaluated
IV…invalid SVA is not evaluated
02…background scan SVA is evaluated depending on quality descriptor
03…spontaneous SVA is evaluated depending on quality descriptor
05…requested SVA is evaluated depending on quality descriptor
11…return information, caused by SVA is evaluated depending on quality descriptor
a remote command
a local command
20…interrogated by station inter- SVA is evaluated depending on quality descriptor
rogation
21-36…interrogated by group SVA is evaluated depending on quality descriptor
1-16 interrogation
tion

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Single Command (direct command)

TI…Type identification TI 45 Single command
SCS…single command state 0…erases all previousely set control locations
1…takes the control location from the originator address
QU code of qualifier of SCS is taken over only if QU <3
command
S/E…select/execute SCS is taken over only in case of execute
06…activation SCS is taken over depending on qualifier of command
08…deactivation SCS is not evaluated
tion
T…test 0…no test
Originator address is evaluated as control location
column A.

The updating interval of data points (OPM II) also depends on the cycle time of the open-
/closed-loop control function. This may lead to longer updating intervals than those stated.
Data Point Value Range Meaning A

(OPM II)
SI Dxx binary single-point information, state of binary inputs 10 ms
(only in Ax 1703 IN D00…IN Dnn after the inversion
platforms)
DI Dxx/Dyy binary double-point information, state of binary inputs 10 ms
(only in ACP 1703 IN D00/D01…IN Dmm/Dnn after the inversion
platforms)
Voltage failure Dxx - binary inverted state of the Power Monitoring input of the 10 ms
Dyy group.
Sum bounce fault binary 100 ms
Acquisition error binary peridocal information SI Dxx, DI Dxx/Dyy and volta- 10 ms
ge failure Dxx - Dyy invalid

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
3 Integrated Totals via Count Pulses
Content
3.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................60

3.2 Acquisition by Firmware .....................................................................................62
3.3 Acquisition by Submodule or I/O Module ...........................................................65
3.5 Data Interface .....................................................................................................75

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Integrated Totals via Count Pulses
3.1 Introduction
The acquisition of the count pulses over binary inputs takes place depending on the system
element used, either by means of the Firmware or by means of the submodule- or I/O module.
Acquisition Maximum frequency Pulse length / -pause

Firmware 20 Hz >2 or >10 ms
depending on system element
Submodule SM-0574 5 kHz >10 µs to >3 ms
or depending on the set bounce suppression
I/O-module TE-6430
A counter value is generated for each binary input. From this counter value one of the
following integrated totals can be selected for transmission.
• Frozen absolute value

• Frozen relative value
The allocation of the pulse counters to the binary inputs takes place in the OPM II data point
by data point by placing an image on a HW-PIN in the system technique with the category
firmware / DI_CV for an acquisition by the Firmware or with the category firmware /
DI_CV_SUB for an acquisition by the sub- or I/O-module. These categories also contain all
attributes for the parameter setting of the processing functions.
• For acquisition by firmware

─ Revision
─ Power Monitoring
─ Inversion
─ Pulse Counter
• For acquisition by SM-0574 submodule
─ Revision
─ Bounce suppression
─ Inversion
─ Pulse Counter
─ Non-volatile storage
• For acquisition by TE-6430 I/O module
─ Revision
─ Bounce suppression
─ Inversion
─ Pulse Counter
─ Non-volatile storage
• Counter value formation
─ Count pulse evaluation
─ Set Counter
• Count formation
─ Counter Interrogation
─ Interval control

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
The following information items are transported over the data interface:
− Single-point information (on dedicated CAEX link
Ax 1703 platforms only and if
acquired by firmware)
− Voltage failure firmware / SW_ DI
(only if acquired by firmware)
− Acquisition error firmware / SW_ DI
(only if acquired by firmware)
− Trigger for freezing firmware / SW_ DO
− Trigger for transmission firmware / SW_ DO

objects − Integrated totals firmware / DI_CV or
firmware / DI_CV_SUB
− Set Counter firmware / SW_CV _SET
− Counter interrogation determined by the system

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
3.2 Acquisition by Firmware
3.2.1 Block Diagram
Power Binary
monitoring inputs
PM0 … PMn IN D00 … IN Dnn
Power monitoring Acquisition Revision
Inversion
Pulse count
Counter value
formation
Voltage failure Dxx..D yy (for each group)
Integrated total
Interval control
EM Dxx (only on Ax 1703 platforms)
formation
Transmission activation
Counter interrogation
Latching activation
Acquisition error
Integrated total
Set counter
Revision
Periodical information Spontaneous information objects
Data interface

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
3.2.2 Revision
Revision means, that for the duration of the revision, the states of the inputs are frozen and
consequently no pulses are counted. On principle, the revision always acts on all datapoints of
a periphery element.
Note:
In the interrogated spontaneous information object "integrated total" no identifier is provided for this state,
i.e. this state is not notified to the user system-side.
information in the format "single-point information with CP56Time2a time stamp".
The classification of this message is carried out in the OPM II with the category firmware /
SW_REV.
Note:
application program of the open-/closed-loop control function

descriptor IV
• affected counter values are flagged IV
• with the subsequent triggers for freezing, affected counts to be transmitted are flagged IV.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
3.2.4 Inversion
3.2.5 Pulse Counter
The pulse counter is incremented with each rising edge of the count pulse at the binary input.
With inversion activated the pulse counter is incremented with the falling edge.
After startup of the system element, the pulse counter stand begins from the value 0.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
3.3 Acquisition by Submodule or I/O Module
3.3.1 Block Diagram Submodule SM-0574
Binary inputs
IOMx I/O 0-1 IOMx I/O 4-5
Acquisition and
Revision
bounce suppression
Power
managment
Inversion
+
Pulse count
Submodule SM-0574
Submodule SM-0574
Counter value
formation
Integrated total
Interval control
formation
Latching activation
Integrated total
Set counter
Revision
Data interface

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
3.3.2 Block Diagram I/O-module TE-6430
Binary inputs
IOMx IN C0 IOMx IN C1
Acquisition and
Revision
bounce suppression
Power
managment
Inversion
+
Pulse count
TM bus
Counter value
formation
Integrated total
Interval control
formation
Latching activation
Integrated total
Set counter
Revision
Data interface

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
3.3.3 Revision
Revision means, that for the duration of the revision, the states of the inputs are frozen and
consequently no pulses are counted. On principle, the revision always acts on all datapoints of
a periphery element.
Note
In the interrogated spontaneous information object "integrated total" no identifier is provided for this state,
i.e. this state is not notified to the user system-side.
information in the format "single-point information with CP56Time2a time stamp".
The classification of this message is carried out in the OPM II with the category firmware /
SW_REV.
Note
application program of the open-/closed-loop control function
Bounce Suppression
So that undesirable short count pulses (e.g. as a result of contact bouncing) do not increment
the pulse counter, the possibility exists of suppressing this.
Binary
input
Bounce-
suppression
time
Count pulse
The bounce suppression can be set in 4 levels depending on the maximum counting
frequency by means of the parameter Bounce suppression.
The following table shows which pulse-lengths / -pauses are suppressed depending on the set
maximum counting frequency.
Maximum counting frequency Minimum pulse length

20 Hz 3 ms
50 Hz 1.5 ms
500 Hz 150µs
5000Hz 10µs

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
3.3.4 Inversion
3.3.5 Pulse Counter
The pulse counter is incremented with each rising edge of the count pulse at the binary input.
With inversion activated the pulse counter is incremented with the falling edge.
3.3.6 Non-Volatile Storage
The sub- or I/O-module has a buffered power supply, which with a failure of the power supply
for the system element, however available sensor voltage, continues to maintain the functions
of the sub- or I/O-module up to 72 hours or up to 16.7 million pulses.
If the buffered power supply can no longer maintain the functions of the sub- or I/O-module or
if the previously stated pulse count is exceeded, the affected counter values are flagged IV.
This function can be switched off by means of the parameter non_volatile. In this case no
further pulses are counted and after startup of the system element the pulse counter begins
with the value 0.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
3.4.1 Counter Value Formation
3.4.1.1 Count Pulse Evaluation
The counter value is formed by evaluating the pulse counter with a parameterized counter
constant (Parameter Pulse value):
Counter Value = Pulse Counter Stand • Counter Constant (K)
Counter constant (K) >1 ... Scaling up

Counter constant (K) <1 ... Scaling down
By means of the parameter Value range the overflow behavior of the counter value can be
adjusted.
Value Range Overflow at

31-bit integer 2147483647
24-bit integer 16777215
2 decades 99
3 decades 999
: :
9 decades 999999999
3.4.1.2 Set Counter
With the help of the spontaneous information object "Set counter" this function enables the
setting of a counter to a defined value.
The spontaneous information object "Set counter" is received by means of a message with
process information in the format "integrated total with time tag CP56Time2a". The
SW_CV_SET.
The counter to be set is only required if the frozen absolute value is to be transmitted.
Acquisition by firmware
After each startup the counter begins with the value 0.
Setting the counter is required:
• with Power-up or Reset

• when changing the value range or the counter constant

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Acquisition by sub- or I/O-module

Normally, the non-volatile counter continues after an operational interruption
(e.g. reset or voltage failure) with the current counter value. No counter setting is required.
Setting the counter is required:
• with commissioning
• when changing the value range or the counter constant
• after a failure of the buffered voltage
If the non-volatile storage is deactivated, the counter behaves as with "Acquisition by Firm-
ware".
3.4.2 Formation of Counts (Integrated Totals)
At defined times (freezing times) the counts (integrated totals) to be transmitted are formed
due to a trigger for freezing:
• Frozen absolute value

is the running absolute value of the counter at the time of the last trigger for freezing.
Represents a "Counter freeze without reset" according to IEC 60870-5-101/104.
• Frozen relative value
is the difference of the counter values between the times of the last two triggers for freez-
ing.
Represents a "Counter freeze with reset" according to IEC 60870-5-101/104.
By means of the parameter Type it is selected which count (integrated total) is to be

transmitted.
Counter value
lu e
e va
lut
so
ab
nt
rre
Cu
Latched
relative value
Latched
absolute value
Time
Latching times

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
By means of the parameter transm_prompting the source for the transmission trigger can
be selected from the following possibilities:
• counter group 1 (spontaneous information object "counter interrogation")

• Periodical Information from the Open-/Closed-Loop Control Function
• counter group interval 0 (interval control)
The source for the trigger for freezing can be selected by means of the parameter
latch_prompting:

• Periodical Information from the Open-/Closed-Loop Control Function
By default the source is the trigger for transmission.
If the counter is flagged IV at the moment when freezing was triggered, the spontaneous
information object "Integrated total" to be transmitted is also transmitted with the data point
quality descriptor IV.
If a frozen absolute value is interrogated due to a trigger for transmission, the spontaneous
information object "Integrated total" is only then transmitted without the quality descriptor IV if
at least one trigger for freezing was given before.
If a frozen relative value is interrogated due to a trigger for transmission, the spontaneous
information object "Integrated total" is only then transmitted without the quality descriptor IV if
at least two triggers for freezing were given before.
3.4.2.1 Counter Interrogation
The transfer of the selected integrated totals as spontaneous information object "Integrated
total" is carried out by means of a transmission activation. This trigger for transmission may
occur at the same time as or separate from the trigger for freezing.
For the spontaneous information object "counter interrogation" a time can be set (parameter
message_blocking_t ), whithin which further counter interrogations are discarded. This
prevents unwanted triggers for freezing and/or transmission when retries on the transmission
link occur.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
3.4.2.2 Interval Control
An interval control enables a freezing and transmission of the integrated totals without
external activation by a periodical information from the open-/closed-loop control function or by a
spontaneous information object "counter interrogation".
The interval control provides two independent triggers, for freezing and for transmission. Both
intervals (parameter interval_time_0 and interval_time_1) can be set in minutes and
are synchronized to the full hour.
The following interval times are possible: 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 Minutes.
Example: Quarter hour values
Interval time to be set = 15 minutes
Produces the following freezing and transmission times:
xx : 00 : 00
xx : 15 : 00
xx : 30 : 00
xx : 45 : 00
Note
The interval control is already operational after startup, even if no clock time has yet been set in the
automation unit.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
3.4.3 Integrated Total Transmission According to IEC 60870-5-101/104
The integrated total transmission according to IEC 60870-5 101/104 distinguishes between 4
modes:
• Mode A: local freezing and spontaneous transmission

• Mode B: local freezing and transmission due to a counter interrogation
• Mode C: Freezing due to a counter interrogation and transmssion due to another
counter interrogation
• Mode D: Freezing due to a counter interrogation and spontaneous transmission
Note
Mode D is not supported.
Provisions for Mode A

For each integrated total the source for the freezing and for the transmission trigger is to be
selected from the following possibilities by means of the parameter transm_prompting:
• periodical information from the open-/closed-loop control function

The source for the freezing and for the transmission trigger must be the same.
The type of integrated total to be transmitted (absolute- or relative value) is to be set with the
parameter Type.
Provisions for Mode B

For each integrated total the source of the freezing trigger is to be selected from the following
possibilities with the parameter latch_prompting:
• periodical information from the open-/closed-loop control function

The integrated total type (absolute- or relative value) is to be set with the parameter Type.
For each integrated total the source of the transmission trigger is to be selected from the
following possibilities with the parameter transm_prompting:


DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Which frozen integrated totals are to be transmitted is to be set with the element "RQT" in the
spontaneous information object "counter interrogation". The element FRZ in the spontaneous
information object "counter interrogation" must be 0.
• RQT = 0 … all counters

• RQT = 1 … counter group 1
Provisions for Mode C

For each integrated total the source for the freezing and for the transmission trigger is to be
selected from the following possibilities by means of the parameter transm_prompting:

The source for the freezing and for the transmission trigger must be the same. The parameter
Type is to be set to absolute value.
The integrated-total type to be frozen (absolute- or relative value) is to be set with the element
"FRZ" in the spontaneous information object "counter interrogation":
• FRZ = 1 … Absolute value

• FRZ = 2 … Relative value
Which integrated totals are to be frozen is to be set with the element "RQT" in the
spontaneous information object "counter interrogation".

Which frozen integrated totals are to be transmitted is to be set with the element "RQT" in the
spontaneous information object "counter interrogation". The element FRZ in the spontaneous
information object "counter interrogation" must be 0.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
3.5 Data Interface
3.5.1.1 Integrated Total

TI…Type identification TI 37 integrated totals with time tag CP56Time2a
BCR…binary counter reading
Value frozen absolute value or frozen relative value
IV…invalid Acquisition by firmware
power monitoring event trigered, or
if hardware is defective (e.g. signaling controller failed)
Acquisition by sub- or I/O-module
sub- or I/O-module faulty (checksum error), or
sub- or I/O-module failed, or
counter overflow on the sub- or I/O-module
failure of the buffered power supply
SQ…sequence number With each trigger for freezing for a group the sequence number is
increased in the range from 1 .. 31.
CY…carry A counter overflow occurred between the last two freezing times
CA…counter was adjusted Counter was adjusted bewteen the last two freezing times
03…spontaneous transmission triggered by:
periodical Information
interval control
a spontaneous information object "counter interrogation" in the
private range
37…requested by general transmission triggered by a spontaneous information object
counter request "counter interrogation" in the compatible range for all groups
38-41 requested by group 1-4 transmission triggered by a spontaneous information object
counter request "counter interrogation" in the compatible range for the requested
group
confirmation
T…test no test

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
3.5.2.1 Counter Interrogation

TI…Type identification TI 101 counter interrogation command
CASDU, IOA .. Message address determined by the system
QCC…qualifier of counter
interrrogation command
RQT…request see the table below
FRZ…freeze see the table below
06…activation must be set
tion
QCC…qualifier of counter interrrogation command

FRZ RQT in compatible range
0 1…4 Transmit group (1…4)
0,.5 Transmit all groups ((1…4))
1 1…4 Freeze group (1…4)
0. 5 Freeze all groups ((1…4))
2 1…4 Freeze with reset of group (1…4)
0. 5 Freeze with reset of all groups ((1…4))
3 1…4 Reset group (1…4)
0.5 Reset all groups ((1…4))
FRZ RQT in the private range
1 51…54 Freeze and transmit group (1…4)
55 Freeze and transmit all groups ((1…4))
2 51…54 Freeze with reset and transmit group (1…4)
55 Freeze with reset and transmit all groups (1…4)

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
3.5.2.2 Set Counter

TI…Type identification TI 37 integrated totals with time tag CP56Time2a
BCR…binary counter reading
Value Value at which the counter is set
IV…invalid Counter value is not evaluated
SQ…sequence number not evaluated
CY…carry not evaluated
CA…counter was adjusted not evaluated
06…activation must be set
tion

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
3.5.2.3 Revision

1…revision
a remote command
a local command
interrogation
1-16 interrogation
tion

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
3.5.3 Periodical information from the peripheral element
column A.

Note
The data points listed are only available for system elements with "Acquisition by Firmware".
Data Point (OPM II) Value Range Meaning A

SI Dxx binary single-point information, state of binary inputs 10 ms
SI IN Dxx IN D00…IN Dnn after the inversion
SI IOMx In Dxx
(only in Ax 1703
platforms)
Voltage failure binary inverted state of the Power Monitoring input of the 10 ms
Dxx - Dyy group.
Acquisition error binary peridocal information SI D00 .. SI Dnn and voltage 10 ms
failure Dxx - Dyy invalid
3.5.4 Periodical information to the peripheral element
From the open-/closed-loop control function

Data Point (OPM II) Value Range Meaning
Trigger for freezing binary the activation is accepted with the positive edge
Trigger for transmission binary the activation is accepted with the positive edge

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
4 Currents
Content
4.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................82

4.2 Block Diagram ....................................................................................................83
4.4 Data Interface .....................................................................................................97

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Currents
4.1 Introduction
Acquisition of an impressed direct current (e.g. 4...20 mA) by measured value sensors over
analogue inputs for current measurement.
The processing of the analog inputs takes place, depending on the system element used, in a
parameter settable processing grid of 100 ms and multiples thereof.
The assignment of the measured values to the analogue inputs in the OPM II takes place for
each data point by placing an image on a HW-PIN in the system technique with the category
firmware / AI_I. This category also contains all parameters of the processing functions.
Each measured value can be assigned an arbitrary analogue input for current measurement.
• Revision
• Acquisition
─ noise rejection
─ automatic calibration
• Overflow-suppression
• Smoothing
• Adaptation
─ linear adaptation
─ zero-range suppression
─ Plausibility check
• Change monitoring
spontaneous information • acquired process signals
objects − measured value firmware / AI_I
• control information
− revision firmware / SW_REV

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Currents
4.2 Block Diagram
Analogue inputs for

current measurement
IN V0 … IN Vn
Acquisition Revision
Noise rejection
Automatic
calibration
Overflow suppression
Smoothing
Adaptation,
zero-range
suppression,
plausibility check
Change monitoring
Measured value
Revision
Data interface

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Currents
4.3.1 Revision
SW_REV.
4.3.2 Acquisition
The acquisition of the measured value is carried using an ADC (Analogue Digital Converter).
The resolution of the acquired measured value is dependent:
• on the system element or submodule used and

• the input impedance
The input impedance is designed for full scale (e.g., of 5 mA or 20 mA, depending on the sys-
tem element; this effects a voltage drop at the input of the ADC of e.g. 1V) and allows for full
resolution (e.g, ±5 mA or ±20 mA).
Example:
If the measured value sensor has a measuring range of e.g. ±10 mA (represents e.g. 0.5 V at
the input of the ADC at 20 mA Fullscale) the resolution sinks to a half.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Currents
Normalized value
Y100
A
A
0m
m
=2
10
=
0
X 10
0
10
X
Y0
X
X0 0,5V 1V
By adjusting the input impedance a full resolution can also be achieved for such cases.
Thereby, the input impedance is to be selected in such a way, that with fullscale (defined by
X100) a voltage drop occurs at the input of the ADC corresponding to the system element. The
parameter standard load is to be set to "NO".
Normalized value
Y100
A
0m
=1
0
X 10
Y0
X
X0 1V
Note
Not using standard load means with some system elements:
- increased expenditure for spare parts storage
- costs and procurement (delivery time) of the loads
- conversion of the system element
- factory calibration necessary

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Currents
4.3.2.1 Noise Rejection
The noise rejection is carried out for a parameterized line frequency of 50 Hz, 60 Hz or
16.7 Hz (parameter line frequency).
4.3.2.2 Automatic Calibration
The automatic calibration of the acquired measured values takes place to compensate for
temperature-dependent component tolerances of the input circuit on the system element or
submodule.
After assembly, a works calibration of the input circuit takes place, whereby the acquired value
with full scale and the offset of the ADC is stored non-volatile in an EEPROM on the system
element or submodule.
For the automatic calibration, the offset of the ADC is measured cyclically. Each measured
value is corrected by the stored and currently measured offset-deviation and by the stored full
scale deviation.
The measured value thus created is normalized to a range of -32000 to +32000.
4.3.3 Overflow Suppression
By means of overflow-suppression it is possible to suppress error signalling operation states

(e.g. overflow of the measured value due to a high inrush current of a motor) which are mean-
ingless for the process management.
The overflow-suppression can be switched on by parameter OV_suppr_t (overflow-

suppression time).The overflow-suppression can be set in a time range from 1 to 255 se-
conds. The value 0 (default) of the overflow-supperssion time deactivates this function.
The quality descriptor OV in the spontaneous information object "measured value" is only set,
if the measured value is longer in the overflow range than the parametrized overflow-
suppression time. The qualitiy descriptor OV will be reset when the measured value goes un-
der the overflow range.
Note
The overflow-suppression influences exclusivley the quality descriptor OV in the spontaneous information
object "measured value".

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Currents
4.3.4
The smoothing is used for the filtering of statistical fluctuations of the acquired measured
value, that are meaningless for the process management and unnecessarily burden the
transmission equipment.
The smoothing takes place according to the following formula:
Valuenew, smooth = Valuenew • (1 - F) + Valueold, smooth • F
Valuenew, smooth …smoothened new value

Valuenew …unsmoothened new value
Valueold, smooth …smoothened old value
F …smoothing factor
The smoothing factor F (Smoothing) can be set in the range of 0.00 (0%) to 0.99 (99%) in 1%
steps.
One achieves the greatest possible smoothing with a parameterized smoothing factor of 99%.
No smoothing takes place with a parameterized smoothing factor of 0%.
4.3.5 Adaptation
4.3.5.1 Linear Adaptation
The technological adaptation enables the measured value supplied by the measured-value
sensor to be converted into a technological or normalized value. Into which value can be
converted, is dependent on the format of the spontaneous information object "Measured
value" to be transferred.
Spontaneous Information Object Value Range Meaning

Measured value, normalized value -1…+ 1-2-15 normalized, percental representation
Measured value, scaled value -32768 technological, integer
...
+32767
Measured value, short floating point -1.000 • 1015 technological, floating point
...
+1.000 • 1015
By parameterizing two interpolation points, the meaured value to be transferred is adapted

linearly to the measured-value sensor. For this, the technological value Y0 is parameterized
for the lower limit of the measuring range X0 and the technological value Y100 for the upper
limit of the measuring range X100.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Currents
4.3.5.2 Zero-Range Suppression
With the suppression of the zero range, value fluctuations of the measured value sensor in a
defined range can be suppressed. If the measured value is within the set upper (XZU) and
lower (XZL) limit of the zero range, it is substituted by a variable technological value in the zero
range (YZ).
The suppression of the zero range can be switched on with a parameter Zero range.
4.3.5.3 Plausibility Check
By means of the plausibility check, values which are smaller than the settable lower limit of the
zero range (XZL) are flagged as IV. The plausibility check affects only the unipolar and live
zero measurment.
The hysteresis ensures that values which fluctuate around the lower limit of the zero range
(XZL) are not constantly transmitted because of repeated changes of the IV flag. The
hysteresis is defined by the lower limit of the zero range (XZL) and the limit of not plausible
range (XL).
Note
The plausibility check is automatically active with the zero-range suppression
Zero-range suppression and plausibility check are predefined for 3 standard cases:
X0 X100 XZL XZU XL YN

Unipolar 0 >X0 -5% of X100 5% of X100 -3% of X100 Y0
measurement
Bipolar <0 | X0 | -5% of X100 5% of X100 103% of X100 Y at X=0
measurement (= w/o function)
Live zero 20% of X100 fullscale 10% of X100 X0 15% of X100 Y0
measurement
Y0 and Y100 in the table are valid for normalized values, for technological values Y0 and Y100 can be
freely parameterized.
X0 …lower limit of the (parameterized) measuring range (X_0%)

X100…upper limit of the (parameterized) measuring range (X_100%)
Y0 …technological value at X0 (Y_0%)
Y100…technological value at X100 (Y_100%)
XZL … lower limit of zero range in % of X_100% (zero_range_Xzl)
XZU… upper limit of zero range in % of X_100% (zero_range_Xzu)
XL Limit of not plausible range.
Parameter is only effective, if the parameter
zero_range_a_MV_conv is set to free,
parametrizable in the physical unit of the input (MV_conv_free_Xl)
YN …technological value within zero range (zero_range_Yz)

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Currents
Non-standard cases, i.e. other measurement ranges (X0, X100), other values for the
suppression of zero range (XZL, XZU, YN) or plausibility check (XL) are possible if freely
configurable is set with the parameter zero_range_a_MV_conv.
The parameterized measuring range (X0, X100) must be within the positive and negative value
for fullscale of the ADC.
4.3.5.4 Characteristics
4.3.5.4.1 Unipolar measurement
Without suppression of zero range and plausibility check

Example: Value Meaning Parameter
X0 0 lower limit of the measuring range (set X_0%
using parameter)
X100 20 mA upper limit of the measuring range (set X_100%
by parameter)
Y0 0 technological value at X0 Y_0%
Y100 +1 technological value at X100 Y_100%
Measured value Y100 Normalized value
Y0
X0 X100
Data point quality descriptor
IV
OV

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Currents
With suppression of zero range and plausibility check

using parameter)
by parameter)
XZL -5% (-1 mA) lower limit of zero range in % of X_100% zero_range_Xzl
XZU 5% (1 mA) upper limit of zero range in % of X_100% zero_range_Xzu
XL -3% (-0.6 mA) Limit of not plausible range. MV_conv_free_Xl
Parameter is only effective, if the para-
meter zero_range_a_MV_conv is set to
free, parametrizable in the physical unit
of the input.
YN 0 technological value within zero range zero_range_Yz
Y0
XZL XL X0 XZU X100
IV
OV

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Currents
4.3.5.4.2 Bipolar measurement

X0 -20 mA lower limit of the measuring range X_0%
(set using parameter)
X100 20 mA upper limit of the measuring range X_100%
(set by parameter)
Y0 -1 technological value at X0 Y_0%
X0 X100
Y0
IV
OV

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Currents

X0 -20 mA lower limit of the measuring range (set X_0%
using parameter)
X100 20 mA upper limit of the measuring range (set by X_100%
parameter)
XZL -5% (-1 mA) lower limit of zero range in % of X_100% zero_range_Xzl
XZU 5% (1 mA) upper limit of zero range in % of X_100% zero_range_Xzu
XL -103% (w/o function) Limit of not plausible range. MV_conv_free_Xl
XL X0 XZL XZU X100
Y0
IV
OV

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Currents
4.3.5.4.3 Live zero measurement

X0 4 mA lower limit of the measuring range (set X_0%
using parameter)
by parameter)
Y0
X0 X100
IV
OV

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Currents

X0 4 mA lower limit of the measuring range (set X_0%
using parameter)
by parameter)
XZL 10% (2 mA) lower limit of zero range in % of X_100% zero_range_Xzl
XZU 20% (4 mA) upper limit of zero range in % of zero_range_Xzu
X_100%
XL 15% (3 mA) Limit of not plausible range. MV_conv_free_Xl
Parameter is only effective, if the pa-
rameter zero_range_a_MV_conv is set
to free, parametrizable in the physical
unit of the input.
Y0
XZL XL X0 X100
XZU
IV
OV

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Currents
4.3.6 Change monitoring
So as not to load the transmission equipment unnecessarily, the measured value is monitored
for change in accordance with the following rules:
• The first value determined after startup is transmitted immediately

• Each change of the quality descriptors BL and IV triggers an immediate transmission, the
quality descriptor OV does not trigger any transmission
• Change monitoring in accordance with the method of the additive threshold value
procedure
Additive threshold value procedure

In the system element specific processing grid the measured value is monitored for change. If
the deviation from the last spontaneously transmitted measured value is greater than the
parameterized thresh_uncond, the new measured value is transmitted immediately.
Otherwise, in the parameterized processing grid the deviations from the last spontaneously
transmitted measured value are totalled according to the polarity sign. First when the amount
of this total exceeds the parameterized Thresh_additive is the current measured value
spontaneously transmitted.
A transmission of the measured value due to a general interrogation does not influence the
threshold value procedure.
By means of parameterization it is established:
Processing grid 0.1 s - 25.5 s

thresh_uncond 0.00% - 103.00%
thresh_additive 0.0% - 1000.0%
The percentages given refer to the parameterized value for Y100 - Ybei X=0.
The following example shows a normal case, where the adaptation line goes through the zero
point (origin) (Ybei X=0 = 0).

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Currents
Examples
Technological value Y100 4000
Processing grid 0.1 s
thresh_uncond 2.00% represents a change by 80
thresh_additive 150.0% represents an additive total of 6000
Example 1:
After transmission due to the exceeding of the large threshold, the value has changed once by
79 (< the large threshold) and subsequently remains constant. The measured value is trans-
mitted after 7.5 seconds.
0.0s 0.1s 0.2s 0.3s 0.4s 0.5s 0.6s 0.7s 0.8s ... 7.4s 7.5s
Measured value 300 379 379 379 379 379 379 379 379 ... 379 379
Difference >80 79 79 79 79 79 79 79 79 ... 79 79
Additive total 0 79 158 237 316 395 474 553 632 ... 5925 6004
Transmission x x
Example 2:
1 (< the large threshold) and subsequently remains constant. The measured value is transmit-
ted after 10 minutes.
0.0s 0.1s 0.2s 0.3s 0.4s 0.5s 0.6s 0.7s 0.8s ... 599s 600s
Measured value 300 301 301 301 301 301 301 301 301 ... 301 301
Difference >80 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ... 1 1
Additive total 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ... 5999 6000
Transmission x x
Example 3:
After transmission due to the exceeding of the large threshold, the value continually changes
by ±1. The measured value is not transmitted.
0.0s 0.1s 0.2s 0.3s 0.4s 0.5s 0.6s 0.7s 0.8s ... 7.4s 7.5s
Measured value 300 301 300 299 300 301 300 301 299 ... 300 301
Difference >80 1 0 -1 0 1 0 1 -1 ... 0 1
Additive total 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 2 1 ... 0 1
Transmission x

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Currents
4.4 Data Interface
4.4.1.1 Measured value

TI…Type identification TI 34 measured value, normalized value
TI 35 measured value, scaled value
TI 36 measured value, short floating point
Value measured value
BL…blocked Peripheral element or data point marked for revision
failure
IV…invalid offset error, conversion error, EEPROM error, or
measured value is in the implausible range, or
parameter error
OV…overflow measured value outside the range (Y0, Y100)
01…cyclic not supported
03…spontaneous alteration of the measured value depending on the thresholds, or
alteration of the quality descriptors IV or BL
20…interrogated by general upon receipt of a GI request, or
1-16 interrogation
tion
T…test no test

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Currents
4.4.2 Spontaneous information objects to the peripheral element
4.4.2.1 Revision

1…revision
a remote command
a local command
interrogation
1-16 interrogation
tion

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
5 Voltages
Content
5.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................100

5.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................101
5.4 Data Interface ...................................................................................................115

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Voltages
5.1 Introduction
Acquisition of an impressed DC voltage (e.g. ±1V or ±10V) by measured value sensors over
analogue inputs for voltage measurement.
The processing of the analog inputs takes place, depending on the system element used, in a
parameter settable processing grid of 100ms and multiples thereof.
The assignment of the measured values to the analogue inputs in the OPM II takes place for
firmware / AI_U. This category also contains all parameters of the processing functions.
Each measured value can be assigned an arbitrary analogue input for voltage measurement.
• Revision
• Acquisition
─ Noise rejection
─ Automatic calibration
• Overflow-suppression
• Smoothing
• Adaptation
─ Linear adaptation
─ Zero-range suppression
─ Plausibility check
spontaneous information • acquired process signals
objects − measured value firmware / AI_U
− revision firmware / SW_REV

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Voltages
5.2 Block Diagram
Analogue inputs for

voltage measurement
IN V0 … IN Vn
= =
Noise rejection
Automatic
calibration
Overflow suppression
Smoothing
Adaptation,
zero-range
suppression,
plausibility check
Measured value
Measured value
Revision
Data interface

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Voltages
5.3.1 Revision
SW_REV.
5.3.2 Acquisition
The acquisition of the measured value is carried using an ADC (Analogue Digital Converter).
The resolution of the acquired measured value is dependent:
• on the system element or submodule used and

• the input impedance
The input impedance is designed for a value with fullscale of 1 V or 10 V, which effects a volt-
age drop at the input of the ADC of e.g. 1 V (depending on the system element) and enables
the full resolution for a measuring range of ±1 V or ±10 V. If the measured value sensor has a
measuring range of e.g. ±5 V (represents e.g. 0.5 V at the input of the ADC) the resolution
sinks to a half.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Voltages
Normalized value
Y100
V
V
10
10
or
or
1V
1V
=
=
0
X 10
0
10
X
Y0
X
X0 0,5V 1V
By adjusting the input impedance a full resolution can also be achieved for such cases.
Thereby, the input impedance is to be selected in such a way, that with fullscale (defined by
X100) a voltage drop occurs at the input of the ADC corresponding to the system element. The
parameter standard load is to be set to "NO".
Normalized value
Y100
1 0V
er
od
1V
=
0
X 10
Y0
X
X0 1V
Note
Using standard load means with some system elements:
- increased expenditure for spare parts storage
- costs and procurement (delivery time) of the loads
- conversion of the system element
- factory calibration necessary

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Voltages
submodule.
scale deviation.
5.3.3 Overflow Suppression
By means of overflow-suppression it is possible to suppress error signalling operation states

(e.g. overflow of the measured value due to a high inrush current of a motor) which are mean-
ingless for the process management.
The overflow-suppression can be switched on by parameter OV_suppr_t (overflow suppres-

sion time). The overflow-suppression can be set in a time range from 1 to 255 seconds. The
value 0 (default) of the overflow suppression time deactivates this function.
The quality descriptor OV in the spontaneous information object "measured value" is only set,
if the measured value is longer in the overflow range (value > Y100) than the parametrized
overflow-suppression time. The qualitiy descriptor OV will be reset when the measured value
goes under the overflow range.
Note
The overflow-suppression influences exclusivley the quality descriptor OV in the spontaneous information
object "measured value".

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Voltages
5.3.4 Smoothing

steps.
5.3.5 Adaptation

Measured value, normalized value -1…+ 1-2-15 normalized, percental representation
...
+32767
...
+1.000 • 1015
By parameterizing two interpolation points, the meaured value to be transferred is adapted

linearly to the measured-value sensor. For this, the technological value Y0 is parameterized
for the lower limit of the measuring range X0 and the technological value Y100 for the upper
limit of the measuring range X100.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Voltages
5.3.5.2 Zero-range suppression
range (YZ).
By means of the plausibility check, values which are smaller than the settable lower limit of the
zero range (XZL) are flagged as IV. The plausibility check affects only the unipolar and live
zero measurment.
The hysteresis ensures that values which fluctuate around the lower limit of the zero range
(XZL) are not constantly transmitted because of repeated changes of the IV flag. The
hysteresis is defined by the lower limit of the zero range (XZL) und the limit of not plausible
range (XL).
Note
The plausibility check is automatically active with the zero-range suppression
Zero-range suppression and plausibility check are predefined for 3 standard cases:
X0 X100 XZL XZU XL YN

Unipolar 0 >X0 -5% of X100 5% of X100 -3% of X100 Y0
measurement
Bipolar <0 | X0 | -5% of X100 5% of X100 -103% of X100 Y at X=0
measurement (= w/o function)
Live zero 20% von X100 fullscale 10% of X100 X0 15% of X100 Y0
measurement
Y0 and Y100 in the table are valid for normalized values, for technological values Y0 and Y100 can be
freely parameterized.
X0 …lower limit of the (parameterized) measuring range (X_0%)

X100…upper limit of the (parameterized) measuring range ( X_100%)
Y0 …technological value at X0 (Y_0%)
Y100…technological value at X100 (Y_100%)
XZL … lower limit of zero range in % of X_100% (zero_range_Xzl)
XZU… upper limit of zero range in % of X_100% (zero_range_Xzu)
XL … Limit of not plausible range.
Parameter is only effective, if the parameter
zero_range_a_MV_conv is set to free,
parametrizable in the physical unit of the input (MV_conv_free_Xl)
YN …technological value within zero range (zero_range_Yz)

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Voltages
Non-standard cases, i.e. other measurement ranges (X0, X100), other values for the
suppression of zero range (XZL, XZU, YN) or plausibility check (XL) are possible if freely
configurable is set with the parameter zero_range_a_MV_conv.
The parameterized measuring range (X0, X100) must be within the positive and negative value
for fullscale of the ADC.
5.3.5.4 Characteristics
5.3.5.4.1 Unipolar measurement

using parameter)
X100 1V upper limit of the measuring range (set X_100%
by parameter)
Y0
X0 X100
IV
OV

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Voltages

using parameter)
by parameter)
XZL -5% (-0.05 V) lower limit of zero range in % of X_100% zero_range_Xzl
XZU 5% (0.05 V) upper limit of zero range in % of X_100% zero_range_Xzu
XL -3% (-0.03 V) Limit of not plausible range. MV_conv_free_Xl
Parameter is only effective, if the para-
meter zero_range_a_MV_conv is set to
free, parametrizable in the physical unit
of the input.
Y0
XZL XL X0 XZU X100
IV
OV

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Voltages
5.3.5.4.2 Bipolar measurement

X0 -1 V lower limit of the measuring range (set X_0%
using parameter)
by parameter)
X0 X100
Y0
IV
OV

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Voltages

X0 -1 V lower limit of the measuring range (set using parameter) X_0%
X100 1V upper limit of the measuring range (set by parameter) X_100%
XZL -5% (-0.05 V) lower limit of zero range in % of X_100% zero_range_Xzl
XZU 5% (0.05 V) upper limit of zero range in % of X_100% zero_range_Xzu
XL -103% (w/o function) Limit of not plausible range MV_conv_free_Xl
XL X0 XZL XZU X100
Y0
IV
OV

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Voltages
5.3.5.4.3 Live zero measurement

X0 0.2 V lower limit of the measuring range (set X_0%
using parameter)
by parameter)
Y0
X0 X100
IV
OV

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Voltages

X0 0.2 V lower limit of the measuring range (set X_0%
using parameter)
by parameter)
XZL 10% (0.1 V) lower limit of zero range in % of zero_range_Xzl
X_100%
XZU 20% (0.2 V) upper limit of zero range in % of zero_range_Xzu
X_100%
XL 15% (0.15 V) Limit of not plausible range. MV_conv_free_Xl
Parameter is only effective, if the pa-
rameter zero_range_a_MV_conv is set
to free, parametrizable in the physical
unit of the input.
Y0
XZL XL X0 X100
XZU
IV
OV

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Voltages
5.3.6 Change monitoring

procedure


The percentages given refer to the parameterized value for Y100 - Ybei X=0.
point (origin) (Ybei X=0 = 0).

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Voltages
Examples
Example 1:
0.0s 0.1s 0.2s 0.3s 0.4s 0.5s 0.6s 0.7s 0.8s ... 7.4s 7.5s
Measured value 300 379 379 379 379 379 379 379 379 ... 379 379
Difference >80 79 79 79 79 79 79 79 79 ... 79 79
Additive total 0 79 158 237 316 395 474 553 632 ... 5925 6004
Transmission x x
Example 2:
0.0s 0.1s 0.2s 0.3s 0.4s 0.5s 0.6s 0.7s 0.8s ... 599s 600s
Measured value 300 301 301 301 301 301 301 301 301 ... 301 301
Difference >80 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ... 1 1
Additive total 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ... 5999 6000
Transmission x x
Example 3:
0.0s 0.1s 0.2s 0.3s 0.4s 0.5s 0.6s 0.7s 0.8s ... 7.4s 7.5s
Measured value 300 301 300 299 300 301 300 301 299 ... 300 301
Difference >80 1 0 -1 0 1 0 1 -1 ... 0 1
Additive total 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 2 1 ... 0 1
Transmission x

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Voltages
5.4 Data Interface
5.4.1.1 Measured value

failure
IV…invalid offset error, conversion error, EEPROM error, or
measured value is in the implausible range, or
parameter error
OV…overflow measured value outside the range (Y0, Y100)
20…interrogated by general upon receipt of a GI request, or
1-16 interrogation
confirmation
T…test no test

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Voltages
5.4.2.1 Revision

1…revision
a remote command
a local command
interrogation
1-16 interrogation
tion

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
6 Measurement in Single-Phase Systems
Content
6.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................118

6.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................119
6.3 Transformer Currents (Quadratic Rectification) ...............................................120
6.4 Transformer Voltages (Quadratic Rectification) ...............................................121
6.6 Data Interface ...................................................................................................128

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Measurement in Single-Phase Systems
6.1 Introduction
This function is used for direct acquisition of one current and one voltage (primary quantities
before transformers) by measuring secondary quantities (after the high voltage-, medium
voltage- and low voltage transformers).
Features
• 1 current and 1 voltage input
• Phase voltage or phase-to-phase voltage can be wired to the voltage input
• Acquisition of the r.m.s. value of one AC current and one AC voltage directly through
transformers, using quadratic rectification
• Measuring range of the secondary quantities
─ Nominal current 1 A or 5 A with 100% overrange and a resolution of 12 bits
─ Nominal voltage 110 V or 110 V/√3 with 50% overrange and a resolution of 12 bits
─ Nominal frequency 16.7 Hz, 50 Hz, or 60 Hz, ±5 Hz
• Technological adaptation of current and voltage according to transformer specification
• Transfer of the acquired values using spontaneous information objects according to
IEC 60870-5-101/104, in a selectable format
─ Measured value, short floating point number
─ Measured value, normalized value
─ Measured value, scaled value
• Noise rejection
• Smoothing, zero-range suppression and change monitoring can be set individually for
each value

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
6.2 Block Diagram
Analog input Analog input

for transformer voltage for transformer current
U~ I~
Acquisition using quadratic rectification Revision
Smoothing
Adaption,
Zero-range
suppression
Change monitoring
Voltage U
Voltage U
Current I
Current I
Revision
Data interface

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
6.3 Transformer Currents (Quadratic Rectification)
Acquisition of the r.m.s. value of one AC current through an analog input for transformer
current measurement. The nominal current is 1 A or 5 A with 100% overrange and is
dependent on the system element.
The processing of the analog input takes place, depending on the system element used, in a
The assignment of the measured value to the analogue input in the OPM II takes place for
firmware / T_AI_I. This category also includes all parameters of the processing functions.
• Revision
• Acquisition
─ noise rejection
─ automatic calibration
• Smoothing
• Adaptation
─ linear adaptation
─ zero-range suppression
− Current I~ firmware / T_AI_I
− Current Ix faulty firmware / SW_DI
objects − Current I~ firmware / T_AI_I

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
6.4 Transformer Voltages (Quadratic Rectification)
Acquisition of the r.m.s. value of one AC voltage over an analog input for transformer voltage
measurement. The nominal voltage is 100 V or 110 V/ 3 with 50% overrange and is
dependent on the system element.
The processing of the analog input takes place, depending on the system element used, in a
The assignment of the measured value to the analog input in the OPM II takes place for each
data point by placing an image on a HW-PIN in the system technique with the category
firmware / T_AI_U (voltage value). This category also contains all parameters of the
processing functions.
• Revision
• Acquisition
─ Noise rejection
• Smoothing
• Adaptation
─ Linear adaptation
─ Zero-range suppression
− Voltage U~ firmware / T_AI_U
− Voltage Ux faulty firmware / SW_DI
objects − Voltage U~ firmware / T_AI_U

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
6.5.1 Revision
SW_REV.
6.5.2 Acquisition
The effective value of the transformer current or the transformer voltage is determined.
The measuring method applied is the quadratic rectification.
submodule.
scale deviation.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
6.5.3 Smoothing
Valuenew, smooth… smoothened new value

Valuenew … unsmoothened new value
Valueold, smooth … smoothened old value
F … smoothing factor
steps.
6.5.4 Adaptation

Measured value, normalized value - 1…+ 1-2-15 normalized, percental representation
Measured value, scaled value - 32768 technological, integer
...
+ 32767
Measured value, short floating point - 1.000 • 1015 technological, floating point
...
+ 1.000 • 1015
Through parameterization of one interpolation point, the measured value to be transferred is

adapted linearly to the measured-value sensor. For this the technological value Y100 is
parameterized for the upper limit of the measuring range X100. The technological value Y0 for
the lower limit of the measuring range X0 is established with 0.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
range (YZ).
The lower limit of the zero range is fixed at 0. The upper limit is normally 5% of X100, settable
with the parameter zero_range_standard. In the standard case, the parameter ze-
ro_range_Xzu is not effective.
6.5.4.3 Characteristic Curve Current
The following values refer to the message format "Measured value, normalized value"

X100 5A upper limit of the measuring range (set X_100%
by parameter)
Y100 + 0.5 technological value at X100 Y_100%
XZU 0.25 A (5%) upper limit of the zero range zero_range_Xzu
Current Ix Y100+100%
Y100
Y0
X0 XZU X100 X100+100%
IV
OV

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
6.5.4.4 Characteristic Curve Voltage
The following values refer to the message format "Measured value, normalized value"

X100 110 V upper limit of the measuring range (set X_100%
by parameter)
Y100 + 0.667 technological value at X100 Y_100%
XZU 11 V (5%) upper limit of the zero range zero_range_Xzu
Voltage Ux Y100+50% Normalized value
Y100
Y0
X0 XZU X100 X100+50%
IV
OV

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
6.5.5 Change Monitoring

procedure


The percentages given refer to the parameterized value for Y100 – Yat X=0.
point (origin) (Yat X=0 = 0).

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Examples
Example 1:
0.0s 0.1s 0.2s 0.3s 0.4s 0.5s 0.6s 0.7s 0.8s ... 7.4s 7.5s
Measured value 300 379 379 379 379 379 379 379 379 ... 379 379
Difference >80 79 79 79 79 79 79 79 79 ... 79 79
Additive total 0 79 158 237 316 395 474 553 632 ... 5925 6004
Transmission x x
Example 2:
0.0s 0.1s 0.2s 0.3s 0.4s 0.5s 0.6s 0.7s 0.8s ... 599s 600s
Measured value 300 301 301 301 301 301 301 301 301 ... 301 301
Difference >80 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ... 1 1
Additive total 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ... 5999 6000
Transmission x x
Example 3:
0.0s 0.1s 0.2s 0.3s 0.4s 0.5s 0.6s 0.7s 0.8s ... 7.4s 7,5s
Measured value 300 301 300 299 300 301 300 301 299 ... 300 301
Difference >80 1 0 -1 0 1 0 1 -1 ... 0 1
Additive total 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 2 1 ... 0 1
Transmission x

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
6.6 Data Interface
6.6.1.1 Transformer Current or Voltage

failure
IV…invalid EEPROM error, or
parameter error
OV…overflow measured value outside the range (Y100) including overrange, or
measured value cannot be represented in the message format
20…interrogated by general upon receipt of a GI request or
1-16 interrogation
confirmation
T…test no test

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
6.6.2.1 Revision

1…revision
a remote command
a local command
interrogation
1-16 interrogation
tion

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
column A.

The data point's updating interval (OPM II) also depends on the cycle time of the open-/closed-

(OPM II)
Current I~ 0…32000 Transformer current, corresponds to the 100 ms
positive fullscale.
Full scale: X100 + 100% overrange
Current I~ binary EEPROM error, or 100 ms
faulty measured value is in the implausible
range, or
parameter error
In this case the current I~ is set to 32767.
Voltage U~ 0…32000 Transformer voltage, corresponds to the 100 ms
positive fullscale.
Full scale: X100 +50% overrange
Voltage U~ binary EEPROM error, or 100 ms
faulty measured value is in the implausible
range, or
parameter error
In this case the voltage U~ is set to
32767.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
7 Measurement in Three-Phase and Single-
Phase Systems
Content
7.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................132

7.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................133
7.3 Transformer Currents .......................................................................................134
7.4 Transformer Voltage .........................................................................................137
7.5 Frequency .........................................................................................................148
7.7 Synchrocheck ...................................................................................................159
7.9 Data Interface ...................................................................................................182

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Measurement in Three-Phase and Single-Phase Systems
7.1 Introduction
This function is used for direct acquisition of currents, voltages and frequency (primary
quantities before transformers) by measuring secondary quantities (after the high voltage,
medium voltage and low voltage transformers), and for calculation of values which can be
derived from that, such as active power, reactive power and power factor.
Features
• 3 current and 4 voltage inputs
• Phase voltages or phase-to-phase voltages can be wired to the voltage inputs
•
th
Acquisition of currents and voltages up to the 8 harmonic, with signal scanning 128 times
per period
• Calculation of r.m.s. values by a digital signal processor by means of Fast or Discreet
Fourier Transformation
• Acquisition of frequency and provision as:
─ Frequency instantaneous value
─ Frequency mean value
─ Nominal current 1 A, 2 A, 5 A, or 6 A, with 100% overrange and a resolution of 12 bits
─ Nominal voltage 230 V/220 V, 110 V, or 110 V/√3, with 50% overrange and a resolu-
tion of 12 bits
─ Nominal frequency 16.7 Hz, 50 Hz, or 60 Hz, ±5 Hz
• Technological adaptation of currents and voltages according to transformer specification
• Calculation of phase or phase-to-phase voltages dependent on wiring
• Calculation of the zero system
• Calculation of active and reactive power value(s) according to the 1-, 2- or 3-wattmeter
method
• Calculation of voltage-, frequency- and phase difference for the synchrocheck function
• Transfer of the acquired and calculated values using spontaneous information objects
according to IEC 60870-5-101/104, in a selectable format
each value
• Transfer of predefined values to the higher-level open-/closed-loop control function, using
periodical information objects
• Messages of voltage transformer MCB's are considered
• Synchrocheck function with dynamic parameter switch-over, for up to 4 operating states
• Connection of a de-energized line to a system
• Optional direct output of the synchronization status over relay contacts

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
7.2 Block Diagram
Analog inputs Analog inputs

for transformer voltages for transformer currents
U1 … U4 I1 … I3
Acquisition with Fourier Analysis,

Frequency acquisition,
r.m.s. value calculation,
Adaption, Revision
Calculation of phase-to-phase voltages,
Calculation of the zero system,
Monitoring of the voltage transformer
Current, voltage & frequency
Synchro Calculation of
ϕdiff, fdiff, Udiff
check Active and reactive
power,
Power factor,
Voltage difference,
Phase difference,
Frequency difference
Current I1, Phase voltage U1, Voltage U4, Phase-to-phase voltage U12
Smoothing,
Format conversion,
Zero-range suppression,
Change monitoring
Frequency instantaneous and mean value
Phase-to-phase voltage U12, U23, U31
Phase difference, frequency difference
Phase voltage U1, U2, U3; Voltage U4

Active power P1, Reactive power Q1
Frequency instantaneous value
VT U1 U2 U3 nok, VT U4 nok
Reactive power Q1, Q2, Q3
Active power P1, P2, P3
Power factor 1, 2, 3
Voltage difference
Phase difference
Current I1, I2, I3
Zero voltage U0
Zero current I0
Power factor 1
Revision
Data interface

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
7.3 Transformer Currents
Acquisition of AC currents through analog inputs for transformer voltage measurement, and
calculation of the r.m.s. values.
In the standard case the nominal current is 1 A, 2 A, 5 A or 6 A with 100% overrange with a
resolution of 12 bits. The nominal current can be set in the range of 0.5...6 A. If no standard
nominal current is selected, the resolution is directly proportional smaller than 12 bits.
The assignment of the currents to the analog inputs in the OPM II takes place for each data
point by placing an image on a HW-PIN in the system technique with the category
firmware / T_AI_I. This category also includes all parameters of the acquisition (transformer
specifications) and processing functions.
Acquisition Functions:
• Acquisition
• Linear Adaptation
• Revision
• Smoothing
• Format conversion
• Zero-range suppression
Additional functions:
• Calculation of the zero current
− Current I1 firmware / T_AI_I
− Current I1 faulty firmware / SW_DI
objects − Current I1, I2, I3 firmware / T_AI_I
− Zero current I0 firmware / SW_UI

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
7.3.1 Acquisition
The acquisition of AC currents and the calculation of r.m.s. values is carried out by a digital
signal processor by means of Fast or Discreet Fourier Transformation.
For this, currents are acquired through direct transformers up to the 8th harmonic, with signal
scanning 128 times per period. The period duration is determined by the acquired Frequency.
The real components an and imaginary components bn determined with the help of the Fast or
Discreet Fourier Transformation of each current input for all eight harmonics are subjected to
an amplitude- and phase correction.
Amplitude- and Phase Correction

At works, the correction factors for all eight harmonics are determined for each unit with the
help of highly precise sensors at each current input and stored in an EEPROM. The
determined real components an and imaginary components bn are corrected by these factors.
With an error of the EEPROM, the correction factors are assumed with 1, thereby a maximum
error of 2% results. This status is indicated through a diagnostic information. The values
calculated from this are not flagged faulty.
Calculation of the effective values

From the corrected real components anKor and imaginary components bnKor the amplitudes of
the eight harmonics are calculated.
rn Kor = a n Kor + bn Kor

2 2
and from that for each current input the effective values I1, I2 and I3.
7 2
r
I eff = ∑ n Kor
n=0 2

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
7.3.2 Linear Adaptation
The adaptation enables the effective value acquired from the transformer to be converted to a
technological value.
Through parameterization of one interpolation point (parameter X_100% and Y_100%) the
value is adapted linearly to the transformer. For this, the technological value Y100 (primary
quantity before transformer, unit A) is parameterized for the value X100 (secondary value after
transformer, unit A). The technological value Y0 for the value X0 is established with 0.
Note
The values derived therefrom (such as e.g. powers) are calculated with the adapted technological values.
Current Ix
Y100+100%
Y100
Y0
X0 X100 X100+100%
7.3.3 Calculation of the Zero System
The zero current I0 is calculated from the vectorial sum of the currents I1, I2 and I3.
3
I 0 = ∑ In
n =1
For the transfer of the zero current I0 as spontaneous information object, independent of the
acquired currents I1, I2 and I3, further processing functions are performed. The parameters
for the processing functions are established with the category firmware / SW_UI.
• Revision
• Smoothing

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
7.4 Transformer Voltages
Acquisition of AC voltages over analog inputs for transformer voltage measurement, and
In the standard case the nominal voltage is 220 V (230 V), 110 V or 110 V/√3 with 50%
overrange with a resolution of 12 bits. The nominal voltage can be set in the range of
10…220 V (230 V). If no standard nominal voltage is selected, the resolution is directly
proportional smaller than 12 bits. The nominal voltage 220 V or 230 V is dependent on the
system element.
The assignment of the voltage transformer inputs can take place with phase- or phase-to-
phase voltages.
The assignment of the voltages U1, U2 and U3 to the analog inputs in the OPM II takes place
category firmware / T_AI_U. This category includes all parameters for the acquisition functions
(transformer specifications) of the voltage inputs U1, U2 and U3 as well as for the processing
functions of the phase voltages.
The category firmware / T_AI_U4_SYN contains all parameters for the acquisition functions
(transformer specifications) and the processing functions of the voltage U4.
The category firmware / SW_UI contains all parameters for the processing functions of the
phase-to-phase voltages U12, U23 and U31.
Note
The category T_AI_U is always required for the assignment to the HW-PIN and for the parameter setting
of the transformer specifications, even if the inputs are not assigned with phase voltages.
Acquisition functions:
• Acquisition
Processing functions for phase- and phase-to-phase voltages:
• Revision
• Smoothing
• Calculation of the phase-to-phase voltages

• Calculation of the phase voltages
• Calculation of the zero system
• Calculation of the voltage difference
• Calculation of the phase difference
• Monitoring of the voltage transformer MCB's

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
− Phase voltage U1 or firmware / T_AI_U
− Phase-to-phase voltage U12 firmware / SW_UI
− Voltage U4 firmware / T_AI_U4_SYN
− Phase difference firmware / SW_DELTA
− Phase voltage U1 faulty firmware / SW_DI
− Phase-to-phase voltage U12 firmware / SW_DI
faulty
− Voltage U4 faulty firmware / SW_DI
− Phase difference faulty firmware / SW_DI
objects − Phase voltage U1, U2, U3 or firmware / T_AI_U
− Phase-to-phase voltage U12, firmware / SW_UI
U23, U31
− Voltage difference firmware / SW_DELTA
− Zero voltage U0 firmware / SW_UI
− VT U1 U2 U3 nok firmware / SW_T_VT_NOK
− VT U4 nok firmware / SW_T_VT_NOK

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
7.4.1 Assignment of the Voltage Transformer Inputs
phase voltages.
The assignment is determined for the voltage inputs U1, U2 and U3 by the parameter volt-
age type in the category firmware / T_AI_U and for the voltage input U4 by the parameter
synchrocheck in the category firmware / T_AI_U4_SYN.
The following table shows, which values can be derived and/or which functions can be
performed depending on the assignment of the voltage inputs.
Y U1-3 / Y U4 Y U1-3 / U4 U1-3 / Y U4 U1-3 / U4

Calculation of phase-to-phase   - -
voltages U12, U23, U31
Calculation of phase voltages - -  1) -
U1, U2, U3
Calculation of the zero voltage U0    1) -
Calculation of the frequency   - 
difference
Calculation of the voltage   2) - 
difference
Calculation of the phase   - 
difference
Synchrocheck   - 
Synchrocheck 1-pole ground fault -  - 
Calculation of power using   - -
1-wattmeter method
Calculation of power using  2)  2)  
2-wattmeter method
3-wattmeter method
1) only possible if to voltage input U4 a phase voltage of that system is assigned of which also the
phase-to-phase voltages are acquired (reference point); the Synchrocheck funktion is then not
available
2) the calculation of phase-to-phase voltages must be enabled
Meaning of the columns:

Y U1-3 / Y U4 phase voltages assigned to U1, U2, U3 and U4
Y U1-3 / U4 phase voltages assigned to U1, U2, U3 and phase-to-phase voltage assigned to U4
U1-3 / Y U4 phase-to-phase voltages assigned to U1, U2, U3 and phase voltage assigned to U4
U1-3 / U4 phase-to-phase voltages assigned to U1, U2, U3 and U4

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
7.4.2 Acquisition
The acquisition of AC voltages and the calculation of r.m.s. values is carried out by a digital
signal processor by means of Fast or Discreet Fourier Transformation.
For this, voltages are acquired through direct transformers up to the 8th harmonic, with signal
To the voltage inputs U1, U2 and U3 phase voltages or phase-to-phase voltages can be
wired.
Attention
Mixed wiring is not allowed.
To voltage input U4 a phase voltage or a phase-to-phase voltage can be wired.
The real components an and imaginary components bn determined with the help of the Fast or
Discreet Fourier Transformation of each voltage input for all eight harmonics are subjected to
an amplitude- and phase correction.

At works, the correction factors for all eight harmonics are determined for each unit with the
help of highly precise sensors at each voltage input and stored in an EEPROM. The
determined real components an and imaginary components bn are corrected by these factors.
With an error of the EEPROM, the correction factors are assumed with 1, thereby a maximum


2 2
and from this for each voltage input according to the input assignment (phase-to-phase or
phase voltage) the effective values U1, U2 and U3 or U12, U23 und U31.
7 2
rn Kor
U eff = ∑
n =0 2

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
quantity before transformer, unit kV) is parameterized for the value X100 (secondary value
after transformer, unit V). The technological value Y0 for the value X0 is established with 0.
Note
Voltage Ux
Y100+50%
Y100
Y0
X100 X100+50%
7.4.4 Calculation of the Phase-to-Phase Voltage
With the assignment of the voltage inputs U1, U2 and U3 with phase voltages, the phase-to-
phase voltages U12, U23 and U31 are calculated vectorially from the associated phase
voltages.
For the transfer of the calculated phase-to-phase voltages U12, U23 and U31 as spontaneous
information objects, independent of the acquired phase voltages U1, U2 and U3, processing
functions are performed. The parameters for the processing functions are established with the
category firmware / SW_UI.
• Revision
• Smoothing

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
7.4.5 Calculation of the Phase Voltage
With the assignment of the voltage inputs U1, U2 and U3 with phase-to-phase voltages, the
phase voltages U1, U2 and U3 are calculated vectorially from the phase-to-phase voltages
U12, U23 and U31 with the help of the voltage U4 as reference for the neutral point of the
three-phase system.
With the parameter voltage calculation it is determined, with which phase voltage of the
three-phase system the voltage input U4 is assigned.
For this it is necessary that the voltage input U4 is assigned with a phase voltage from the
same three-phase system as the voltage inputs U1, U2 and U3
Note
The synchrocheck function can no longer be utilized.
For the transfer of the calculated phase voltages U1, U2 and U3 as spontaneous information
objects, independent of the acquired phase-to-phase voltages U12, U23 and U31, processing
functions are performed. The parameters for the processing functions are determined with the
category firmware / T_AI_U.
• Revision
• Smoothing

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
7.4.6 Calculation of the Zero Voltage
The zero voltage U0 is calculated from the vectorial sum of the phase voltages U1, U2, U3.
3
Un
U0 = ∑
n =1 3
Note
The calculation of the zero voltage is only possible, if the voltage inputs U1, U2 and U3 are assigned with
phase voltages or a Calculation of the Phase Voltage is possible.
For the transfer of the zero voltage U0 as spontaneous information object, independent of the
acquired phase voltages U1, U2, U3, further processing functions are performed. The
parameters for the processing functions are established with the category firmware / SW_UI.
• Revision
• Smoothing

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
7.4.7 Calculation of the Voltage Difference
The voltage difference is primarily required for the function Synchrocheck and calculated
between the voltage U4 and a selectable reference voltage (phase voltage U1, U2, U3 or
phase-to-phase voltage U12, U23, U31).
Udiff = Ux - U4 x…0, 1, 2, 12, 23, 31
Note
The calculation of the voltage difference is only possible, if the voltage inputs U1, U2 and U3 are assigned
with phase voltages or the voltage inputs U1, U2, U3 and U4 are assigned with phase-to-phase voltages.
The reference voltage is determined by the parameters synchrocheck and

synchrocheck_channel.
The voltage difference is calculated from the primary quantities related to the parameter
VR_plant, whereby the assignment of the voltage inputs (phase-to-phase or phase voltage)
is also considered.
Example: The input for the reference voltage is assigned with the phase voltage, and the
input for U4 is assigned with the phase-to-phase voltage. The voltage difference
is calculated with the help of the calculated phase-to-phase voltage of the
reference voltage.
In addition, the voltage difference can also be transferred as spontaneous information object.
For the transfer of the voltage difference as spontaneous information object, independent of
the voltages U1, U2, U3 or U12, U23, U31 and U4, further processing functions are
performed. The parameters for the processing functions are determined with the category
firmware / SW_DELTA.
• Revision
• Smoothing
Note
The parameter Behavior_at_U< is ineffectively

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
7.4.8 Calculation of the Phase Difference
The phase difference is primarily required for the function Synchrocheck and calculated from
the fundamental component between the voltage U4 and a selectable reference voltage
(phase voltage U1, U2, U3 or phase-to-phase voltage U12, U23, U31), if the function
Synchrocheck is released by parameter synchrocheck.
φdiff = φUx - φU4 x…0, 1, 2, 12, 23, 31
Note
The calculation of the phase difference is only possible, if the voltage inputs U1, U2 and U3 are assigned

The category firmware / T_AI_U4_SYN contains all parameters for the acquisition functions of
the voltage U4.
Acquisition functions of voltage U4:
• Phase correction
• Plausibility check
In addition, the phase difference can also be transferred as spontaneous information object.
For the transfer of the phase difference as spontaneous information object, independent of the
voltages U1, U2, U3 or U12, U23, U31 and U4, further processing functions are performed.
The parameters for the processing functions are determined with the category firmware /
SW_DELTA.
• Revision
• Smoothing
7.4.8.1 Phase Correction
In real measurement circuits, circuitry-related phase displacements occur, that result from
vector group and hour factor, as well as phase errors of external transformers.
With the parameter synchrochk_phas_cor the possibility exists of changing the phase of the
voltage vector U4 to any optional position in order to compensate different phase positions of
the voltages for the synchrocheck (Ux and U4). The amount of the vector of voltage U4
remains unchanged.
The parameter synchrochk_phas_cor acts on the function synchrocheck and on the phase
difference.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
The determined phase difference is detected as implausible, if:
• Voltage U4 and reference voltage are shorter the adjusted value in the parameter U<_ of
the nominal voltage
• Failure of voltage transformer U1, U2, U3
• Failure of voltage transformer U4
If the phase difference is detected as implausible, by :
• Parameter Behavior_at_U< = "with substitude value, IV-Bit"

─ the periodical information "Phase difference" is transferred with the value 180°
─ the periodical information "Phase difference faulty" is set
─ the spontaneous information objects "Phase difference" with the value 180° and the
data point quality descriptor IV are transferred
• Parameter Behavior_at_U< = "substitude value = 0"
─ the periodical information "Phase difference" is transferred with the value 0
─ the periodical information "Phase difference faulty" is not set
─ the spontaneous information objects "Phase difference" with the value 0 and without
the data point quality descriptor IV are transferred
7.4.9 Monitoring of the Voltage Transformer MCB’s
This function monitors the state of the voltage transformer MCBs. The state is transmitted to
this function by means of the spontaneous information objects "VT U1 U2 U3 nok" and "VT U4
nok".
These spontaneous information objects are transmitted in a message with process information
in the format "single-point information with CP56Time2a time stamp". The assignment of this
message is carried out in the OPM II with the category firmware / SW_T_VT_NOK.
The spontaneous information object "VT U1 U2 U3 nok", with single-point information (SPI)
set, indicates the failure of a voltage transformer U1, U2, or U3.
The spontaneous information object "VT U4 nok", with single-point information (SPI) set,
indicates the failure of the voltage transformer U4.
The failure of a voltage transformer has the consequence, that
• the data points concerned are transmitted by spontaneous information objects with data
point quality descriptor IV set. The value of an affected data point is not influenced.
• the fault information of affected data points is set by periodical information. The value of an
affected data point is not influenced.
• the function synchrocheck is inhibited
• the information "Synchrocheck ok" is reset
• if the synchrocheck function also outputs directly to the relays, these relays are
deactivated
• the information of the synchronoscope is reset.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
If the voltage transformer is again signaled as ok:
• affected data points are transferred by spontaneous information objects with the current
value without data point quality descriptor IV set.
• the fault information of affected data points is reset by periodical information
• the functions of the synchrocheck (relay output, synchronoscope, etc.) are enabled
The following table shows which data points are affected by the failure of a voltage
transformer.
Data Point VT U1 U2 U3 nok VT U4 nok

Current I1, I2, I3 - -
Zero current I0 - -
Phase voltage U1, U2, U3  -
Voltage U4 - 
Zero voltage U0  -
Phase-to-phase voltage U12, U23,  -
U31
Active power P1, P2, P3  -
Reactive power Q1, Q2, Q3  -
Frequency mean value - -
Frequency instantaneous value - -
Power factor 1, 2, 3  -
Voltage difference  
Frequency difference  
Phase difference  
Synchrocheck ok  
Voltage x too high / low  
Frequency x too high / low  
Phase x too far leading / lagging  

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
7.5 Frequency
The acquisition of the frequency is the basis for the scanning rate of the Fast-Fourier-
Transformation.
It can be set by means of a parameter, preferably from which transformer input (current- or
voltage channel) the frequency should be acquired.
The nominal frequency is 16.7, 50 and 60 Hz with a measuring range of ±5 Hz and can be set
with the parameter line frequency.
The parameters for the processing functions of frequency mean value and frequency
instantaneous value are determined with the category firmware / SW_F.
The determined frequency is subjected to a plausibility check. For this, the parameterized
nominal frequency is utilized. If an implausible frequency is acquired, a failure strategy (e.g.
stepping to another channel) can be selected.
The parameters for the processing functions of the frequency difference are determined with
the category firmware / SW_DELTA.
The following values are prepared for further processing rules:
• Frequency mean value ...e.g. display

• Frequency instantaneous value ...e.g. frequency protection
• Frequency difference ...Synchrocheck
Processing functions for frequency instantaneous value and frequency mean value:
• Revision
• Acquisition
• Smoothing
• Calculation of the power factor
Periodical information • Derived information
− Frequency instantaneous value firmware / SW_F
− Frequency difference firmware / SW_DELTA
− Frequency instant. value faulty firmware / SW_DI
− Frequency difference faulty firmware / SW_DI
Spontaneous information • Derived information
objects − Frequency instantaneous value firmware / SW_F
− Frequency mean value firmware / SW_F

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
7.5.1 Frequency Instantaneous Value
The frequency instantaneous value is calculated after each full system period and is then
available as periodical information after 50ms at the latest.
The measuring range is the parameterized nominal frequency ±5 Hz with a resolution of 1mHz
and an accuracy of 5 mHz.
Note
The frequency instantaneous value is only valid, if the frequency of one voltage channel is determined
(preferred channel and failure strategy are to be observed).
The effective response time is however dependent on the cycle time of the open-/closed-loop
control function.
Acquisition of frequency
Calculation of frequency
Transmission of per. information
Open-/Closed-loop control function

Cycle time e.g. 10ms
System clock 10ms 10ms 10ms 10ms 10ms 10ms 10ms 10ms 10ms 10ms
Legend: new frequency available
frequency value unchanged
The frequency instantaneous value is subjected to the previously described plausibility check.
In addition to this plausibility check, a gradient monitoring takes place.
Gradient monitoring
If the current frequency deviates from the last transmitted value (original value) by more than
600 mHz/20 ms, the original value is transmitted one time instead of the current value. If the
gradient continues to be exceeded, the current frequency is transferred.
Application for frequency protection

If the frequency instantaneous value is required for a frequency protection, as failure strategy
"Determine frequency exclusively from the default channel" should be selected. If another
failure strategy is selected, frequency jumps can occur during the stepping to another channel.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
7.5.2 Frequency Mean Value
The frequency mean value is determined by means of a continuous mean value generation
over 16 system periods respectively.
The measuring range is the parameterized nominal frequency ±5 Hz with a resolution and an
accuracy of 1 mHz.
7.5.3 Acquisition
The acquisition of the frequency takes place with the help of a so-called zero-crossing
detector.
From which current- or voltage transformer input (preferred channel) the frequency is to be
acquired, can be set with the parameter Frequ_channel.
Attention
If not all channels are wired with the same frequency, the effective values of the other channels are not
correctly calculated (e.g. a frequency difference of ±2 Hz produces an amplitude error of ±4%)
Attention
If the acquired frequency lies outside the ±5 Hz range, then amplitude errors occur with the calculation of
the effective values for currents and voltages of at least ±8%.
7.5.4 Plausibility Check for Frequency Instantaneous Value and Fre-

quency Mean Value
The determined frequency is detected as implausible, if
• calculated frequency < nominal frequency –5 Hz

• calculated frequency > nominal frequency +5 Hz
• effective value < the adjusted value in the parameter U<_ of the nominal voltage (220 V
(230 V), 110 V or 110/√3 V)
• effective value < 13% of nominal current (1 A, 2 A, 5 A or 6 A)
If the frequency is detected as implausible, three failure strategies can be selected with the
parameters Frequ_channel_swi and Frequ_channel_swi_s:
• calculate frequency exclusively from the default channel

• calculate frequency from another current or voltage channel
• calculate frequency from some other channel (all)

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
7.5.4.1 Substitute Values
• Calculated frequency < nominal frequency –5 Hz

─ for the Fast or Discreet Fourier Transformation, scanned with the parameterized
nominal frequency
─ the periodical information "Frequency instantaneous value" and "Frequency mean
value" are transferred with nominal frequency –5 Hz
─ the spontaneous information objects "Frequency instantaneous value" and "Frequency
mean value" are transferred with nominal frequency – 5 Hz and the data point quality
descriptor OV
• Calculated frequency > nominal frequency +5 Hz
nominal frequency
value" are transferred with nominal frequency 5 Hz
mean value" are transferred with nominal frequency 5 Hz and the data point quality
descriptor OV
• Effective value < the adjusted value in the parameter U<_ of the nominal voltage or < 13%
of the nominal current
nominal frequency
─ the periodical information "Frequency instantaneous value", "Frequency mean value"
and "Frequency faulty" are transferred depending on the parameter Behav-
ior_at_U<_I<_
− Parameter Behavior_at_U<_I<_ = "with substitute value, IV-Bit"
with nominal frequency and the periodical information "Frequency faulty" is set
− Parameter Behavior_at_U<_I<_ = "substitute value = 0"
with the value = 0 and the periodical information "Frequency faulty" is reset
mean value" are transferred depending on the parameter Behavior_at_U<_I<_
with nominal frequency and set data point quality descriptor IV
with the value = 0 and reset data point quality descriptor IV

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
7.5.4.2 Failure Strategy
Determine frequency exclusively from the default channel

If the frequency is detected as implausible, the corresponding substitute value is transferred.
Determine frequency from another current or voltage channel

If the frequency is detected as implausible, stepping to the next current channel (if preferred
channel is a current channel) or voltage channel (if preferred channel is a voltage channel)
takes place after 16 system periods respectively, until a channel is found with a plausible
frequency. The frequency is then so long derived from this channel, until a plausible voltage or
a plausible current is again present on the parameterized preferred channel.
During this search, for the frequency mean value the last plausible value is transferred and for
the frequency instantaneous value, the substitute value is transferred.
If no current or voltage channel (dependent on the preferred channel) is found with a plausible
frequency, the corresponding substitute value of the current channel is transferred.
Determine frequency from some other channel (all)

If the frequency is detected as implausible, stepping to the next channel takes place, as
described in the section above, "Determine frequency from another current or voltage
channel". The search is thereby carried out over all channels (current and voltage channels).
7.5.5 Frequency Difference
The frequency difference is determined every 40 milliseconds from the angle between the two
vectors of voltage U4 and a selectable reference voltage (phase voltage U1, U2, U3 or phase-
to-phase voltage U12, U23, U31), if the function Synchrocheck is released by parameter
synchrocheck.
fdiff = fUx - fU4 x…0, 1, 2, 12, 23, 31

The measuring range is ±5Hz with a resolution and an accuracy of 1mHz.
The frequency difference is primary required for the function Synchrocheck.
In addition, the frequency difference can also be transferred as spontaneous information

object.
For the transfer of the frequency difference as spontaneous information object, independent of
• Revision
• Smoothing

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
The determined frequency difference is detected as implausible, if
• calculated frequency < -5 Hz

• calculated frequency > 5 Hz
• effective value Ux or U4 shorter 4,5% of the nominal voltage (220 V(230 V), 110 V or
110 V/√3)
• failure of voltage transformer U1, U2, U3
• failure of voltage transformer U4
If the frequency is detected as implausible, at
• frequency difference < -5 Hz

─ the periodical information "Frequency difference" is transferred with -5 Hz
─ the spontaneous information objects "Frequency difference" with -5 Hz and the data
point quality descriptor OV are transferred
• frequency difference > 5 Hz
─ the periodical information "Frequency difference" is transferred with 5 Hz
─ the spontaneous information objects "Frequency difference" with 5 Hz and the data
• effective value Ux or U4 shorter 4.5% of the nominal voltage
─ Parameter Behavior_at_U< = "with substitude value, IV-Bit"
− the periodical information "Phase difference" is transferred with the value 180°.
− the periodical information "Phase difference faulty" is set.
− the spontaneous information objects "Phase difference" with the value 180° and the
data point quality descriptor IV are transferred.
─ Parameter Behavior_at_U< = "substitude value = 0"
− the periodical information "Phase difference" is transferred with the value 0.
− the periodical information "Phase difference faulty" is not set.
− the spontaneous information objects "Phase difference" with the value 0 and
without the data point quality descriptor IV are transferred.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
7.6 Active and Reactive Power
The active and reactive power is calculated from the corrected real components anKor and
imaginary components bnKor of the acquired or calculated voltage and current.
The power can be determined according to three methods:
• 1-wattmeter method
The method required can be selected using the parameter power calculation.
A common sign inversion for active power, reactive power and power factor is determined
using the parameter Sign_power_values.
For the transfer of the powers as spontaneous information objects, independent of the
acquired values (currents and voltages), further processing functions are performed. The
parameters for the processing functions are determined with the category firmware / SW_PQ.
• Revision
• Power calculation
• Smoothing
− Active power P1 firmware / SW_PQ
− Reactive power Q1 firmware / SW_PQ
− Power factor 1 firmware / SW_COSPH
− Active power P1 faulty firmware / SW_DI
− Reactive power Q1 faulty firmware / SW_DI
− Power factor 1 faulty firmware / SW_DI
objects − Active power P1, P2, and P3 firmware / SW_PQ
− Reactive power Q1, Q2, and Q3 firmware / SW_PQ
− Power factor 1, 2, and 3 firmware / SW_COSPHI
With the 2- and 3-wattmeter methods, active power, reactive power and the power factor are
transferred in the data points P1, Q1 and power factor1.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
7.6.1 Power Calculation
Active power
Pi =
1 7
2 n =0
(
⋅ ∑ anUKori ⋅ anIKori + bnUKori ⋅ bnIKori ) i…………1, 2, 3
anUKor.… corrected real component of the voltage
U1, U2 oder U3
anIKor..… corrected real component of the current
Reactive power I1, I2 oder I3
bnUKor.… corrected imaginary component of the
Qi =
1 7
2 n =0
(
⋅ ∑ anUKori ⋅ bnIKori − anIKori ⋅ bnIKori ) voltage U1, U2 oder U3
bnIKor..… corrected imaginary component of the
current I1, I2 oder I3
7.6.2 Power Factor
For the calculation of the power factor, all 8 harmonics are utilized.
Pi 1-wattmeter method:
cos ϕ i = i…………1, 2, 3
Pi + Qi
2 2
2- and 3-wattmeter method:
i…………1
A sign inversion for power factor common with active power and reactive power is determined
using the parameter Sign_power_values.
For the transfer of the power factors 1, 2 and 3 as spontaneous information objects,
independent of the calculated powers, further processing functions are performed. With the
2- and 3-wattmeter methods, the power factor is transmitted in the data point Power Factor 1.
The parameters for the processing functions are determined with the category
firmware / SW_COSPHI.
• Revision
• Smoothing

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
7.6.2.1 Plausibility Check for the Power Factor
The power factor is detected as implausible, if:
• Related value (I1,U1, I2,U2, I3, U3) in overrange

• Ux < 0.8% nominal voltage or Ix < 0.8% nominal current
• Related value (I1, U1, I2, U2, I3, U3) in overrange or

Ux < 0,8% nominal voltage or Ix < 0,8% nominal current
─ The belonging periodical information items "Power factor 1", "Power factor 2", "Power
factor 3" and "Power factor 1 faulty" are transferred depending on Parameter Behav-
ior_at_U<_I<_.
with that value of the power factor, when the condition is fulfilled the first time and if
power factor 1 is affected, the periodical information "Power factor 1 faulty" is set
− Parameter Behavior_at_U<_I<_ = "Substitute value = 0"
with value = 0 and if the power factor 1 is affectetd, the periodical information
"Power factor 1 faulty" is not influenced
─ The belonging spontaneous information objects "Power factor 1", "Power factor 2",
"Power factor 3" are transferred depending on parameter Behavior_at_U<_I<_
with that value of the power factor, when the condition is fulfilled the first time and
with set data point quality descriptor IV
with value = 0 and not set data point quality descriptor IV
─ The associated periodical information items "Power factor 1", "Power factor 2", "Power
factor 3" and "Power factor 1 faulty" are transferred with the actual values and if "Pow-
er factor 1" is affected, the periodical information "Power factor 1 faulty" is set

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
7.6.3 Calculation of the Active and Reactive Power
1-wattmeter method
The 1-wattmeter method is used for the measurement of the individual phase powers in four-
wire systems. For this it is necessary to wire the voltage inputs with the phase voltages.
Pi Ii
Li
Ui
Pi = Ui • Ii • cos ϕi
Qi = Ui • Ii • sin ϕi i…1, 2, 3
2-wattmeter method (two-wattmeter circuit)

The 2-wattmeter method is used for the measurement of the total power in three-phase
systems without neutral point. For this it is necessary to wire the voltage inputs with the
phase-to-phase voltages. The 2-wattmeter method provides the correct total power even with
unbalanced load.
Note
For wiring with phase-to-phase voltages, the voltages U12 and U23 are absolutely necessary.
P12 I1
L1
U12
I2
L2
U23
P23 I3
L3
P = (U12 • I1 • cos ϕ1 - U23 • I3 • cos ϕ3)

Q = (U12 • I1 • sin ϕ1 - U23 • I3 • sin ϕ3)
The active power P and the reactive power Q are transferred in the data points "Active power
P1" and "Reactive power Q1".
For special cases, there is also the possibility of assigning the voltage inputs with phase
voltages. In this case, the calculated phase-to-phase voltages are utilized for the power
calculation.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
3-wattmeter method
The 3-wattmeter method is used for the measurement of the total power in four-wire systems.
For this it is necessary to wire the voltage inputs with the phase voltages. Through the
summing of the separately calculated phase powers, the correct total power is provided even
with unbalanced load.
P1 I1
L1
P2 I2
L2
U1
P3 I3
L3
U2
U3
P = (U1 • I1 • cos ϕ1 + U2 • I2 • cos ϕ2 + U3 • I3 • cos ϕ3)

Q = (U1 • I1 • sin ϕ1 + U2 • I2 • sin ϕ2 + U3 • I3 • sin ϕ3)

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
7.7 Synchrocheck
The function Synchrocheck checks, whether two systems are synchronous, and generates a
signal as a result. This signal can be used for the interconnection of two systems, if the
systems are synchronized using other measures.
By means of the parameter synchrocheck the function Synchrocheck is enabled and infor-
mation items which are derived therefrom become valid.
Note
This function is not directly appropriate for the synchronization of systems but can support it.
For the determination of the synchrony of two systems, for each system one voltage is
utilized. Thereby, connection criteria such as voltages and their difference, the frequencies
and their difference, the phase difference, the change in the voltage difference and the
frequency difference are checked against settable limits.
If all checks have been passed positively, the systems are regarded as "synchronous" and the
signal Synchrocheck ok is generated. For the compensation of the running time until the
actuator is actuated, a so-called Signal set-up time can be set.
The function "Relay output" enables a direct output of the signal Synchrocheck ok linked
with an information created from the open-/closed-loop control function on the system control el-
ement.
A synchronoscope generates information items which describe the location of the selectable
reference voltage Ux to voltage U4.
For a maximum of four different operating states, with the help of the function Parameter
switch-over there is the possibility of setting the limits dynamically. The parameter records with
the various limits are stored in so-called parameter banks.
The function also supports the connecting of a de-energized line to a system.
The states of the voltage transformer MCB’s are taken into account (refer to chapter
"Monitoring of the Voltage Transformer MCB’s").
The category firmware / T_AI_U4_SYN contains all parameters for the processing functions.
• Revision
• Determination of synchrony
• Creation of the Signal Synchrocheck ok
• Relay output
• Synchronoscope
• Parameter switch-over
• Connecting a de-energized line to a system
• Connecting in case of 1-pole ground fault

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Periodical • Derived information
information − Synchrocheck ok firmware / T_AI_U4_SYN
− Voltage x too high firmware / SW_DI
− Voltage x too low firmware / SW_DI
− Frequency x too high firmware / SW_DI
− Frequency x too low firmware / SW_DI
− Phase x too far leading firmware / SW_DI
− Phase x too far lagging firmware / SW_DI
− Output relay OUT Dx0 firmware / DO_EM
Spontaneous • Derived information
information − Synchroch. Ux zero active firmware / SW_SYN_U_NULL_ACTIVE
objects − Synchroch. U4 zero active firmware / SW_SYN_U_NULL_ACTIVE
− Synchroch. param.bank x active firmware / SW_T_SYN_B_CON
(x = 0…3)
− Synchroch. disable Ux zero firmware / SW_SYN_U_NULL_DISABLE
− Synchroch. disable U4 zero firmware / SW_SYN_U_NULL_DISABLE
− Synchroch. param.bank x select. firmware / SW_T_SYN_B_SET
(x = 0…3)

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
7.7.1 Block Diagram
Binary outputs
OUT D00 … OUT Dx0
RL RL
Parameter
bank 0 - 3 Parameter
selection
Relay output
Voltage difference
Phase difference Synchrocheck
Synchronoscope
Synchroch. param.bank x select.

Phase x too far leading / lagging
Synchroch. param.bank x active

Synchroch. disable U4 zero
Synchroch. disable Ux zero
Frequency x too high / low
Synchroch. U4 zero active

Synchroch. Ux zero active
Voltage x too high / low
Output relay OUT Dx0
Synchrocheck ok
Revision
Data interface
7.7.2 Revision
In addition to the functions described in section "Common Functions - Revision",
• the periodical information "Synchrocheck OK" is reset and no longer activated for the
duration of the revision
• a possibly existing relay output – which is actuated through the function Synchrocheck – is
deactivated
• the set information of the synchronoscope are reset

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
7.7.3 Determination of Synchrony
utilized. Necessary Signals
7.7.3.1 Necessary Signals
Usage is Status of SPI and

mandatory message
voltage Ux  -
voltage U4 
Revision - Refer to chapter Revision
SPI = 0 Connection possible
VT U1 U2 U3 nok - Refer to chapterVT U1 U2

VT U4 nok - U3 nok, VT U4 nok
SPI … 0 Connection possible

NT and IV-Bit … 0
NT oder IV-Bit … 1 Connection not possible
Synchroch. disable Ux zero  Refer to chapter

Synchroch. disable U4 zero  Synchroch. disable Ux
zero, Synchroch. disable
U4 zero
SPI … 0 or 1 Connection possible
NT and IV-Bit … 0
NT, IV … 1 Connection not possible

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
7.7.3.2 Connection Criteria
The connection criteria such as voltages and their difference, the frequencies and their
difference, the phase difference, the change in the voltage difference and the frequency
difference are checked against settable limits.
For a maximum of four different operating states, the limits can be set separately and selected
with the help of the Parameter Bank Selection. The parameter records with the limits are
stored in so-called parameter banks and differentiated by a prefix "Si" (i = 0…3).
Udiff ≤ Udiff_max Maximum permitted voltage difference

Udiff Calculated voltage difference
Udiff_max Parameter S#_U_diff_max
Maximum amount of the voltage difference in % of the plant nominal
voltage (reference value is the parameter VR_Plant)
φdiff ≤ φdiff_max Maximum permitted phase difference

φdiff Calculated phase difference
φdiff_max Parameter S#_phase_diff_max
fdiff ≤ fdiff_max Maximum permitted frequency difference

fdiff Calculated frequency difference
fdiff_max Parameter S#_f_diff_max
Uxmin ≤ Ux ≤ Uxmax r.m.s. value of the voltage Ux in the permissible range

Ux Acquired or calculated phase voltage U1, U2, U3 or phase-to-phase
voltage U12, U31 U23.
This corresponds with the reference voltage as described in chapter
"Calculation of the Voltage Difference".
Uxmin Parameter S#_Ux_min
Minimum r.m.s. value of the reference voltage in % of the
parameterized or calculated nominal voltage
Uxmax Parameter S#_Ux_max
Maximum r.m.s. value of the reference voltage in % of the
parameterized or calculated nominal voltage
U4min ≤ U4 ≤ U4max r.m.s. value of the voltage U4 in the permissible range

U4 Acquired or calculated voltage U4
U4min Parameter S#_U4_min
Minimum r.m.s. value of the voltage U4 in % of the nominal voltage
U4max Parameter S#_U4_max
Maximum r.m.s. value of the voltage U4 in % of the nominal voltage
Δfdiff/Δt ≤ fdiff_gradient_max Maximum permissible change of the frequency difference every 40 ms

within an observation period of four measuring periods (160 ms)
Δfdiff/Δt Change of the frequency difference in 40ms
fdiff_gradient_max Parameter S#_f_diff_gradient_max
ΔUx/Δt ≤ Ugradient_max Maximum permissible change of the voltage Ux every 40 ms within an

observation period of four measuring periods (160 ms)
ΔUx/Δt Change of the r.m.s. value of the voltage Ux in 40ms

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Ugradient_max Parameter S#_U_gradient_max

maximum change of the r.m.s. value of the voltage Ux in % of the
nominal voltage
ΔU4/Δt ≤ Ugradient_max Maximum permissible change of the voltage U4 every 40 ms within an

ΔU4/Δt Change of the effective value of the voltage U4 in 40 ms
Maximum change of the r.m.s. value of the voltage U4 in % of the
nominal voltage
7.7.4 Creation of the Signal "Synchrocheck ok"
signal Synchrocheck ok is set immediately with a frequency difference less than 0.02 Hz.
With a frequency difference greater than 0.02 Hz, the signal Synchrocheck ok is set in such
a way, that the circuit breaker closes at 0 degrees. For the calculation of the connection
moment, the so-called signal set-up time is taken into account.
7.7.4.1 Signal Set-up Time
The signal set-up time is used to compensate for the running time within the system and can
be set using the parameter S#_signal_setup_t. The calculation of the signal set-up time is
dependent on the location of the activation of the circuit breaker.
It is differentiated between:
• Activation by the relay on the system element with the function Synchrocheck
• Activation by another system element (e.g. peripheral element with command output)
The signal set-up time is produced from the sum of
• with activation by the relay on the system element with the function Synchrocheck
─ signal acquisition and signal processing (40 ms)
─ response time of the circuit breaker
• with activation by another system element
─ transmission on the Ax 1703 peripheral bus (10 ms)
─ delay time of the open-/closed-loop control function (cycle time)
─ delay time on the system element with the command output

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
7.7.4.2 Output Duration
The output duration is dependent on the set limits. The minimum output duration of the signal
Synchrocheck ok can be determined with the parameter synchrocheck_tmin. The shortest
output duration is 40 ms.
The parameter acts on:
• the periodical information "Synchrocheck ok"

• a possibly existing LED display
• the possibly existing output relay of the system element
The application has to reacte as fast as possible to the signal Synchrocheck ok (rising
edge). After this the the switching-on of the circuit breaker has to be blocked. The blocking
can be released with the falling edge.
Example for the calculation of phase angle at the end of the output duration
Assumption: Output duration 0.4 s
Maximum permitted frequency difference 0.1 Hz
An output duration of 0.4 s with a maximum permitted frequency difference of 0.1 Hz equates
a phase angle
360° • 0.1 Hz • 0.4 s = 14.4°
Attention
Depending on the selected output duration synchrocheck_tmin and the maximum permitted frequency
difference S#_f_diff_max the signal Synchrocheck ok can still be active, while the “synchronous”
conditions are not present any more.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
7.7.4.3 Calculation of the Connection Moment
The coming edge of the Synchrocheck ok signal is set in such a way, that under
consideration of the signal set-up time, the connection moment lies at a phase difference of 0.
ϕdiff
180° ∆fdiff / ∆t <> 0 ∆fdiff / ∆t = 0
Signal set-up time
1 2 3 4 5
Error
t [s]
Connection moment
-180°
Synchrocheck ok
Since with the calculation of the connection moment a frequency difference change of 0 is
assumed, errors can occur with the calculation of the connection moment.
Example for the calculation of the maximum error for the connection
Assumption: Signal set-up time 400 ms
Maximum frequency difference change 5 mHz
With a maximum frequency difference change / 40 ms of 5 mHz, this produces an error of

360° • 5 mHz • 40 ms = 0.072° angular change / 40 ms
Due to the signal set-up time of 400 ms, this produces a maximum error of
400 ms / 40 ms • 0.072° = 0.72°
It is to be observed, that:
• the accuracy of the frequency difference is ±5 mHz

• the calculation of the connection moment takes place in a time scale of 40 ms and
consequently the connection moment can be inaccurate by ±40 ms.
7.7.5 Relay Output
This function enables the 1-pole output of the signal Synchrocheck ok linked with the peri-
odical information "Output relay OUT Dx0" from the open-/closed-loop control function. De-
pending on the system element one or more output relays are possible. If several relays are
available on the system element, these can be switched independent from each other.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
7.7.5.1 Logic Operation
The kind of linking of the signal Synchrocheck ok with the periodical information "Output re-
lay OUT Dx0" is set by the parameter relay output. This parameter affects all available
output relays.
Synchrocheck ok Sync
Synchrocheck
Parameter
„Relay output“
Sync,FUD(AND)
&
Sync,FUD(OR) Revision
>1
Periodical Output relay OUT Dx0 FUP

information object
Monitoring
7.7.5.2 Monitoring
The welding of the relay contact is determined by reading back the second relay contact. If a
welded relay contact is recognized, all available output relays are terminated, a diagnostic in-
formation is set and further outputs are prevented.
A going error (welded contact seperates itself) is not detected.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
7.7.6 Synchronoscope
This function generates information that describes the location of the selectable reference
voltage Ux to voltage U4 in regard to
• the voltage difference

• the frequency difference
• the phase difference
Thereby 2 periodical information items are derived for each difference value.
The following picture shows, which information is set in which case.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
7.7.7 Parameter Switch-Over
This function enables the limits for a maximum of four different operating states to be defined
in parameter records, which are managed in so-called parameter banks. With the help of a
spontaneous information object, these parameter banks can be switched over dynamically
(parameter bank selection). Which parameter bank is active, is signaled back with a
spontaneous information object.
On switch-over, the possibly active Synchrocheck ok signal is reset, and only activated
again after the connection criteria of the new parameter bank have been checked and fulfilled.
If the parameter bank current at the moment is selected again, there is no interruption to the
Synchrocheck ok signal.
7.7.7.1 Parameter Bank Selection
The selection of the parameter bank is performed by one of the spontaneous information
objects "Synchroch.Param.bank x select." (x = 0…3 and specifies the parameter bank). These
spontaneous information objects are transmitted in a message with process information in the
format "single command". The assignment of these messages in the OPM II takes place with
the category firmware / SW_T_SYN_B_SET.
A successful switch-over is signaled back by the corresponding spontaneous information

object "Synchroch.Param.bank x active" (x = 0…3 and specifies the parameter bank). These
format "single-point information". The assignment of these messages in the OPM II takes
place with the category firmware / SW_T_SYN_B_CON.
For the parameter bank selection, the procedure for the command transmission according to
IEC 60870-5-101/104 for "direct command" is applied.
On reception of the spontaneous information object "Synchroch.Param.bank x select.", the

switch-over is initiated with the following checks:
• Function Synchrocheck enabled

• Cause of transmission is "Activation"
• Data point identifier is "execute"
• Command state is ON
• Qualifier of command < 3
If these conditions are not fulfilled:
• the command is rejected

• a negative confirmation of activation is transmitted, or in the case of a false cause of
transmission, a negative confirmation with the cause of transmission 45 (unknown cause
of transmission)
If these conditions are fulfilled, a positive confirmation of activation is transmitted, and

depending on the selected parameter bank, the following actions are performed.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Command is for a parameter bank other than the one currently active
• Transmission of the spontaneous information object "Synchroch.Param.bank x activ." with
the single-point information state (SPI) OFF for the currently active parameter bank
• Switch-over to the new parameter bank
the single-point information state (SPI) ON for the new parameter bank
• Transmission of a positive termination of activation
Command is for the currently active parameter bank

• Transmission of a negative termination of activation
7.7.7.2 Special Cases
Startup
After startup:
• the spontaneous information objects "Synchroch.Param.bank x activ." with the single-point

information state (SPI) OFF is transmitted for all four parameter banks
• the parameter bank 0 is set
• the spontaneous information object "Synchroch.Param.bank x activ." with the single-point
information state (SPI) ON is transmitted for parameter bank 0
Autonomy
If the firmware goes to the operating state "Autonomy", the parameter bank 0 is set.
Enabling of the function Synchrocheck

If the Synchrocheck function is enabled during operation, switching to parameter bank 0 takes
place.
7.7.8 Connecting a De-Energized Line to a System
Since with a de-energized line, the previously described connection criteria (e.g. voltage -
difference) can not be fulfilled, the possibility exists of deactivating the check of the connection
criteria. This is performed through a canceling of the block for the connection to a de-
energized line and can be controlled separately depending on the de-energized component
(Ux or U4).
To obtain the enabling for the connection of a de-energized line:
• the voltage must be smaller than a parameterized threshold (parameter S#_Ux_zero or

S#_U4_zero)
• the block for the corresponding de-energized component (Ux or U4) must be canceled

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
The block or the canceling of the block takes place with the help of a spontaneous information
object.
• spontaneous information object for Ux…Synchroch. disable Ux zero

• spontaneous information object for U4…Synchroch. disable U4 zero
in the format "single-point information". The assignment of these messages in the OPM II
takes place with the category firmware / SW_SYN_U_NULL_DISABLE. The spontaneous
information object is only assessed, if the data point quality descriptors IV and NT are not set.
Note
These spontaneous information objects are not evaluated with energized line sections.
Whether the line is in a de-energized state and the block is canceled, is signaled according to
the de-energized component (Ux or U4) with the help of a spontaneous information object:
• spontaneous information object for Ux…Synchroch. Ux zero active

• spontaneous information object for U4…Synchroch. U4 zero active
takes place with the category firmware / SW_SYN_U_NULL_ACTIVE.
The following diagram shows, on which influences the Synchrocheck ok signal is dependent
with a de-energized line (in this case Ux).
Parameter „Si_U4_max“
Voltage U4rms
Parameter „Si_U4_min“
Parameter „Si_Ux_zero“
Voltage Uxrms
ON
information object
Spontaneous
OFF
VT U1 U2 U3 nok
Synchrocheck ok

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
The following representation shows, in which voltage ranges a set Synchrocheck ok signal
is basically possible.
System A System B
(Ux) (U4)
1,5 * Uxnom 1,5 * U4nom
Ux max U4 max
energized 1 * Uxnom energized 1 * U4nom
Ux min U4 min
Ux null U4 null
de-energized 0 de-energized 0
..... Synchronising (Synchrocheck OK) is not possible
7.7.9 Connection in case of 1-phase-to-earth-fault
In case of 1-phase-to-earth-fault one of the 3 phases is connected to the ground. The voltage
value of the two (healthy) phases will increase to a value multiplied by a factor of √3.
Despite this fault state, a continued operation is - under certain conditions - possible for a
limited period.
In case of this specific operating condition, the function synchrocheck can be used.
To obtain the enabling for the connection in case of 1-phase-to-earth-fault:
• the parameter synchrocheck has to be set to option „phase-to-phase + earth fault“

• the parameter voltage type has to be set to option „phase“ (i.e.: circuitry of U1, U2, U3
with phase voltages)
• the parameters X_100% [Ux] and Y_100% [Ux] has to be set to (phase voltage * √3)
• the parameters X_100% [U4] and Y_100% [U4] has to be set to the value of the phase-to-
phase-voltage

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
7.8.1 Revision
SW_REV.
7.8.2 Smoothing

steps.
Note
The smoothing can be set separately for each value and has no effect on other values derived from it.
That means, that e.g. the power is not calculated with the smoothened current.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
7.8.3 Format Conversion
The format conversion converts the technological quantities of the acquired transformer
currents, transformer voltages and the values derived therefrom into the format of the required
Into which format conversion takes place is determined by the parameter TI (type
identification). The format can be set separately for every spontaneous information object to
be transferred.
The following formats of the spontaneous information objects are possible:
Format Value Range Meaning

Measured value, normalized value -1…+1 - 2-15 normalized, percental representation
...
+32767
number ...
+1.000 • 1015
With the zero range suppression, value fluctuations of the sensor can be suppressed in a
definable range.
The zero range suppression can be enabled by means of the parameter Zero range and can
be parameterized separately for defined spontaneous information objects.
If the value is within the upper limit of the zero range (XZU) and the lower limit of the zero
range (XZL), it is substituted by the value 0.
For values without polarity sign (e.g. transformer current), the lower limit of the zero range
XZL = 0. For values affected by polarity signs (e.g. active power) XZL = -XZU.
The following table shows, for which values a zero range suppression is possible and which
rule is applied with regard to the lower and upper limit of the zero range:
Value XZL XZU referring to

Current I1, I2, I3 0 X_100% (T_AI_I)
Phase voltage U1, U2, U3 0 X_100% (T_AI_U) Voltage type: phase
X_100% (T_AI_U) / √3 Voltage type: phase-to-phase
Voltage U4 0 X_100% (T_AI_U4_SYN)
Phase-to-phase voltage U12, 0 X_100% (T_AI_U) Voltage type: phase
U23, U31 X_100% (T_AI_U) • √3 Voltage type: phase-to-phase
Zero current I0 0 X_100% (T_AI_I) of I1
Zero voltage U0 0 X_100% (T_AI_U) of U1 Voltage type: phase
X_100% (T_AI_U) of U1 Voltage type: phase-to-phase
Active power P1, P2, P3 -XZU Nominal power e.g. with 1-wattmeter method:
(X_100% (T_AI_U) of U1) • (X_100% (T_AI_I) of I1)
Reactive power Q1, Q2, Q3 -XZU Nominal power e.g. with 1-wattmeter method:

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Through the parameter zero_range_standard it can be set, whether the zero range is
predefined (standard) or can be freely parameterized.
In the standard case, the upper limit of the zero range is 5% and the parameter ze-
ro_range_Xzu is ineffective. Otherwise, by means of the parameter zero_range_Xzu the
zero range can be freely set in %.
Note
The zero range suppression can be set separately for each value and has no effect on other values
derived from it.
7.8.3.2 Overrange
Following two overranges are differentiated:
• Standard overrange
• parameterized overrange
Standard overrange
This overrange is depending on the system element and is in case of
• current transformer 100% and by

• voltage transformer 50%
of the measuring transformer nominal range (X100).
This overrange becomes effective, if the parameter overrange is not parameterized or deter-
mined with the value "Standard".
Settable Overrange
This overrange is determined by the process-technical parameter Overrange. The specifica-
tion takes place for both the current transformer as well as the voltage transformer in % of the
measuring transformer nominal range from 0 to 200%.
The overrange has effects on
• Data point quality descriptor OV

• Value range in message format "Measured value, normalized value"
Data point quality descriptor OV

The data point quality descriptor OV is set, if either the overrange dependent on the system
element or the parameterized technological overrange is exceeded (see Characteristic
Transformer Current and Characteristic Transformer Voltage).

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Value range in message format "Measured value, normalized value"

The maximum representable value (1-2-15) and consequently the value Y100 (measuring trans-
former-nominal value), is exclusively determined by the overrange.
Example: Value in the message in case of measuring transformer-nominal value
Overrange Value in message Note

0% 1-2-15
Standard (50%) 0.67 Voltage transformer
Standard (100%) 0.5 Current transformer
200% 0.33
7.8.3.3 Characteristic Transformer Current
Transformer current with standard overrange

The following characteristic relates to the message format "Measured value, normalized
value"

X100 5A upper limit of the measuring transformer- X_100%
nominal range
Y100 0.5 technological value at X100
XZU 1 A (2%) upper limit of the zero range zero_range_Xzu
X100+100% standard or not upper limit of the overrange Overrange
parameterized
Y100+100% 1-2-15 maximum representable value in message
Y100
Y0
X0 XZU X100 X100+100%
IV
OV

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Transformer current with parameter-settable overrange

The following characteristic relates to the message format "Measured value, normalized val-
ue"

nominal range
XOR 70% upper limit of the overrange (X100+OR) Overrange
YOR 1-2-15 maximum representable value in message

(Y100+OR)
Current Ix YOR Normalized value
Y100
Y0
X0 XZU X100 XOR X100+100%
IV
OV

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
7.8.3.4 Characteristic Transformer Voltage
Transformer voltage with standard overrange

value"

X100 110 V upper limit of the measuring transformer- X_100%
nominal range
XZU 2.2 V (2%) upper limit of the zero range zero_range_Xzu
parameterized
Y100
Y0
X0 XZU X100 X100+50%
IV
OV

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Transformer voltage with parameter-settable overrange

ue"

nominal range

(Y100+OR)
Voltage Ux YOR Normalized value
Y100
Y0
X0 XZU X100 XOR X100+50%
IV
OV

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017

procedure

parameterized Thresh_uncond, the new measured value is transmitted immediately.
Thresh_uncond 0.00% - 103.00%

Thresh_additive 0.0% - 1000.0%

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Examples
Thresh_uncond 2.00% represents a change by 80
Thresh_additive 150.0% represents an additive total of 6000
Example 1:
0.04s 0.08s 0.12s 0.16s 0.2s 0.24s 0.28s ... 3.00s 3.04s
Measured value 300 379 379 379 379 379 379 ... 379 379
Difference >80 79 79 79 79 79 79 ... 79 79
Additive total 0 79 158 237 316 395 474 ... 5925 6004
Transmission x x
Example 2:
0.04s 0.08s 0.12s 0.16s 0.2s 0.24s 0.28s ... 239.96s 240s
Measured value 300 301 301 301 301 301 301 ... 301 301
Difference >80 1 1 1 1 1 1 ... 1 1
Additive total 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 ... 5999 6000
Transmission x x
Example 3:
0.04s 0.08s 0.12s 0.16s 0.2s 0.24s 0.28s ... 3.00s 3.04s
Measured value 300 301 300 299 300 301 300 ... 300 301
Difference >80 1 0 -1 0 1 0 ... 0 1
Additive total 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 ... 0 1
Transmission x

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
7.9 Data Interface
7.9.1.1 Values
Values concerned
Current I1, I2, I3 Active power P1, P2, P3
Phase voltage U1, U2, U3 Reactive power Q1, Q2, Q3
Phase-to-phase voltage U12, U23, U31 Leistungsfaktor 1, 2, 3
Voltage U4 Voltage difference
Frequency instantaneous value, frequency mean value Frequency difference
Zero current I0 Phase difference
Zero voltage U0

TI…Type Identification TI 34 measured value, normalized value
TI 36 Measured value, short floating point number
CASDU, IOA…Message address can be set by parameter
Value refer to "Resolution, Significant " column "Value Range"
failure
IV…invalid refer to "Error Handling for Spontaneous Information Objects"
column "Condition"
OV…overflow refer to "Error Handling for Spontaneous Information Objects"
column "Condition"
03…spontaneous Change of the value depending on the thresholds, or
change of the quality descriptors IV or BL
1-16 interrogation
tion
T…test no test

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
7.9.1.1.1 Resolution, Significant Digits and Unit
The following table specifies, which value range resolution and unit the spontaneous
information objects have dependent on the format.
Meaning of the column "Resolution" for:
"Measured value, normalized value"

The resolution is only dependent on the standard- or parameter-settable overrange
Example: Current I1X_100%Y_100% equals 200 A and standard overrange
Resolution = 2 • 200 • 2.5•10-4 = 0.1 A
Since the resolution of the value is less than the possible resolution of the format, the least
significant bits are set to zero.
"Measured value, scaled value"

The resolution is predefined and specifies the valency of a bit.
"Measured value, short floating point number"

The resolution is dependent on the parameter(s) of the value range
Example: Active power P1 Y_100% [I1] = 20 A Y_100% [U1] = 110 KV
Resolution = 2 • 20 A • 110 KV • 2.5•10-4 = 0.0011 MW
The values specified for the resolution are only valid for the standard case of the nominal cur-
rent (1 A, 2 A, 5 A or 6 A) and the nominal voltage (230 V/220 V, 110 V or 110 V/√3).
Data Point Value Range Format Resolution Unit

1)
Current I1, I2, I3 0…Y_100% [Ix] + OR [Ix] norm 2.5•10-4 1
Zero current I0 0…Y_100% [I1] + OR [I1] scal 2) 1 A
x…1, 2, 3 3)
s.fl.p. 2.5•10-4 A
Phase voltage U1, U2, U3 norm 1) 3.33•10-4 1
0…Y_100% [Ux] + OR [Ux]
Zero voltage U0 scal 2) 0.1 kV
0…Y_100% [U1] + OR [U1]
3)
x…1, 2, 3 s.fl.p. 3.33•10-4 kV
1)
Voltage U4 0…Y_100% [U4] + OR [U4] or norm 3.33•10-4 1
0…(Y_100% [U4] + OR [U4]) • √3 scal 2) 0.1 kV
depending on parameter 3)
synchrocheck s.fl.p. 3.33•10-4 kV
Phase-to-phase voltage 0…(Y_100% [Ux] + OR [Ux]) • √3 norm 1) 3.33•10-4 1

U12, U23, U31 scal 2) 0.1 kV
Wiring: 3)
phase voltage x…1, 2, 3 s.fl.p. 3.33•10-4 kV
Phase-to-phase voltage 0…Y_100% [Ux] + OR [Ux] norm 1) 3.33•10-4 1

U12, U23, U31 scal 2) 0.1 kV
Wiring: 3)
phase-to-phase voltage x…1, 2, 3 s.fl.p. 3.33•10-4 kV
1) normalized value
2) scaled value
3) Short floating point number
OR standard or parameter-settable overrange

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017

1)
Active power P1, P2, P3 ± (Y_100% [Ix] + OR [Ix]) • Y_100% norm 2.5•10-4 1
1-wattmeter method [Ux]
scal 2) 1 MW
3)
x…1, 2, 3 s.fl.p. 2.5•10-4 MW
Active power P1 ± 3 • (Y_100% [I1] + OR [I1]) • Y_100% norm 1) 2.5•10-4 1

2-wattmeter method [U1] • (1/√3)
scal 2) 1 MW
(phase-to-phase voltages) 3)
s.fl.p. 2.5•10-4 MW
1)
Active power P1 ± 3 • (Y_100% [I1] + OR [I1]) • Y_100% norm 2.5•10-4 1
3-wattmeter method [U1]
scal 2) 1 MW
(phase voltages) 3)
s.fl.p. 2.5•10-4 MW
1)
Reactive power Q1, Q2, ± (Y_100% [Ix] + OR [Ix]) • Y_100% norm 2.5•10-4 1
Q3 [Ux] 2)
scal 1 Mvar
1-wattmeter method
3)
x…1, 2, 3 s.fl.p. 2.5•10-4 Mvar
Reactive power Q1 ± 3 • (Y_100% [I1] + OR [I1]) • Y_100% norm 1) 2.5•10-4 1

2-wattmeter method [U1] • (1/√3)
scal 2) 1 Mvar
s.fl.p. 2.5•10-4 Mvar
1)
Reactive power Q1 ± 3 • (Y_100% [I1] + OR [I1]) • Y_100% norm 2.5•10-4 1
scal 2) 1 Mvar
(phase voltages) 3)
s.fl.p. 2.5•10-4 Mvar
1)
Frequency mean value -5 Hz…0…5 Hz norm 1 mHz 1
Frequency instantaneous 2)
(fnom–5 Hz)…0…(fnom+5 Hz) scal 10 mHz
value
fnom…parameterized line frequency s.fl.p. 3) 10-3 Hz
Power factor 1, 2, 3 -1…0…1 norm 1) 2.5•10-4 1
scal 2) 10-3 1
3)
s.fl.p. 2.5•10-4 1
1)
Voltage difference Ux - U4 - Y_100% [Ux] + OR [Ux]…0…Y_100% norm 3.33•10-4 1
[Ux] + OR [Ux]
scal 2) 0.1 kV
x…1, 2, 3, 12, 23, 31 3)
x…1, 2, 3 s.fl.p. 3.33•10-4 kV
1)
Frequency difference fUx - -5 Hz…0…5 Hz norm 1 mHz 1
fU4 2)
scal 1 mHz
3)
x…1, 2, 3, 12, 23, 31 s.fl.p. 10-3 Hz
Phase difference φUx - φU4 -180…0…180° norm 1) 0.045° 1

2)
scal 0.045 °
x…1, 2, 3, 12, 23, 31 3)
s.fl.p. 0.045 °
1) normalized value
2) scaled value

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
7.9.1.1.2 Error Handling for Spontaneous Information Objects
Data Point Condition Value QDS

Current I1, I2, I3 Ix > X_100% [Ix] + OR [Ix] Y_100%[Ix] + OR [Ix] OV
Zero current I0 One value (I1, I2, I3) in "Overflow current IV
Phase voltage U1, Phase voltage wired Y_100%[Ux] + OR OV
U2, U3 Ux > X_100% [Ux] + OR [Ux] [Ux]
Phase-to-phase voltage wired but phase volt- 0 IV
age shall not be calculated
Failure of voltage transformer U1, U2, U3 current IV
Voltage U4 U4 > X_100% [U4] + OR [U4] Y_100%[U4] + OR OV
[U4]
Failure of voltage transformer U4 current IV
Phase-to-phase Phase-to-phase voltage wired Y_100%[Ux] + OR OV
voltage Ux > X_100% [Ux] + OR [Ux] [Ux]
U12, U23, U31
Phase voltage wired and current IV
one value (U1, U2, U3) in overrange
Phase voltage wired and calculated (Y_100%[Ux] + OV
phase-to-phase voltage (U12, U23, U31) Ux > OR [Ux]) • √3
(X_100% [U1/U2/U3] + OR [Ux]) • √3
Zero voltage U0 One value (U1, U2, U3) in overrange current IV
Active power P1, P2, Phase voltage wired and related value (I1,U1, current IV
P3 I2,U2, I3,U3) in overrange
Phase-to-phase voltage wired and related current IV
value (I1,U12, I2,U23, I3,U31) in overrange
Reactive power Q1, Related value (I1,U1, I2,U2, I3,U3) current IV
Q2, Q3 in "Overflow"
Frequency mean f > (nominal frequency +5 Hz) nominal freq. +5 Hz OV
value
f < (nominal frequency –5 Hz) nominal freq. -5 Hz OV
Ux < 10% nominal voltage or Ix < 13% nominal
current
Parameter Behavior_at_U<_I<_ is
"with substitute value, IV-Bit" nominal frequency IV
"substitute value=0" 0 -
Frequency instanta- f > (nominal frequency +5 Hz) nominal freq. +5 Hz OV
neous value
f < (nominal frequency –5 Hz) nominal freq. -5 Hz OV
Ux < 10% nominal voltage
Frequency is determined based on a current

channel
OR Standard- or parameter-settable overrange

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017

Power factor 1, 2, 3 Related value (I1,U1, I2,U2, I3,U3) power factor when IV
in overrange condition is met first
time
Ux < 0.8% nominal voltage or
Ix < 0.8% nominal current
(hysteresis between 0.5 and 0.8%)
"with substitute value, IV-Bit" power factor (when IV
condition is met first
time)
Voltage difference Phase voltage wired and related value (Ux) in current IV
overrange
Phase voltage wired and related value (Uxx) current IV
with IV-Bit
value (Uxx) in overrange
Frequency difference fdiff > +5 Hz +5 Hz OV
fdiff < -5 Hz -5 Hz OV
Ux or U4 shorter 4.5% nominal voltage +5 Hz IV
Phase difference Ux or U4 shorter 4,5% nominal voltage
Parameter Behavior_at_U< is
"with substitute value, IV-Bit" 180° IV
"substitute value=0" 0

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
7.9.1.2 Synchroch. Ux zero active, Synchroch. U4 zero active

TI…Type Identification TI 30 single-point information with CP56Time2a time stamp
SPI…single point information 0…line not de-energized or
connecting de-energized line is disabled
1…line de-energized and
connecting de-energized line is enabled
BL…blocked peripheral element marked for revision
failure
IV…invalid valid
a remote command
a local command
1-16 interrogation
tion
T…test no test

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
7.9.1.3 Synchroch. param.bank x active

SPI…single point information 0…parameter bank deactivated
1…parameter bank activated
failure
IV…invalid valid
a remote command
a local command
1-16 interrogation
tion
T…test no test

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
7.9.2.1 Revision

CASDU, IOA…Message address can be set using parameters
1…revision
a remote command
a local command
interrogation
1-16 interrogation
tion

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
7.9.2.2 VT U1 U2 U3 nok, VT U4 nok

SPI…single point information 0…ok
1…voltage transformer failure
NT…not topical SPI is assumed to be 1
IV…invalid SPI is assumed to be 1
a remote command
a local command
rogation
1-16 interrogation
tion

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
7.9.2.3 Synchroch. disable Ux zero, Synchroch. disable U4 zero

SPI…single point information 0…Connecting a de-energized line is enabled
1…Connecting a de-energized line is disabled
a remote command
a local command
rogation
1-16 interrogation
tion

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
7.9.2.4 Synchroch. param.bank x select

TI…Type Identification TI 45 Single command
SCS…single command state 0…not permitted
1…switch to the appropriate parameter bank
QU…code of qualifier of com- SCS is taken over only if QU <3
mand
08…deactivation not permitted
tion

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
column A.


(OPM II)
Current I1 analog *) 40 ms
Phase voltage U1 analog *) phase voltage acquired or calculated 40 ms
Phase-to-phase analog *) phase-to-phase voltage acquired or calculated 40 ms
voltage U12
Voltage U4 analog *) 40 ms
Active power P1 analog *) depending on the wattmeter method: 40 ms
power U1•I1 or sum power
Reactive power Q1 analog *) depending on the wattmeter method: 40 ms
power U1•I1 or sum power
Power factor 1 analog *) depending on the wattmeter method: 40 ms
power factor P1/Q1 or total power factor
Frequency differ- analog *) 40 ms
ence
Phase difference analog *) 40 ms
Frequency instan- analog *) 50 / 60 Hz 20 ms
taneous value
16.7 Hz 70 ms
Synchrocheck ok binary connection criteria fulfilled (including set-up time) 40 ms
Current I1 faulty binary is never set -
Phase voltage U1 binary See "Error Handling for Periodical Information" 40 ms
faulty
Voltage U4 faulty binary See "Error Handling for Periodical Information" 40 ms
Phase-to-phase binary See "Error Handling for Periodical Information" 40 ms
voltage U12 faulty
Active power P1 binary See "Error Handling for Periodical Information" 40 ms
faulty
Reactive power Q1 binary See "Error Handling for Periodical Information" 40 ms
faulty
Frequency instan- binary See "Error Handling for Periodical Information" 40 ms
taneous value
faulty
Power factor 1 binary See "Error Handling for Periodical Information" 40 ms
faulty
Frequency differ- binary See "Error Handling for Periodical Information" 40 ms
ence faulty
Phase difference binary See "Error Handling for Periodical Information" 40 ms
faulty
*) see "Resolution, Significant " column "Value Range" for short floating point number.
Details for the value with an error, see "Error Handling for Periodical Information" column "Condi-
tion"

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
7.9.3.1 Error Handling for Periodical Information
Meaning of column:
X...related periodical data point "data point faulty" is set (…yes; -…no)
Data Point Condition Value X

Current I1 Ix > X_100% [Ix] + OR [Ix] Y_100% + OR -
maximum
2 • Y_100%
Phase voltage U1 Wiring with phase voltage Y_100% + OR maxi- -
Ux > X_100% [Ux] + OR [Ux] mal
1.5 • Y_100%
Phase-to-phase voltage wired but phase 0 
voltage shall not be calculated
Failure of voltage transformer U1, U2, U3 current 
Voltage U4 failure of voltage transformer U4 current 
Phase-to-phase Beschaltung mit verketteter Spannung Y_100% + OR maxi- -
voltage U12 Ux > X_100% [Ux] + OR [Ux] mal
1.5 • Y_100%
Phase voltage wired and current 
Active power P1 Related value (I1,U1, I2,U2, I3, U3) current 
in overrange
Reactive power Q1 Related value (I1,U1, I2,U2, I3, U3) current 
in overrange
Frequency instan- f > (nominal frequency +5 Hz) nominal freq. +5 Hz -
taneous value
f < (nominal frequency -5 Hz) nominal freq. -5 Hz -
Ux < 10% nominal voltage or Ix < 13% nomi-
nal current
"with substitute value, IV-Bit" nominal frequency 
Frequency is determined based on a current
channel

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06

Power factor 1 Related value (I1,U1, I2,U2, I3, U3) power factor when 
time
"with substitute value, IV-Bit" power factor when 
time
"substitute value=0" 0

Frequency differ- fdiff > + 5Hz +5 Hz 
ence
fdiff < - 5Hz -5 Hz 
Ux or U4 shorter 4,5% nominal voltage +5 Hz 
Failure of voltage transformer U4 current 
Phase difference Ux or U4 shorter 4,5% nominal voltage 180° 

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
8 Measurement in Three-Phase Systems –
Extended Frequency Range
Content
8.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................198

8.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................199
8.4 Transformer Voltage .........................................................................................204
8.5 Frequency .........................................................................................................214
8.7 Synchrocheck ...................................................................................................227
8.9 Data Interface ...................................................................................................250

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Measurement in Three-Phase Systems – Extended Frequency Range
8.1 Introduction
Features
• Current and voltage inputs
• Phase voltages or phase-to-phase voltages can be wired to the voltage inputs
•
th
Acquisition of currents and voltages up to the 25 harmonic, with signal scanning
256 times per period
• Calculation of r.m.s. values over 25 harmonics by a digital signal processor by means of
Discret Fourier Transformation
• Acquisition of frequency and provision as:
─ Frequency instantaneous value
─ Frequency mean value
─ Nominal current 6 A with 100% overrange and a resolution of 15 bits
─ Nominal voltage 230 V with 50% overrange and a resolution of 15 bits
─ Nominal frequency 16.7 Hz, 50 Hz, or 60 Hz, ±15%
• Technological adaptation of currents and voltages
• Calculation of phase-to-phase voltages dependent on wiring
• Calculation of the positive, negative and zero phase system (symmetrical components for
current and voltage)
• Calculation of active and reactive power value(s) according to the 1-, 2- or 3-wattmeter
method
• Calculation of active and reactive energy in four quadrants
• Calculation of voltage-, frequency- and phase difference for the synchrocheck function
each value
• Transfer of predefined values to the higher-level open-/closed-loop control function, using
periodical information objects
• Messages of voltage transformer MCB's are considered
• Synchrocheck function with dynamic parameter switch-over, for up to 4 operating states
• Connection of a de-energized line to a system
• Optional direct output of the synchronization status over relay contacts

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
8.2 Block Diagram
Analog inputs Analog inputs

for transformer voltages for transformer currents
U1 … U4 I1 … I3
Acquisition with Fourier Analysis,

Frequency acquisition,
r.m.s. value calculation,
Adaption, Revision
Calculation of phase-to-phase voltages,
Calculation of the zero system,
Monitoring of the voltage transformer
Current, voltage & frequency
Synchro Calculation of
ϕdiff, fdiff, Udiff
check Active and reactive
power,
Power factor,
Voltage difference,
Phase difference,
Current I1, Phase voltage U1, Voltage U4, Phase-to-phase voltage U12
Smoothing,
Format conversion,
Zero-range suppression,
Change monitoring
Frequency instantaneous and mean value
Phase-to-phase voltage U12, U23, U31
Phase difference, frequency difference
Phase voltage U1, U2, U3; Voltage U4

Active power P1, Reactive power Q1
Frequency instantaneous value
Reactive power Q1, Q2, Q3
Active power P1, P2, P3
Voltage difference
Phase difference
Current I1, I2, I3
Zero voltage U0
Zero current I0
Power factor 1
Revision
Data interface

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Acquisition of AC currents through analog inputs for transformer voltage measurement, and
The nominal current can be set in the range of 0.5…6 A with 100% overrange with a
resolution of 15 bits. Is a nominal current smaller than 6 A selected, the resolution is directly
proportional smaller than 15 bits.
• Acquisition
• Revision
• Smoothing
• Calculation of the zero current

• Calculation of the positive phase sequence current
• Calculation of the negative phase sequence current
− Current I1 firmware / T_AI_I
− Current I1 faulty firmware / SW_DI
− Zero current I0 firmware / SW_UI
− Current PPS firmware / SW_UI
− Current NPS firmware / SW_UI
• the usage of the periodical information for CAEx plus is enabled.


Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
8.3.1 Acquisition
scanning 256 times per period.
The acquisition of AC currents and the calculation of r.m.s. values is carried out by a digital
signal processor by means of Discret Fourier Transformation.
The real components an and imaginary components bn determined with the help of the Fourier
Transformation of each current input for all 25 harmonics are subjected to an amplitude- and
phase correction.

At works, the correction factors for all 25 harmonics are determined for each unit with the help
of highly precise sensors at each current input and stored in an non volotile memory
(NVRAM). The determined real components an and imaginary components bn are corrected
by these factors.
With an error of the NVRAM, the correction factors are assumed with 1, thereby a maximum


2 2
7 2
r
I eff = ∑ n Kor
n=0 2

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Note
Current Ix
Y100+100%
Y100
Y0
X0 X100 X100+100%
8.3.3 Calculation of the Zero Current
The zero current I0 is calculated from the vectorial sum of the currents I1, I2 and I3.
3
I 0 = ∑ In
n =1
For the transfer of the zero current I0 as spontaneous information object, independent of the
acquired currents I1, I2 and I3, further processing functions are performed. The parameters
for the processing functions are established with the category firmware / SW_UI.
• Revision
• Smoothing

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
8.3.4 Calculation of the Positive and Negative Phase Sequence Current
The positive phase sequence current IPPS and the negative phase sequence current INPS are
calculated from a weighted vectorial sum of the currents I1, I2 and I3. The following calcula-
tion does apply for a positive phase sequence.
1
I PPS = ( I 1 + a * I 2 + a * I 3 )
2
1
I NPS = ( I 1 + a * I 2 + a * I 3 )
2
At a negative phase sequence a and a2t have to be exchanged. The weighting factor a is
2π
j 1 3
a=e 3
=− + j
2 2
For the transfer of the positive phase sequence current IPPS and the negative phase sequence
current INPS as spontaneous information objects, independent of the acquired currents I1, I2
and I3, further processing functions are performed. The parameters for the processing
functions are established with the category firmware / SW_UI.
• Revision
• Smoothing

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Acquisition of AC voltages over analog inputs for transformer voltage measurement, and
The nominal voltage can be set in the range of 10…230 V with 50% overrange with a resolu-
tion of 15 bits. Is the nominal voltage smaller than 230 V selected, the resolution is directly
proportional smaller than 15 bits.
phase voltages.
The category firmware / T_AI_U4_SYN contains all parameters for the acquisition functions
(transformer specifications) and the processing functions of the voltage U4.
Note
The category T_AI_U is always required for the assignment to the HW-PIN and for the parameter setting
of the transformer specifications, even if the inputs are not assigned with phase voltages.
• Acquisition
Processing functions for phase- and phase-to-phase voltages:
• Revision
• Smoothing

• Calculation of the phase voltages
• Calculation of the zero voltage
• Calculation of the positive phase sequence voltage
• Calculation of the negative phase sequence voltage
• Calculation of the voltage difference
• Calculation of the phase difference
• Monitoring of the voltage transformer MCB's

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
− Phase voltage U1 or firmware / T_AI_U
− Phase-to-phase voltage U12 firmware / SW_UI
− Phase voltage U1 faulty firmware / SW_DI
− phase-to-phase voltage U12 firmware / SW_DI
faulty
− voltage U4 faulty firmware / SW_DI
− Phase difference faulty firmware / SW_DI

objects − Phase voltage U1, U2, U3 or firmware / T_AI_U
U23, U31
− Voltage difference firmware / SW_DELTA
− VT U4 nok firmware / SW_T_VT_NOK


DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
8.4.1 Assignment of the Voltage Transformer Inputs
phase voltages.
The assignment is determined for the voltage inputs U1, U2 and U3 by the parameter volt-
age type in the category firmware / T_AI_U and for the voltage input U4 by the parameter
synchrocheck in the category firmware / T_AI_U4_SYN.
The following table shows, which values can be derived and/or which functions can be
performed depending on the assignment of the voltage inputs.
Y U1-3 / Y U4 Y U1-3 / U4 U1-3 / Y U4 U1-3 / U4

Calculation of phase-to-phase   - -
voltages U12, U23, U31
Calculation of the zero voltage U0   - -
Calculation of the positive phase   - -
sequence voltage
Calculation of the negative phase   - -
sequence voltage
Calculation of the frequency   - 
difference
Calculation of the voltage   *) - 
difference
Calculation of the phase   - 
difference
Synchrocheck   - 
Synchrocheck 1-pole ground fault -  - -
1-wattmeter method
Calculation of power using  *)  *)  
2-wattmeter method
3-wattmeter method
*) the calculation of phase-to-phase voltages must be enabled
Meaning of the columns:

YU1-3 / YU4 phase voltages assigned to U1, U2, U3 and U4
YU1-3 / U4 phase voltages assigned to U1, U2, U3 and phase-to-phase voltage assigned to U4
U1-3 / YU phase-to-phase voltages assigned to U1, U2, U3 and phase voltage assigned to U4
U1-3 / U4 phase-to-phase voltages assigned to U1, U2, U3 and U4

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
8.4.2 Acquisition
The acquisition of AC voltages and the calculation of r.m.s. values is carried out by a digital
signal processor by means of Discret Fourier Transformation.
For this, voltages are acquired through direct transformers up to the 25th harmonic, with signal
To the voltage inputs U1, U2 and U3 phase voltages or phase-to-phase voltages can be
wired.
Attention
Mixed wiring is not allowed.
To voltage input U4 a phase voltage or a phase-to-phase voltage can be wired.
Transformation of each voltage input for all 25 harmonics are subjected to an amplitude- and
phase correction.

At works, the correction factors for all 25 harmonics are determined for each unit with the help
of highly precise sensors at each voltage input and stored in an non volotile memory
(NVRAM). The determined real components an and imaginary components bn are corrected
by these factors.
With an error of the NVRAM, the correction factors are assumed with 1, thereby a maximum


2 2
and from this for each voltage input according to the input assignment (phase-to-phase or
phase voltage) the effective values U1, U2 and U3 or U12, U23 und U31.
7 2
r
U eff = ∑ n Kor
n =0 2

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Note
Voltage Ux
Y100+50%
Y100
Y0
X100 X100+50%
8.4.4 Calculation of the phase-to-phase voltage
voltages.
• Revision
• Smoothing

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
3
Un
U0 = ∑
n =1 3
Note
The calculation of the zero voltage is only possible, if the voltage inputs U1, U2 and U3 are assigned with
phase voltages.
• Revision
• Smoothing
8.4.6 Calculation of the Positive and Negative Phase Sequence Voltage
The positive phase sequence voltage UPPS and the negative phase sequence voltage UNPS
are calculated from a weighted vectorial sum of the voltages U1, U2 and U3. The following
calculation does apply for a positive phase sequence.
1 1
U PPS = (U 1 + a * U 2 + a * U 3 )
2
U NPS = (U 1 + a * U 2 + a * U 3 )
2
3 3
At a negative phase sequence a and a2t have to be exchanged. The weighting factor a is
2π
j 1 3
a=e 3
=− + j
2 2
For the transfer of the positive phase sequence voltage UPPS and the negative phase se-
quence voltage UNPS as spontaneous information objects, independent of the acquired
voltages U1, U2 and U3, further processing functions are performed. The parameters for the
processing functions are established with the category firmware / SW_UI.
• Revision
• Smoothing

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
8.4.7 Calculation of the Voltage Difference
The voltage difference is primarily required for the function Synchrocheck and calculated
between the voltage U4 and a selectable reference voltage (phase voltage U1, U2, U3 or
phase-to-phase voltage U12, U23, U31).
Udiff = Ux - U4 x…0, 1, 2, 12, 23, 31
Note
The calculation of the voltage difference is only possible, if the voltage inputs U1, U2 and U3 are assigned

The voltage difference is calculated from the primary quantities related to the parameter
VR_plant, whereby the assignment of the voltage inputs (phase-to-phase or phase voltage)
is also considered.
Example: The input for the reference voltage is assigned with the phase voltage, and the
input for U4 is assigned with the phase-to-phase voltage. The voltage difference
is calculated with the help of the calculated phase-to-phase voltage of the
reference voltage.
In addition, the voltage difference can also be transferred as spontaneous information object.
For the transfer of the voltage difference as spontaneous information object, independent of
• Revision
• Smoothing
Note
The parameter Behavior_at_U< is ineffectively

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
8.4.8 Calculation of the Phase Difference
The phase difference is primarily required for the function Synchrocheck and calculated from
the fundamental component between the voltage U4 and a selectable reference voltage
(phase voltage U1, U2, U3 or phase-to-phase voltage U12, U23, U31), if the function
Synchrocheck is released by parameter synchrocheck.
φdiff = φUx - φU4 x…0, 1, 2, 12, 23, 31
Note
The calculation of the phase difference is only possible, if the voltage inputs U1, U2 and U3 are assigned

The category firmware / T_AI_U4_SYN contains all parameters for the acquisition functions of
the voltage U4.
Acquisition functions of voltage U4:
• Phase correction
In addition, the phase difference can also be transferred as spontaneous information object.
For the transfer of the phase difference as spontaneous information object, independent of the
voltages U1, U2, U3 or U12, U23, U31 and U4, further processing functions are performed.
The parameters for the processing functions are determined with the category firmware /
SW_DELTA.
• Revision
• Smoothing
8.4.8.1 Phase Correction
In real measurement circuits, circuitry-related phase displacements occur, that result from
vector group and hour factor, as well as phase errors of external transformers.
With the parameter synchrochk_phas_cor the possibility exists of changing the phase of the
voltage vector U4 to any optional position in order to compensate different phase positions of
the voltages for the synchrocheck (Ux and U4). The amount of the vector of voltage U4
remains unchanged.
The parameter synchrochk_phas_cor acts on the function synchrocheck and on the phase
difference.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
The determined phase difference is detected as implausible, if:
• Voltage U4 and reference voltage are shorter the adjusted value in the parameter U<_ of
the nominal voltage
If the phase difference is detected as implausible, by :
• Parameter Behavior_at_U< = "with substitude value, IV-Bit"

─ the periodical information "Phase difference" is transferred with the value 180°.
─ the periodical information "Phase difference faulty" is set.
─ the spontaneous information objects "Phase difference" with the value 180° and the
data point quality descriptor IV are transferred.
• Parameter Behavior_at_U< = "substitude value = 0"
─ the periodical information "Phase difference" is transferred with the value 0.
─ the periodical information "Phase difference faulty" is not set.
─ the spontaneous information objects "Phase difference" with the value 0 and without
the data point quality descriptor IV are transferred.
8.4.9 Monitoring of the Voltage Transformer-MCB’s
This function monitors the state of the voltage transformer MCBs. The state is transmitted to
this function by means of the spontaneous information objects "VT U1 U2 U3 nok" and "VT U4
nok".
in the format "single-point information with CP56Time2a time stamp". The assignment of this
message is carried out in the OPM II with the category firmware / SW_T_VT_NOK.
The spontaneous information object "VT U4 nok", with single-point information (SPI) set,
indicates the failure of the voltage transformer U4.
The failure of a voltage transformer has the consequence, that
• the data points concerned are transmitted by spontaneous information objects with data
point quality descriptor IV set. The value of an affected data point is not influenced.
• the fault information of affected data points is set by periodical information. The value of an
affected data point is not influenced.
• the function Synchrocheck is inhibited
• the information "Synchrocheck ok" is reset
• if the synchrocheck function also outputs directly to the relays, these relays are
deactivated
• the information of the synchronoscope is reset.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
If the voltage transformer is again signaled as ok:
• affected data points are transferred by spontaneous information objects with the current
value without data point quality descriptor IV set.
• the fault information of affected data points is reset by periodical information
• the functions of the synchrocheck (relay output, synchronoscope, etc.) are enabled
The following table shows which data points are affected by the failure of a voltage
transformer.
Data Point VT U1 U2 U3 nok VT U4 nok

Current I1, I2, I3 - -
Zero current I0 - -
Current PPS and NPS - -
Phase voltage U1, U2, U3  -
Voltage U4 - 
Zero voltage U0  -
Voltage PPS and NPS  -
Phase-to-phase voltage U12, U23, U31  -
Active power P1, P2, P3  -
Reactive power Q1, Q2, Q3  -
Apparent power S1, S2, S3  -
Active energy A1+, A2+, A3+, A1-, A2-, A3-  -
Reactive energy R1+, R2+, R3+, R1-, R2-, R3-  -
Frequency mean value - -
Frequency instantaneous value - -
Power factor 1, 2, 3  -
Voltage difference  
Frequency difference  
Phase difference  
Synchrocheck ok  
Voltage x too high / low  
Frequency x too high / low  
Phase x too far leading / lagging  

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
8.5 Frequency
The acquisition of the frequency is the basis for the rate of the signal scanning.
It can be set by means of a parameter, preferably from which transformer input (current- or
voltage channel) the frequency should be acquired.
The nominal frequency is 16.7, 50 and 60 Hz with a measuring range of ±5 Hz and can be set
with the parameter line frequency.
The determined frequency is subjected to a plausibility check. For this, the parameterized
nominal frequency is utilized. If an implausible frequency is acquired, a failure strategy (e.g.
stepping to another channel) can be selected.
The parameters for the processing functions of the frequency difference are determined with
the category firmware / SW_DELTA.
The following values are prepared for further processing rules:
• Frequency mean value …e.g. display

• Frequency instantaneous value …e.g. frequency protection
• Frequency difference …Synchrocheck
Processing functions for frequency instantaneous value and frequency mean value:
• Revision
• Acquisition
• Smoothing
− Frequency instantaneous value firmware / SW_F
− Frequency instant. value faulty firmware / SW_DI
− Frequency difference faulty firmware / SW_DI
objects − Frequency instantaneous value firmware / SW_F
− Frequency mean value firmware / SW_F

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06

8.5.1 Frequency Instantaneous Value
The frequency instantaneous value is calculated after each full system period and is then
available as periodical information after 50 ms at the latest.
The measuring range is the parameterized nominal frequency ±5 Hz with a resolution of

1 mHz and an accuracy of 5 mHz.
Note
The frequency instantaneous value is only valid, if the frequency of one voltage channel is determined
(preferred channel and failure strategy are to be observed).
The effective response time is however dependent on the cycle time of the open-/closed-loop
control function.
Acquisition of frequency
Calculation of frequency
Transmission of per. information
Open-/Closed-loop control function

System clock 10ms 10ms 10ms 10ms 10ms 10ms 10ms 10ms 10ms 10ms
Legend: new frequency available
frequency value unchanged
The frequency instantaneous value is subjected to the previously described plausibility check.
In addition to this plausibility check, a gradient monitoring takes place.
Gradient monitoring
If the current frequency deviates from the last transmitted value (original value) by more than
600 mHz/20 ms, the original value is transmitted one time instead of the current value. If the
gradient continues to be exceeded, the current frequency is transferred.
Application for frequency protection

If the frequency instantaneous value is required for a frequency protection, as failure strategy
"Determine frequency exclusively from the default channel" should be selected. If another
failure strategy is selected, frequency jumps can occur during the stepping to another channel.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
8.5.2 Frequency Mean Value
The frequency mean value is determined by means of a continuous mean value generation
over 16 system periods respectively.
The measuring range is the parameterized nominal frequency ±5 Hz with a resolution and an
accuracy of 1 mHz.
8.5.3 Acquisition
The acquisition of the frequency takes place with the help of a so-called zero-crossing
detector.
From which current- or voltage transformer input (preferred channel) the frequency is to be
acquired, can be set with the parameter Frequ_channel.
Attention
Attention
If the acquired frequency lies outside the ±15% range, then amplitude errors occur with the calculation of
the effective values for currents and voltages of at least ±8%.
8.5.4 Plausibility Check for Frequency Instantaneous Value and Fre-

quency Mean Value
The determined frequency is detected as implausible, if:
• calculated frequency < nominal frequency -15%

• calculated frequency > nominal frequency +15%
• effective value < the adjusted value in the parameter U< of the nominal voltage (parameter
X_100%)
• effective value < 13% of nominal current (6 A)
If the frequency is detected as implausible, three failure strategies can be selected with the
parameters Frequ_channel_swi and Frequ_channel_swi_s:
• Calculate frequency exclusively from the default channel

• Calculate frequency from another current or voltage channel
• Calculate frequency from some other channel (all)

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
• Calculated frequency < nominal frequency –15%

─ for the Fourier Transformation, scanned with the parameterized nominal frequency
value" are transferred with nominal frequency –15%
mean value" are transferred with nominal frequency –15% and the data point quality
descriptor OV
• Calculated frequency > nominal frequency +15%
value" are transferred with nominal frequency 15%
mean value" are transferred with nominal frequency 15% and the data point quality
descriptor OV
• Effective value < the adjusted value in the parameter U<_ of the nominal voltage or < 13%
of the nominal current
─ the periodical information "Frequency instantaneous value", "Frequency mean value"
and "Frequency faulty" are transferred depending on the parameter Behav-
ior_at_U<_I<_
with nominal frequency and the periodical information "Frequency faulty" is set.
with the value = 0 and the periodical information "Frequency faulty" is reset
mean value" are transferred depending on the parameter Behavior_at_U<_I<_
with nominal frequency and set data point quality descriptor IV
with the value = 0 and reset data point quality descriptor IV

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
8.5.4.2 Failure Strategy
Determine frequency exclusively from the default channel

If the frequency is detected as implausible, the corresponding substitute value is transferred.
Determine frequency from another current or voltage channel

If the frequency is detected as implausible, stepping to the next current channel (if preferred
channel is a current channel) or voltage channel (if preferred channel is a voltage channel)
takes place after 16 system periods respectively, until a channel is found with a plausible
frequency. The frequency is then so long derived from this channel, until a plausible voltage or
a plausible current is again present on the parameterized preferred channel.
During this search, for the frequency mean value the last plausible value is transferred and for
the frequency instantaneous value, the substitute value is transferred.
If no current or voltage channel (dependent on the preferred channel) is found with a plausible
frequency, the corresponding substitute value of the current channel is transferred.
Determine frequency from some other channel (all)

If the frequency is detected as implausible, stepping to the next channel takes place, as
described in the section above, "Determine frequency from another current or voltage
channel". The search is thereby carried out over all channels (current and voltage channels).
8.5.5 Calculation of the Frequency Difference
The frequency difference is determined every 40 milliseconds from the angle between the two
vectors of voltage U4 and a selectable reference voltage (phase voltage U1, U2, U3 or phase-
to-phase voltage U12, U23, U31), if the function Synchrocheck is released by parameter
synchrocheck.
fdiff = fUx - fU4 x…0, 1, 2, 12, 23, 31

The measuring range is ±15% with a resolution and an accuracy of 1 mHz.
The frequency difference is primary required for the function Synchrocheck. In addition, the
frequency difference can also be transferred as spontaneous information object.
For the transfer of the frequency difference as spontaneous information object, independent of
• Revision
• Smoothing

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
The determined frequency difference is detected as implausible, if:
• Calculated frequency < -15% nominal frequency

• Calculated frequency > 15% nominal frequency
• Effective value Ux or U4 shorter 4,5% of the nominal voltage
If the frequency is detected as implausible, at
• Frequency difference < -15% nominal frequency

─ the periodical information "Frequency difference" is transferred with -15%
─ the spontaneous information objects "Frequency difference" with -15% and the data
• Frequency difference > 15% nominal frequency
─ the periodical information "Frequency difference" is transferred with 15%
─ the spontaneous information objects "Frequency difference" with 15% and the data
• Effective value Ux or U4 < 4.5% of the nominal voltage
─ Parameter Behavior_at_U< = "with substitude value, IV-Bit"
− the periodical information "Phase difference" is transferred with the value 180°
− the periodical information "Phase difference faulty" is set
− the spontaneous information objects "Phase difference" with the value 180° and the
data point quality descriptor IV are transferred
─ Parameter Behavior_at_U< = "substitude value = 0"
− the periodical information "Phase difference" is transferred with the value 0
− the periodical information "Phase difference faulty" is not set
− the spontaneous information objects "Phase difference" with the value 0 and
without the data point quality descriptor IV are transferred

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
The power can be determined according to three methods:
The method required can be selected using the parameter power calculation.
• Revision
• Smoothing
• Calculation of the apparent power

• Calculation of the active and reactive energy
− Active power P1 firmware / SW_PQ
− Reactive power Q1 firmware / SW_PQ
− Power factor 1 firmware / SW_COSPH
− Active power P1 faulty firmware / SW_DI
− Reactive power Q1 faulty firmware / SW_DI
− Power factor 1 faulty firmware / SW_DI
objects − Active power P1, P2, and P3 firmware / SW_PQ
− Reactive power Q1, Q2, and Q3 firmware / SW_PQ
− Apparent power S1, S2 and S3 firmware / SW_PQ
− Power factor 1, 2, and 3 firmware / SW_COSPHI
− Active energy A1+, A2+, A3+ firmware / SW_PQ
− Active energy A1-, A2-, A3- firmware / SW _PQ
− Reactive energy R1+, R2+, R3+ firmware / SW_PQ
− Reactive energy R1-, R2-, R3- firmware / SW_PQ

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
With the 2 and 3 wattmeter methods, active power, reactive power, apparent power and the
power factor are transferred in the data points P1, Q1, S1 and power factor1. Also the active
energy and the reactive energy, splitted in consumption (+) and delivery (-), are transferred in
the data points active energy 1 +/- and reactive energy 1 +/-.

Active power
Pi =
1 7
2 n =0
(
⋅ ∑ anUKori ⋅ anIKori + bnUKori ⋅ bnIKori ) i…………1, 2, 3
anUKor.… corrected real component of the voltage
U1, U2 oder U3
Reactive power I1, I2 oder I3
bnUKor.… corrected imaginary component of the
Qi =
1 7
2 n =0
(
⋅ ∑ anUKori ⋅ bnIKori − anIKori ⋅ bnIKori ) voltage U1, U2 oder U3
bnIKor..… corrected imaginary component of the
8.6.2 Apparent Power
The apparent power is calculated from the active power and reactive power.
1-wattmeter method:
S i = Pi 2 + Qi2 i…………1, 2, 3
i…………1
For the transfer of the apparent power S1, S2 and S3 as spontaneous information objects,
2- and 3-wattmeter methods, the apparent power is transmitted in the data point Apparent
Power S1. The parameters for the processing functions are determined with the category
firmware / SW_PQ.
• Revision
• Smoothing

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
8.6.3 Power Factor
For the calculation of the power factor, all 8 harmonics are utilized.
Pi 1-wattmeter method:
cos ϕ i = i…………1, 2, 3
Pi + Qi
2 2
i…………1
For the transfer of the power factors 1, 2 and 3 as spontaneous information objects,
2- and 3-wattmeter methods, the power factor is transmitted in the data point Power Factor 1.
• Revision
• Smoothing
8.6.3.1 Plausibility check for the Power Factor
The power factor is detected as implausible, if:
• Related value (I1/U1, I2/U2, I3/U3) in overrange

• Ux < 0.8% nominal voltage or Ix < 0.8% nominal current

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
• Related value (I1, U1, I2, U2, I3, U3) in overrange or

Ux < 0,8% nominal voltage or Ix < 0,8% nominal current
─ The belonging periodical information items "Power factor 1", "Power factor 2", "Power
factor 3" and "Power factor 1 faulty" are transferred depending on Parameter Behav-
ior_at_U<_I<_.
with that value of the power factor, when the condition is fulfilled the first time and if
power factor 1 is affected, the periodical information "Power factor 1 faulty" is set.
with value = 0 and if the power factor 1 is affetetd, the periodical information "Power
factor 1 faulty" is not influenced.
─ The belonging spontaneous information objects "Power factor 1", "Power factor 2",
"Power factor 3" are transferred depending on parameter Behavior_at_U<_I<_.
with that value of the power factor, when the condition is fulfilled the first time and
with set data point quality descriptor IV
with value = 0 and not set data point quality descriptor IV
─ The associated periodical information items "Power factor 1", "Power factor 2", "Power
factor 3" and "Power factor 1 faulty" are transferred with the actual values and if "Pow-
er factor 1" is affected, the periodical information "Power factor 1 faulty" is set.
1-Wattmeter method
Pi Ii
Li
Ui
Qi = Ui • Ii • sin ϕi i...1, 2, 3

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
2-Wattmeter method (two-wattmeter circuit)

The 2-wattmeter method is used for the measurement of the total power in three-phase
systems without neutral point. For this it is necessary to wire the voltage inputs with the
phase-to-phase voltages. The 2-wattmeter method provides the correct total power even with
unbalanced load.
Note
For wiring with phase-to-phase voltages, the voltages U12 and U23 are absolutely necessary.
P12 I1
L1
U12
I2
L2
U23
P23 I3
L3
P = (U12 • I1 • cos ϕ1 - U23 • I3 • cos ϕ3)

Q = (U12 • I1 • sin ϕ1 - U23 • I3 • sin ϕ3)
For special cases, there is also the possibility of assigning the voltage inputs with phase
voltages. In this case, the calculated phase-to-phase voltages are utilized for the power
calculation.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
3-Wattmeter method
P1 I1
L1
P2 I2
L2
U1
P3 I3
L3
U2
U3


DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
8.6.5 Calculation of the Active and Reactive Energy
The calculation of the active energy and reactive energy is based on the active power and re-
active power. The summation of the power over the time equates energy.The energy values
are built on the principle of the four-quadrant-counting, that is that the active and reactive en-
ergy is splittet additionally into the energy directions positive and negative.
Positive
Reactive Energy
R
Quadrant II Quadrant I
Negative A Positive
Active energy Active energy
Quadrant III Quadrant IV
Negative
Reactive Energy
The active energy A and the reactive energy R is built from 1 second-values (Δt) of the re-
spective power values.
Ai + = ∑ ( Pi +)∆t Ai − = ∑ ( Pi −)∆t
1 wattmeter method:
….
i…1, 2, 3
2 und 3 wattmeter method:
Ri + = ∑ (Qi +)∆t Ri − = ∑ (Qi −)∆t i…1
….
The energy values are non-volatile at reset but volatile in case of a voltage failure. After a
voltage failure the energy counting starts at 0. The active energy is countered per unit kWh
and the reactive energy per unit kvarh.
• Revision
• Smoothing
Note
The energy counting works analog to the selected wattmeter methode. See chapter "Active and Reactive
Power".

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
8.7 Synchrocheck
The function Synchrocheck checks, whether two systems are synchronous, and generates a
signal as a result. This signal can be used for the interconnection of two systems, if the
systems are synchronized using other measures.
By means of the parameter synchrocheck the function Synchrocheck is enabled and infor-
mation items which are derived therefrom become valid.
Note
This function is not directly appropriate for the synchronization of systems but can support it.
utilized. Thereby, connection criteria such as voltages and their difference, the frequencies
and their difference, the phase difference, the change in the voltage difference and the
frequency difference are checked against settable limits.
signal Synchrocheck ok is generated. For the compensation of the running time until the
actuator is actuated, a so-called Signal set-up time can be set.
The function "Relay output" enables a direct output of the signal Synchrocheck ok linked
with an information created from the open-/closed-loop control function on the system control el-
ement.
A synchronoscope generates information items which describe the location of the selectable
reference voltage Ux to voltage U4.
For a maximum of four different operating states, with the help of the function Parameter
switch-over there is the possibility of setting the limits dynamically. The parameter records with
the various limits are stored in so-called parameter banks.
The function also supports the connecting of a de-energized line to a system.
The states of the voltage transformer MCB’s are absolutely necessary (refer to chapter
"Monitoring of the Voltage Transformer MCB’s").
The category firmware / T_AI_U4_SYN contains all parameters for the processing functions.
• Revision
• Determination of synchrony
• Creation of the Signal Synchrocheck ok
• Relay output
• Synchronoscope
• Parameter switch-over
• Connecting a de-energized line to a system
• Connecting in case of 1-pole ground fault

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Periodical • Derived information
information − Synchrocheck ok firmware / T_AI_U4_SYN
− Voltage x too high firmware / SW_DI
− Voltage x too low firmware / SW_DI
− Frequency x too high firmware / SW_DI
− Frequency x too low firmware / SW_DI
− Phase x too far leading firmware / SW_DI
− Phase x too far lagging firmware / SW_DI
− output relay OUT Dx0 firmware / DO_EM
Spontaneous • Derived information
information − Synchroch. Ux zero active firmware / SW_SYN_U_NULL_ACTIVE
objects − Synchroch. U4 zero active firmware / SW_SYN_U_NULL_ACTIVE
− Synchroch. param.bank x active firmware / SW_T_SYN_B_CON
(x = 0…3)
− Synchroch. disable Ux zero firmware / SW_SYN_U_NULL_DISABLE
− Synchroch. disable U4 zero firmware / SW_SYN_U_NULL_DISABLE
− Synchroch. param.bank x select. firmware / SW_T_SYN_B_SET
(x = 0…3)


Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
8.7.1 Block Diagram
Binary outputs
OUT D00 … OUT Dx0
RL RL
Parameter
bank 0 - 3 Parameter
selection
Relay output
Voltage difference
Phase difference Synchrocheck
Synchronoscope
Synchroch. param.bank x select.

Phase x too far leading / lagging
Synchroch. param.bank x active

Synchroch. disable U4 zero
Frequency x too high / low
Synchroch. U4 zero active

Voltage x too high / low
Output relay OUT Dx0
Synchrocheck ok
Revision
Data interface
8.7.2 Revision
In addition to the functions described in section "Common Functions - Revision",
• the periodical information "Synchrocheck ok" is reset and no longer activated for the
duration of the revision
• a possibly existing relay output – which is actuated through the function Synchrocheck – is
deactivated
• the set information of the synchronoscope are reset.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
8.7.3 Determination of Synchrony
utilized.
8.7.3.1 Necessary Signals
Usage is Status of SPI and

mandatory message
voltage Ux  -
voltage U4 
Revision - Refer to chapter Revision
SPI = 0 Connection possible
VT U1 U2 U3 nok  Refer to chapter VT U1 U2

VT U4 nok  U3 nok, VT U4 nok
SPI … 0 Connection possible

NT and IV-Bit … 0
NT oder IV-Bit … 1 Connection not possible
Synchroch. disable Ux zero  Refer to chapter

Synchroch. disable U4 zero  Synchroch. disable Ux
zero, Synchroch. disable
U4 zero
SPI … 0 or 1 Connection possible
NT and IV-Bit … 0
NT, IV … 1 Connection not possible

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
8.7.3.2 Connection Criteria
The connection criteria such as voltages and their difference, the frequencies and their
difference, the phase difference, the change in the voltage difference and the frequency
difference are checked against settable limits.
For a maximum of four different operating states, the limits can be set separately and selected
with the help of the Parameter Bank Selection The parameter records with the limits are
stored in so-called parameter banks and differentiated by a prefix "Si" (I = 0…3)
Udiff ≤ Udiff_max Maximum permitted voltage difference

Udiff Calculated voltage difference
Udiff_max Parameter S#_U_diff_max
Maximum amount of voltage difference in % of the plant nominal voltage
(reference value is the parameter VR_Plant)
φdiff ≤ φdiff_max Maximum permitted phase difference

φdiff Calculated phase difference
φdiff_max Parameter S#_phase_diff_max
fdiff ≤ fdiff_max Maximum permitted frequency difference

fdiff Calculated frequency difference
fdiff_max Parameter S#_f_diff_max
Uxmin ≤ Ux ≤ Uxmax r.m.s. value of the voltage Ux in the permissible range

Ux Acquired or calculated phase voltage U1, U2, U3 or phase-to-phase
voltage U12, U31 U23.
This corresponds with the reference voltage as described in chapter
Calculation of the Voltage Difference
Uxmin Parameter S#_Ux_min
Minimum r.m.s. value of the reference voltage in % of the parameterized
or calculated nominal voltage
Uxmax Parameter S#_Ux_max
Maximum r.m.s. value of the reference voltage in % of the parameterized
or calculated nominal voltage
U4min ≤ U4 ≤ U4max r.m.s. value of the voltage U4 in the permissible range

U4 Acquired or calculated voltage U4
U4min Parameter S#_U4_min
Minimum r.m.s. value of the voltage U4 in % of the nominal voltage
U4max Parameter S#_U4_max
Maximum r.m.s. value of the voltage U4 in % of the nominal voltage
Δfdiff/Δt ≤ fdiff_gradient_max Maximum permissible change of the frequency difference every 40 ms

within an observation period of four measuring periods (160 ms)
Δfdiff/Δt Change of the frequency difference in 40ms
fdiff_gradient_max Parameter S#_f_diff_gradient_max
ΔUx/Δt ≤ Ugradient_max Maximum permissible change of the voltage Ux every 40 ms within an

ΔUx/Δt Change of the r.m.s. value of the voltage Ux in 40ms
maximum change of the r.m.s. value of the voltage Ux in % of the nominal

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
voltage
ΔU4/Δt ≤ Ugradient_max Maximum permissible change of the voltage U4 every 40 ms within an

ΔU4/Δt Change of the effective value of the voltage U4 in 40ms
Maximum change of the r.m.s. value of the voltage U4 in % of the nominal
voltage
8.7.4 Creation of the Signal "Synchrocheck ok"
signal Synchrocheck ok is set immediately with a frequency difference less than the
parameter synchrocheck_df>zero_cross (default 0.02 Hz).
With a frequency difference greater than the parameter synchrocheck_df>zero_cross, the

signal Synchrocheck ok is set in such a way, that the circuit breaker closes at 0 degrees.
For the calculation of the connection moment, the so-called signal set-up time is taken into
account.
8.7.4.1 Signal Set-up Time
The signal set-up time is used to compensate for the running time within the system and can
be set using the parameter S#_signal_setup_t. The calculation of the signal set-up time is
dependent on the location of the activation of the circuit breaker.
• Activation by the relay on the system element with the function Synchrocheck
• Activation by another system element (e.g. peripheral element with command output)
The signal set-up time is produced from the sum of
• with activation by the relay on the system element with the function Synchrocheck
• with activation by another system element
─ transmission on the Ax 1703 peripheral bus (10 ms)
─ delay time of the open-/closed-loop control function (cycle time)
─ delay time on the system element with the command output
8.7.4.2 Output Duration
The output duration is dependent on the set limits. The minimum output duration of the signal
Synchrocheck ok can be determined with the parameter synchrocheck_tmin. The shortest
output duration is 40 ms.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
The parameter acts on:
• the periodical information "Synchrocheck ok"

• a possibly existing LED display
• the possibly existing output relay of the system element
The application has to reacte as fast as possible to the signal Synchrocheck ok (rising
edge). After this the the switching-on of the circuit breaker has to be blocked. The blocking
can be released with the falling edge.
Example for the calculation of phase angle at the end of the output duration
Assumption: Output duration 0.4 s
Maximum permitted frequency difference 0.1 Hz
An output duration of 0.4 s with a maximum permitted frequency difference of 0.1 Hz equates
a phase differnce
360° • 0.1 Hz • 0.4 s = 14.4°
Attention
Depending on the selected output duration synchrocheck_tmin and the maximum permitted frequency
difference S#_f_diff_max the signal Synchrocheck ok still can be active, while the “synchronous”
conditions are not present any more.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
8.7.4.3 Calculation of the Connection Moment
The coming edge of the Synchrocheck ok signal is set in such a way, that under
consideration of the signal set-up time, the connection moment lies at a phase difference of 0.
ϕdiff
180° ∆fdiff / ∆t <> 0 ∆fdiff / ∆t = 0
Signal set-up time
1 2 3 4 5
Error
t [s]
Connection moment
-180°
Synchrocheck ok
Since with the calculation of the connection moment a frequency difference change of 0 is
assumed, errors can occur with the calculation of the connection moment.
Example for the calculation of the maximum error for the connection
Assumption: Signal set-up time 400 ms
Maximum frequency difference change 5 mHz
With a maximum frequency difference change / 20 ms of 5 mHz, this produces an error of

360° • 5 mHz • 20 ms = 0.036° angular change / 20 ms
Due to the signal set-up time of 400 ms, this produces a maximum error of
400 ms / 20ms • 0.036° = 0.72°
It is to be observed, that:
• the accuracy of the frequency difference is ±5 mHz

• the calculation of the connection moment takes place in a time scale of 20 ms and
consequently the connection moment can be inaccurate by ±20 ms.
8.7.5 Relay Output
This function enables the 1-pole output of the signal Synchrocheck ok linked with the peri-
odical information "Output relay OUT Dx0" from the open-/closed-loop control function. De-
pending on the system element one or more output relays are possible. If several relays are
available on the system element, these can be switched independent from each other.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
8.7.5.1 Logic Operation
The kind of linking of the signal Synchrocheck ok with the periodical information "Output re-
lay OUT Dx0" is set by the parameter relay output. This parameter affects all available
output relays.
Synchrocheck ok Sync
Synchrocheck
Parameter
„Relay output“
Sync,FUD(AND)
&
Sync,FUD(OR) Revision
>1
Periodical Output relay OUT Dx0 FUP

information object
Monitoring
8.7.5.2 Monitoring
The welding of the relay contact is determined by reading back the second relay contact. If a
welded relay contact is recognized, all available output relays are terminated, a diagnostic in-
formation is set and further outputs are prevented.
A going error (welded contact seperates itself) is not detected.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
8.7.6 Synchronoscope
This function generates information, which describe the location of the selectable reference
voltage Ux to voltage U4 in regard to
• the voltage difference

• the frequency difference
• the phase difference
Thereby 2 periodical information items are derived for each difference value.
The following picture shows, which information is set in which case.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
8.7.7 Parameter Switch-Over
This function enables the limits for a maximum of four different operating states to be defined
in parameter records, which are managed in so-called parameter banks. With the help of a
spontaneous information object, these parameter banks can be switched over dynamically
(parameter bank selection). Which parameter bank is active, is signaled back with a
On switch-over, the possibly active Synchrocheck ok signal is reset, and only activated
again after the connection criteria of the new parameter bank have been checked and fulfilled.
If the parameter bank current at the moment is selected again, there is no interruption to the
Synchrocheck ok signal.
8.7.7.1 Parameter Bank Selection
A successful switch-over is signaled back by the corresponding spontaneous information

object "Synchroch.Param.bank x active" (x = 0…3 and specifies the parameter bank). These
format "single-point information". The assignment of these messages in the OPM II takes
place with the category firmware / SW_T_SYN_B_CON.
For the parameter bank selection, the procedure for the command transmission according to
IEC 60870-5-101/104 for "direct command" is applied.
On reception of the spontaneous information object "Synchroch.Param.bank x select.", the

switch-over is initiated with the following checks:
• Function Synchrocheck enabled

• Cause of transmission is "Activation"
• Data point identifier is "execute"
• Command state is ON
• Qualifier of command < 3
If these conditions are not fulfilled:

of transmission)
If these conditions are fulfilled, a positive confirmation of activation is transmitted, and

depending on the selected parameter bank, the following actions are performed.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Command is for a parameter bank other than the one currently active
the single-point information state (SPI) OFF for the currently active parameter bank
• Switch-over to the new parameter bank
the single-point information state (SPI) ON for the new parameter bank
• Transmission of a positive termination of activation
Command is for the currently active parameter bank

• Transmission of a negative termination of activation
Startup
After startup:
• the spontaneous information objects "Synchroch.Param.bank x activ." with the single-point

information state (SPI) OFF is transmitted for all four parameter banks
• the parameter bank 0 is set
• the spontaneous information object "Synchroch.Param.bank x activ." with the single-point
information state (SPI) ON is transmitted for parameter bank 0
Autonomy
If the firmware goes to the operating state "Autonomy", the parameter bank 0 is set.
Enabling of the function Synchrocheck

If the Synchrocheck function is enabled during operation, switching to parameter bank 0 takes
place.
8.7.8 Connecting a Dde-Energized Line to a System
Since with a de-energized line, the previously described connection criteria (e.g. voltage -
difference) can not be fulfilled, the possibility exists of deactivating the check of the connection
criteria. This is performed through a canceling of the block for the connection to a de-
energized line and can be controlled separately depending on the de-energized component
(Ux or U4).
To obtain the enabling for the connection of a de-energized line:
• the voltage must be smaller than a parameterized threshold (parameter S#_Ux_zero or

S#_U4_zero)
• the block for the corresponding de-energized component (Ux or U4) must be canceled

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
The block or the canceling of the block takes place with the help of a spontaneous information
object.
• spontaneous information object for Ux…Synchroch. disable Ux zero

• spontaneous information object for U4…Synchroch. disable U4 zero
takes place with the category firmware / SW_SYN_U_NULL_DISABLE. The spontaneous
information object is only assessed, if the data point quality descriptors IV and NT are not set.
Note
These spontaneous information objects are not evaluated with energized line sections.
Whether the line is in a de-energized state and the block is canceled, is signaled according to
the de-energized component (Ux or U4) with the help of a spontaneous information object:
• spontaneous information object for Ux…Synchroch. Ux zero active

• spontaneous information object for U4…Synchroch. U4 zero active
takes place with the category firmware / SW_SYN_U_NULL_ACTIVE.
The following diagram shows, on which influences the Synchrocheck ok signal is dependent
with a de-energized line (in this case Ux).
Parameter „Si_U4_max“
Voltage U4rms
Parameter „Si_U4_min“
Parameter „Si_Ux_zero“
Voltage Uxrms
ON
information object

Spontaneous
OFF
VT U1 U2 U3 nok
Synchrocheck ok

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
The following representation shows, in which voltage ranges a set Synchrocheck ok signal
is basically possible.
System A System B
(Ux) (U4)
1,5 * Uxnom 1,5 * U4nom
Ux max U4 max
energized 1 * Uxnom energized 1 * U4nom
Ux min U4 min
Ux null U4 null
de-energized 0 de-energized 0
..... Synchronising (Synchrocheck OK) is not possible
8.7.9 Connection in case of 1-phase-to-earth-fault
In case of 1-phase-to-earth-fault one of the 3 phases is connected to the ground. The voltage
value of the two (healthy) phases will increase to a value multiplied by a factor of √3.
Despite this fault state, a continued operation is - under certain conditions - possible for a
limited period.
In case of this specific operating condition, the function synchrocheck can be used.
To obtain the enabling for the connection in case of 1-phase-to-earth-fault:
• the parameter synchrocheck has to be set to option „phase-to-phase + earth fault“

• the parameter voltage type has to be set to option „phase“ (i.e.: circuitry of U1, U2, U3
with phase voltages)
• the parameters X_100% [Ux] and Y_100% [Ux] has to be set to (phase voltage * √3)
• the parameters X_100% [U4] and Y_100% [U4] has to be set to the value of the phase-to-
phase-voltage

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
8.8.1 Revision
SW_REV.
8.8.2 Smoothing

steps.
Note
The smoothing can be set separately for each value and has no effect on other values derived from it.
That means, that e.g. the power is not calculated with the smoothened current.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
be transferred.

Measured value, normalized value -1…+1 - 2-15 normalized, percental representation
...
+32767
number ...
+1.000 • 1015
With the zero range suppression, value fluctuations of the sensor can be suppressed in a
definable range.
The zero range suppression can be enabled by means of the parameter Zero range and can
be parameterized separately for defined spontaneous information objects.
If the value is within the upper limit of the zero range (XZU) and the lower limit of the zero
range (XZL), it is substituted by the value 0.
For values without polarity sign (e.g. transformer current), the lower limit of the zero range
XZL = 0. For values affected by polarity signs (e.g. active power) XZL = -XZU.
The following table shows, for which values a zero range suppression is possible and which
rule is applied with regard to the lower and upper limit of the zero range:
Value XZL XZU referring to

Current I1, I2, I3 0 X_100% (T_AI_I)
Phase voltage U1, U2, U3 0 X_100% (T_AI_U) Voltage type: phase
X_100% (T_AI_U) / √3 Voltage type: phase-to-phase
Voltage U4 0 X_100% (T_AI_U4_SYN)
Phase-to-phase voltage U12, 0 X_100% (T_AI_U) Voltage type: phase
U23, U31 X_100% (T_AI_U) • √3 Voltage type: phase-to-phase
Zero current I0 0 X_100% (T_AI_I) of I1
Zero voltage U0 0 X_100% (T_AI_U) of U1 Voltage type: phase
X_100% (T_AI_U) of U1 Voltage type: phase-to-phase
Active power P1, P2, P3 -XZU Nominal power e.g. with 1-wattmeter method:
Reactive power Q1, Q2, Q3 -XZU Nominal power e.g. with 1-wattmeter method:

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Through the parameter zero_range_standard it can be set, whether the zero range is
predefined (standard) or can be freely parameterized.
In the standard case, the upper limit of the zero range is 5% and the parameter ze-
ro_range_Xzu is ineffective.
Otherwise, by means of the parameter zero_range_Xzu the zero range can be freely set
in %.
Note
The zero range suppression can be set separately for each value and has no effect on other values
derived from it.
8.8.3.2 Overrange
Standard overrange

Settable Overrange



element or the parameterized technological overrange is exceeded (see 8.8.3.3,
Characteristic Transformer Current and 8.8.3.4, Characteristic Transformer Voltage).

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017

0% 1-2-15
200% 0.33

value".

nominal range
XZU 1 A (2%) upper limit of the zero range zero_range_Xzu
parameterized
Y100
Y0
X0 XZU X100 X100+100%
IV
OV

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06

ue".

nominal range
(Y100+OR)
Current Ix YOR Normalized value
Y100
Y0
X0 XZU X100 XOR X100+100%
IV
OV

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017

value".

nominal range
XZU 2.2 V (2%) upper limit of the zero range zero_range_Xzu
parameterized
Y100
Y0
X0 XZU X100 X100+50%
IV
OV

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06

ue"

nominal range
(Y100+OR)
Voltage Ux YOR Normalized value
Y100
Y0
X0 XZU X100 XOR X100+50%
IV
OV

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017

procedure



Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Examples
Example 1:
0.04s 0.08s 0.12s 0.16s 0.2s 0.24s 0.28s ... 3.00s 3.04s
Measured value 300 379 379 379 379 379 379 ... 379 379
Difference >80 79 79 79 79 79 79 ... 79 79
Additive total 0 79 158 237 316 395 474 ... 5925 6004
Transmission x x
Example 2:
0.04s 0.08s 0.12s 0.16s 0.2s 0.24s 0.28s ... 239.96s 240s
Measured value 300 301 301 301 301 301 301 ... 301 301
Difference >80 1 1 1 1 1 1 ... 1 1
Additive total 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 ... 5999 6000
Transmission x x
Example 3:
0.04s 0.08s 0.12s 0.16s 0.2s 0.24s 0.28s ... 3.00s 3.04s
Measured value 300 301 300 299 300 301 300 ... 300 301
Difference >80 1 0 -1 0 1 0 ... 0 1
Additive total 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 ... 0 1
Transmission x

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
8.9 Data Interface
8.9.1.1 Values
Values concerned
Phase-to-phase voltage U12, U23, U31 Active energy A1+, A2+, A3+, A1-, A2-, A3-
Voltage U4 Reactive energy R1+, R2+, R3+, R1-, R2-, R3-
Frequency instantaneous value, frequency mean Voltage difference
value
Zero current I0 Frequency difference
Zero voltage U0 Phase difference

CASDU, can be set by parameter
IOA…Message address
Value refer to”Resolution, significant digits and unit" column "Value
Range"
failure
IV…invalid refer to “Error Handling for Spontaneous Information Objects“
column "Condition"
OV…overflow refer to "Error Handling for Spontaneous Information Objects"
column "Condition"
03…spontaneous Change of the value depending on the thresholds, or
1-16 interrogation

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06

tion
T…test no test
8.9.1.1.1 Resolution, significant digits and unit

Example: Current I1X_100%Y_100% equals 200 A and standard overrange
Resolution = 2 • 200 • 2.5 •10-4 = 0.1 A


Example: Active power P1 Y_100% [I1] = 20 A Y_100% [U1] = 110 KV
Resolution = 2 • 20 A • 110 KV • 2.5 • 10-4 = 0.0011 MW

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
rent (1 A, 2 A, 5 A or 6 A) and the nominal voltage (230 V/220 V, 110 V or 110 V/√3).

Current I1, I2, I3 0…Y_100% [Ix] + OR [Ix] norm 1) 2.5•10-4 1
Zero current I0 0…Y_100% [I1] + OR [I1] scal 2) 1 A
x…1, 2, 3 3)
s.fl.p. 2.5•10-4 A
1)
Phase voltage U1, U2, U3 0…Y_100% [Ux] + OR [Ux] norm 3.33•10-4 1
Zero voltage U0 scal 2) 0.1 kV
0…Y_100% [U1] + OR [U1]
3)
x…1, 2, 3 s.fl.p. 3.33•10-4 kV
Voltage U4 0…Y_100% [U4] + OR [U4] or norm 1) 3.33•10-4 1

0…(Y_100% [U4] + OR [U4]) • √3 scal 2) 0.1 kV
depending on parameter 3)
synchrocheck s.fl.p. 3.33•10-4 kV
Phase-to-phase voltage 0…(Y_100% [Ux] + OR [Ux]) • √3 norm 1) 3.33•10-4 1

U12, U23, U31 scal 2) 0.1 kV
Wiring: 3)
phase voltage x…1, 2, 3 s.fl.p. 3.33•10-4 kV
Phase-to-phase voltage 0…Y_100% [Ux] + OR [Ux] norm 1) 3.33•10-4 1

U12, U23, U31 scal 2) 0.1 kV
Wiring: 3)
phase-to-phase voltage x…1, 2, 3 s.fl.p. 3.33•10-4 kV
Active power P1, P2, P3 ± (Y_100% [Ix] + OR [Ix]) • Y_100% [Ux] norm 1) 2.5•10-4 1
1-wattmeter method scal 2) 1 MW
x…1, 2, 3 3)
s.fl.p. 2.5•10-4 MW
1)
2-wattmeter method [U1] • (1 / √3) 2)
scal 1 MW
s.fl.p. 2.5•10-4 MW
1)
3-wattmeter method [U1] 2)
scal 1 MW
(phase voltages) 3)
s.fl.p. 2.5•10-4 MW
Reactive power Q1, Q2, ± (Y_100% [Ix] + OR [Ix]) • Y_100% [Ux] norm 1) 2.5•10-4 1
Q3 2)
scal 1 Mvar
1-wattmeter method x…1, 2, 3 3)
s.fl.p. 2.5•10-4 Mvar
1)
2-wattmeter method [U1] • (1 / √3) 2)
scal 1 Mvar
s.fl.p. 2.5•10-4 Mvar
1)
scal 2) 1 Mvar
(phase voltages) 3)
s.fl.p. 2.5•10-4 Mvar
1) normalized value
2) scaled value

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06

Frequency mean value -15% fnom…0…15% fnom norm 1) 1 mHz 1
Frequency instantaneous (fnom– 15%)…0…(fnom+ 15%) scal 2) 10 mHz
value
fnom…parameterized line frequency s.fl.p. 3) 10-3 Hz
1)
Power factor 1, 2, 3 -1…0…1 norm 2.5•10-4 1
2)
scal 10-3 1
3)
s.fl.p. 2.5•10-4 1
1)
Voltage difference Ux - U4 - Y_100% [Ux] + OR [Ux]…0…Y_100% norm 3.33•10-4 1
[Ux] + OR [Ux] 2)
scal 0.1 kV
x...1, 2, 3, 12, 23, 31 3)
x…1, 2, 3 s.fl.p. 3.33•10-4 kV
1)
Frequency difference fUx - -10% fnom…0…10%fnom norm 1 mHz 1
fU4 fnom…parameterized line frequency scal 2) 1 mHz
3)
x...1, 2, 3, 12, 23, 31 s.fl.p. 10-3 Hz
Phase difference φUx - φU4 -180…0…180° norm 1) 0.01125° 1

2)
scal 0.01 °
x...1, 2, 3, 12, 23, 31 3)
s.fl.p. 0.01125 °
1) normalized value
2) scaled value

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017

Zero current I0 I0 > X_100% [Ix] + 100% Y_100%[Ix] + 100% OV
One value (I1, I2, I3) in "Overflow" current IV
Phase voltage U1, Phase voltage wired Y_100%[Ux] + OR [Ux] OV
U2, U3 Ux > X_100% [Ux] + OR [Ux]
Phase-to-phase voltage wired 0 IV
Voltage U4 U4 > X_100% [U4] + OR [U4] Y_100%[U4] + OR [U4] OV
Phase-to-phase Phase-to-phase voltage wired Y_100%[Ux] + OR [Ux] OV
voltage Ux > X_100% [Ux] + OR [Ux]
U12, U23, U31
Phase voltage wired and one value (U1, U2, current IV
U3) in overrange
Phase voltage wired and calculated phase- (Y_100%[Ux] + OV
to-phase voltage (U12, U23, U31) Ux > OR [Ux]) • √3
(X_100% [U1/U2/U3] + OR [Ux]) • √3
Zero voltage U0 U0 > X_100% [Ux] + 50% Y_100%[Ux] + 50% OV
One value (U1, U2, U3) in overrange current IV
Phase-to-phase voltage wired 0 IV
Active power P1, P2, Px > (Y_100% [Ix] + OR [Ix]) • Y_100% [Ux] current OV
P3 or
Px < -(Y_100% [Ix] + OR [Ix]) • Y_100% [Ux]
x…1, 2, 3
Phase voltage wired and related value current IV
(I1,U1, I2,U2, I3,U3) in overrange
value (I1,U12, I2,U23, I3,U31) in "Overflow"
Reactive power Q1, Qx > (Y_100% [Ix] + OR [Ix]) • Y_100% [Ux] current OV
Q2, Q3 or
Qx < -(Y_100% [Ix] + OR [Ix]) • Y_100% [Ux]
x…1, 2, 3
Phase voltage wired and related value current IV
(I1,U1, I2,U2, I3,U3)
in overrange

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06

Active energy Phase voltage wired and related value current IV
A1+, A2+, A3+, (I1,U1, I2,U2, I3,U3) in "Overflow"
A1-, A2-, A3-
Reactive energy Phase voltage wired and related value current IV
R1+, R2+, R3+, (I1,U1, I2,U2, I3,U3) in "Overflow"
R1-, R2-, R3-
Frequency mean f > (nominal frequency +15%) nominal freq. +15% OV
value
f < (nominal frequency –15%) nominal freq. -15% OV
Frequency Ux < parameter U< or Ix < 0.21A
instantaneous value Parameter Behavior_at_U<_I<_ is
"Substitute value=0" 0 -
Power factor 1, 2, 3 Related value (I1,U1, I2,U2, I3,U3) power factor when IV
time
"with substitute value, IV-Bit" power factor when IV
time
Voltage difference Phase voltage wired and related value (Ux) current IV
in overrange
value (Uxx) in overrange
Frequency difference fdiff > +5 Hz + 5 Hz OV
fdiff < -5 Hz -5 Hz OV
Ux or U4 shorter 3% nominal voltage
"with substitute value, IV-Bit" +5 Hz IV
Phase difference Ux or U4 shorter 3% nominal voltage 180° IV

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
8.9.1.2 Synchroch. Ux zero active, Synchroch. U4 zero active

SPI…single point information 0…line not de-energized or
connecting de-energized line is disabled
1…line de-energized and
connecting de-energized line is enabled
failure
IV…invalid valid
a remote command
a local command
1-16 interrogation
tion
T…test no test

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
8.9.1.3 Synchroch. param.bank x active

SPI…single point information 0…parameter bank deactivated
1…parameter bank activated
failure
IV…invalid valid
a remote command
a local command
1-16 interrogation
tion
T…test no test

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
8.9.2.1 Revision

1…revision
a remote command
a local command
interrogation
1-16 interrogation
tion

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
8.9.2.2 VT U1 U2 U3 nok, VT U4 nok

a remote command
a local command
rogation
1-16 interrogation
tion

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
8.9.2.3 Synchroch. disable Ux zero, Synchroch. disable U4 zero

SPI…single point information 0…Connecting a de-energized line is enabled
1…Connecting a de-energized line is disabled
a remote command
a local command
rogation
1-16 interrogation
tion

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
8.9.2.4 Synchroch. param.bank x select

TI…Type Identification TI 45 Single command
1…switch to the appropriate parameter bank
mand
08…deactivation not permitted
tion

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
column A.


(OPM II)
Current I1 analog *) 20 ms
Phase voltage U1 analog *) phase voltage acquired or calculated 20 ms
Phase-to-phase analog *) phase-to-phase voltage acquired or calculated 20 ms
voltage U12
Voltage U4 analog *) 20 ms
Active power P1 analog *) depending on the wattmeter method: 20 ms
power U1*I1 or sum power
Reactive power Q1 analog *) depending on the wattmeter method: 20 ms
power U1*I1 or sum power
Power factor 1 analog *) depending on the wattmeter method: 20 ms
power factor P1/Q1 or total power factor
Frequency differ- analog *) 20 ms
ence
Phase difference analog *) 20 ms
Frequency instan- analog *) 50 / 60 Hz 20 ms
taneous value
16.7 Hz 60 ms
Synchrocheck ok binary connection criteria fulfilled (including set-up time) 20 ms
Current I1 faulty binary is never set -
Phase voltage U1 binary See "Error Handling for Periodical Information" 20 ms
faulty
Voltage U4 faulty binary See "Error Handling for Periodical Information" 20 ms
Phase-to-phase binary See "Error Handling for Periodical Information" 20 ms
voltage U12 faulty
Active power P1 binary See "Error Handling for Periodical Information" 20 ms
faulty
Reactive power Q1 binary See "Error Handling for Periodical Information" 20 ms
faulty
Frequency instan- binary See "Error Handling for Periodical Information" 20 ms
taneous value
faulty
Power factor 1 binary See "Error Handling for Periodical Information" 20 ms
faulty
Frequency differ- binary See "Error Handling for Periodical Information" 20 ms
ence faulty
Phase difference binary See "Error Handling for Periodical Information" 20 ms
faulty
*) see "Resolution, significant digits and unit" column "Value Range" for short floating point number.
Details for the value with an error, see "Error Handling for Periodical Information" column "Condi-
tion"

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
8.9.3.1 Error Handling for Periodical Information
Meaning of column:
X...related periodical data point "data point faulty" is set (…yes; -…no)

Current I1 Ix > X_100% [Ix] + OR [Ix] Y_100% + OR -
maximum
2 • Y_100%
Phase voltage U1 Wiring with phase voltage Y_100% + OR maximal -
Ux > X_100% [Ux] + OR [Ux] 1,5 • Y_100%
Phase-to-phase voltage wired 0 
Voltage U4 failure of voltage transformer U4 current 
Phase-to-phase Beschaltung mit verketteter Spannung Y_100% + OR maximal -
voltage U12 Ux > X_100% [Ux] + OR [Ux] 1,5 • Y_100%
Phase voltage wired and current 
Active power P1 Related value (I1,U1, I2,U2, I3, U3) current 
in overrange
Reactive power Q1 Related value (I1,U1, I2,U2, I3, U3) current 
in overrange
Frequency instan- f > (nominal frequency + 15%) nominal frequency + -
taneous value 15%
f < (nominal frequency – 15%) nominal frequency - -
15%
Ux < parameter U< or Ix < 0.21A

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017

Power factor 1 Related value (I1,U1, I2,U2, I3, U3) power factor when 
time
"with substitute value, IV-Bit" power factor when 
time
Frequency differ- fdiff > + 5Hz +5 Hz 
ence
fdiff < - 5Hz -5 Hz 
Ux or U4 shorter 3% nominal voltage
"with substitute value, IV-Bit" +5 Hz 
"Substitute value=0" 0 -
Phase difference Ux or U4 shorter 3% nominal voltage
"with substitute value, IV-Bit" 180° 

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
9 Measurement in Three-Phase Systems –
I/O Module
Content
9.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................268

9.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................269
9.4 Transformer Voltages .......................................................................................273
9.5 Frequency .........................................................................................................277
9.7 Fault Detection .................................................................................................281
9.9 Data Interface ...................................................................................................298

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Measurement in Three-Phase Systems – I/O Module
9.1 Introduction
Features
• Current and voltage inputs
• Phase voltages can be wired to the voltage inputs
• Acquisition of currents and voltages with signal scanning of 1 time per millisecond
• Calculation of r.m.s. values by means of Discret Fourier Transformation
• Acquisition of frequency
─ Nominal frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz ±5 Hz
• Measuring range of the secondary quantities dependent on the I/O-module
─ AI-8510
− Current measurement: Nominal value 1 A or 5 A with 100% overrange and a
resolution of 16 bits
− Voltage measurement: Nominal value 100 V/√3 or 230 V with 50% overrange and a
─ AI-8511
− Current measurement: Nominal value 225 mV with 100% overrange and a
− Voltage measurement: Nominal value 3.25 V/√3 with 50% overrange and a
• Technological adaptation of currents and voltages
• Calculation of phase-to-phase voltages
• Calculation of the zero phase system for current and voltage
• Calculation of apparent, active and reactive power values per phase and 3-phase system
• Change monitoring can be set individually for each value
• Message of voltage transformer MCB is considered

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
9.2 Block Diagram
U1, U2, U3 I1, I2/IN, I3

Analog inputs for Analog inputs for
transformer voltage transformer current
Acquisition with Fourier analysis

Determination of the frequency
Calculation of the r.m.s. values
Adaptation Revision
Calculation of the phase-to-phase voltages
Calculation of the zero system
Supervision of the voltage transformers
Current, voltage, frequency
Calculation of:
active power
reactive power
apparent power
power factor
fault direction
power-flow direction
Format conversion
Change monitoring
Power-flow dir ection I1, I2, I3 (for ward/rever se)
Fault dir ection I>, I>>, IN (forward/r everse)
Phase-to- phase voltage U12, U23, U31
Reactive power Q1, Q2, Q3; Q
Appar ent pow er S1, S2, S3; S

Phase angle U1, U2, U3, U0
Phase angle U12, U23, U31
Active power P1, P2, P3; P

Phase voltage U1, U2, U3
Phase angle I1, I2, I3, IN
Gr ound current IN
VT U1 U2 U3 nok
Zer o voltage U0
Current I1, I2, I3
Frequency
Revision
Spontaneous information objects
Data interface

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Acquisition of AC currents through analog inputs for transformer current measurement, and
The nominal current depends on the I/O-module with 100% overrange with a resolution of
16 bits.
Nominal value
AI-8510 with CM-8820:1 A or 5 A
AI-8511: 225 mV (low power)
• Acquisition
• Revision
• Calculation of the ground current
− Ground current IN firmware / SW_UI
The column "Category" specifies, in which category the message address of the spontaneous
information object is to be parameterized.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
9.3.1 Acquisition
The acquisition of AC currents and the calculation of r.m.s. values is carried out by means of
Discret Fourier Transformation.
For this, currents are acquired through direct transformers with signal scanning rate of
1 sample per millisecond.
Transformation of each current input are subjected to an amplitude- and phase correction.

At works, the correction factors are determined for each unit with the help of highly precise
sensors at each current input and stored in an non volotile memory. The determined real
components an and imaginary components bn are corrected by these factors.


2 2
2
r
I eff = ∑ n Kor
n =0 2

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Note
Current Ix
Y100+100%
Y100
Y0
X0 X100 X100+100%
9.3.3 Calculation of the Ground Current
The ground current IN is calculated from the vectorial sum of the currents I1, I2 and I3.
3
I N = ∑ In
n =1
For the transfer of the ground current IN as spontaneous information object, independent of
the acquired currents I1, I2 and I3, further processing functions are performed. The
• Revision

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Acquisition of AC voltages through analog inputs for direct measuring or transformer voltage
measurement, and calculation of the r.m.s. values.
The nominal voltage is dependent of the I/O module with 50% overrange with a resolution of
16 bits.
Nominal value
AI-8510: 100 V/√3, 230 V, 400 V/√3
AI-8511: 3,25 V (low power)
The assignment of the voltage transformer inputs takes place with phase voltages.
• Acquisition
• Linear adaptation
• Revision

• Calculation of the zero voltage
• Monitoring of the voltage transformer MCB
objects − Phase voltage U1, U2, U3 firmware / T_AI_U
U23, U31

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
9.4.1 Acquisition
The acquisition of AC voltages and the calculation of r.m.s. values is carried out by means of
Discret Fourier Transformation.
For this, voltages are acquired through direct transformers with signal scanning 1 time per
millisecond. The period duration is determined by the acquired Frequency.
To the voltage inputs U1, U2 and U3 only phase voltages can be wired.
Attention
Wiring with phase-to-phase voltages is not allowed!
Transformation of each voltage input for all 25 harmonics are subjected to an amplitude- and
phase correction.

At works, the correction factors are determined for each unit with the help of highly precise
sensors at each voltage input and stored in an non volotile memory. The determined real
components an and imaginary components bn are corrected by these factors.

the 8 harmonics are calculated

2 2
and from this for each voltage input the effective values U1, U2 and U3.
2
r
I eff = ∑ n Kor
n =0 2

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Note
Voltage Ux
Y100+50%
Y100
Y0
X100 X100+50%
9.4.3 Calculation of the Phase-to-Phase Voltage
voltages.
• Revision

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
3
Un
U0 = ∑
n =1 3
• Revision
9.4.5 Monitoring of the Voltage Transformer-MCB
This function monitors the state of the voltage transformer MCB. The state is transmitted to
this function by means of the spontaneous information object "VT U1 U2 U3 nok". This spon-
taneous information object is transmitted in a message with process information in the format
"single-point information with CP56Time2a time stamp". The assignment of this message is
carried out in the OPM II with the category firmware / SW_T_VT_NOK.
The failure of a voltage transformer has the consequence, that the data points concerned are
transmitted by spontaneous information objects with data point quality descriptor IV set. The
value of an affected data point is not influenced.
If the voltage transformer is again signaled as “ok”, the affected data points are transferred by
spontaneous information objects with the current value without data point quality descriptor IV
set.
Data points that are affected by the failure of the voltage transformer:
Data Point VT U1 U2 U3 nok

Current I1, I2, I3 -
Ground current IN -
Phase voltage U1, U2, U3 
Zero voltage U0 
Active power P, P1, P2, P3 
Reactive power Q, Q1, Q2, Q3 
Apparent power S, S1, S2, S3 
Frequency -
Power factor, Powerfactor 1, 2, 3 
Phase angle I1, I2, I3, IN 
Phase angle U12, U23, U31 
Phase angle U1, U2, U3, ,U0 

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
9.5 Frequency
The nominal frequency is 50 and 60 Hz and can be set with the parameter line frequency.
Note
The calculation of the frequency is only possible, if the voltage input U1 is connected with the
corresponding phase voltage.
The following value is prepared for further processing rules:
• Frequency (e.g. display)
Processing functions for frequency value:
• Revision
• Acquisition
objects − Frequency firmware / SW_F
9.5.1 Acquisition
The acquisition of the frequency is carried out with the help of a so-called zero-crossing
detector.
The calculation starts after 12 seconds after the I/O module has been connected with a
network and the network frequency changes.
Attention

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
• Revision
• Calculation of the reactive power

• Calculation of the apparent power
objects − Active power P1, P2, P3, P firmware / SW_PQ
− Reactive power Q1, Q2, Q3, Q firmware / SW_PQ
− Apparent power S1, S2 S3, S firmware / SW_PQ
− Power factor 1, 2, 3, power fac- firmware / SW_COSPHI
tor
The total active power, total reactive power, total apparent power and the total power factor
are transferred in the data points P, Q, S and power factor.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Active power
i…………1, 2, 3
1
(
Pi = ⋅ ∑ a nUKori ⋅ a nIKori + bnUKori ⋅ bnIKori
2 n =0
) anUKor.… corrected real component of the voltage
U1, U2 oder U3
I1, I2 oder I3
Reactive power bnUKor.… corrected imaginary component of the
voltage U1, U2 oder U3
Qi =
1
(
⋅ ∑ a nUKori ⋅ bnIKori − a nIKori ⋅ bnIKori
2 n =0
) bnIKor..… corrected imaginary component of the
9.6.2 Apparent Power
The apparent power is calculated from the active power and reactive power.
Phase power
S i = Pi 2 + Qi2 i…………1, 2, 3
For the transfer of the apparent power S1, S2, S3 and S as spontaneous information objects,
independent of the calculated powers, further processing functions are performed. The
• Revision
9.6.3 Power Factor
Pi
cos ϕ i = Phase power
Pi + Qi
2 2
i…………1, 2, 3
For the transfer of the power factors 1, 2, 3 and the total value as spontaneous information
objects, independent of the calculated powers, further processing functions are performed.
• Revision

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
1-Wattmeter Method for the Phase Power

Pi Ii
Li
Ui
Qi = Ui • Ii • sin ϕi i...1, 2, 3
3-Wattmeter Method for the Total Power

P1 I1
L1
P2 I2
L2
U1
P3 I3
L3
U2
U3


Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
9.7 Fault Detection
9.7.1 Phase Fault and Ground Fault
The module determines the fault based on the following criteria:
• Overcurrent detection for phase currents (parameter I>, I>>) and ground current (IN>)
• Ground-current and zero voltage (neutral-point displacement voltage) (parameter IN> and
IN>_U0) for resonant grounded/isolated network
You can configure the individual time-delay setting for phase current and ground currents. Ad-
ditionally, the following timer can be configured in the module for detecting a fault.
I>_t Timer for the low-set current threshold I>

I>>_t Timer for the high-set current threshold I>>
IN>_t Timer for the ground-current threshold IN>
IN>_U0_t Timer for zero voltage threshold IN>_U0
The combination of these timers can be used to detect a fault.
When the grid phase current exceeds the set current threshold (I>, low-set) and persists for
the defined time (I>_t), the module monitors the pickup time (T1). When the fault is isolated,
the grid voltage/current reaches to zero. When this conditions is reached, the module monitors
the absence of voltage time (T2) for the drop in voltage or current until it reaches below 6 kV
or 5 A respectively.
The fault is indicated, if the loss of voltage or current persists within the pickup time (T2<T1).
This means that if the fault is not cleared by the switchgear within the pickup time (T1), the
module does not indicate any fault.
For the ground fault detection, the threshold for the zero voltage can be set by means of pa-
rameter IN>_U0 and the threshold for the ground current with parameter IN>. If the threshold
exceeds the setting and the fault persists for the time IN>_t and IN>_U0_t, the module indi-
cates the fault based on the timers (T1 and T2).
If any of the criteria is met, the module identifies the type of fault and determines the direction.
For more information about direction determination, refer to 9.7.2, Determination of Fault Di-
rection.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
The following logic diagram illustrates the fault-detection initiation.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
The following logic diagram illustrates the fault indication and fault reset.
The following figure describes the timer based fault indication operation.
9.7.1.1 Fault Reset Mechanism
The fault status can be reset through anyone of the following mechanisms:
• Auto reset as per user-defined time setting (parameter t_reset)

• Auto reset after resumption of voltage/current based on fault reset time (timer T3)
If the timer T3 is configured, then auto reset happens after the resumption of voltage or cur-
rents. The module monitors if the voltages and currents of the grid increases for this time peri-
od (T3) above 6 kV and 5 A respectively. After elapse of the set time, the module resets the
fault indication.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
9.7.2 Determination of Fault Direction
The fault direction for the phase faults is determined by calculating the phase angles between
the fault current and the corresponding phase-to-phase voltages.
Pickup Measuring element

1 2 3 E
1 I1 U2-U3 – – – – – –
2 – – I2 U3-U4 – – – –
3 – – – – I3 U1-U2 – –
N – – – – – – – U0#
1, N I1 U2-U3 – – – – IN U0#
2, N – – I2 U3-U1 – – IN U0#
3, N – – – – I3 U1-U2 IN U0#
1, 2 I1 U2-U3 I2 U3-U1 – – – –
2, 3 – – I2 U3-U1 I3 U1-U2 – –
1, 3 I1 U2-U3 – – I3 U1-U2 – –
1, 2, N I1 U2-U3 I2 U3-U1 – – IN U0#
2, 3, N – – I2 U3-U1 I3 U1-U2 IN U0#
1, 3, N I1 U2-U3 – – I3 U1-U2 IN U0#
1, 2, 3 I1 U2-U3 I2 U3-U1 I3 U1-U2 – –
1, 2, 3, N I1 U2-U3 I2 U3-U1 I3 U1-U2 In U0#
U0# = U1 + U2 + U3
objects − I>/I>> direction A, firmware /
I> I>> direction B SW_CT_FDIR_I>_I>>
− IN> direction A, firmware / SW_CT_FDIR_IN
IN> direction B
− Forward (A) power flow direction firmware / SW_CT_PDIR
of I1, reverse (B) power flow di-
rection of I1
rection of I2
rection of I3

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
9.7.2.1 Direction Determination of Phase Elements
The directional overcurrent element operates for any faults either in forward direction or in re-
verse direction. The forward direction refers to the power-flow towards the load (downstream
switchgear (load)). The reverse direction refers to the power-flow towards the source (up-
stream switchgear (source)).
The directional determination of phase elements works in the quadrature connection to pre-
vent the loss of polarizing quantity for close-in phase faults. Each current element has a direc-
tion by a voltage derived from the other 2 phases. This connection introduces a 90° phase
jump (current leading voltage) between reference voltages and operating quantities (currents).
A fault is determined to be in the selected direction, if its phase relationship lies within a quad-
rant of ±85° on any side of the characteristic angle. It is hard-coded as +45°.
9.7.2.2 Directional Ground Fault (Compensated/Resonant Grounded)
In the compensated/resonant grounded grid, the arc suppression coil is configured to match
the capacitive charging currents, such that when a ground fault occurs the marginal fault cur-
rent flows through the coil. The characteristic angle is set to 0°. A limit of +90° is used to de-
tect the direction of the resistive component within residual currents.
The measuring-element circuit is subjected to cosine component of the zero-sequence current

for directly measuring the real current due to losses. This method of determining the ground
fault direction is implemented in the wattmetric method. For more information about wattmetric
method, refer to 9.7.3, Wattmetric Method.
In the vector method, the measuring element for earth fault detection is subjected to the total
current IN>.
The module calculates the active power of zero sequence (P0) and if the value is falling in the
1st and the 4th quadrant, then the direction is forward. If the active power of zero sequence
(P0) is falling in the 2nd and 3rd quadrant, then the direction is shown as reverse.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
The parameter IN>_ground_type defines the ground point treatment method (setting reso-
nant).
9.7.2.3 Directional Ground Fault (Isolated Grounded)
During ground-fault on the isolated distribution grid, no fault path is detected and subsequently
no fault current flows. The phase-to-neutral capacitive charging current of the healthy phases
for the entire grid is supplied through the fault path. This produces a current that is used to de-
tect the presence of the ground fault. It appears as a residual current which lags the residual
voltage by 90°. The characteristic angle is -90°.
The module calculates the reactive power of the zero sequence (Q0). If the value is falling in
the 1st and the 2nd quadrant, then the direction is reverse. If the reactive power of the zero se-
quence (Q0) is falling in the 3rd and 4th quadrant, then the direction is shown as forward.
The parameter IN>_ground_type defines the ground point treatment method (setting iso-
lated).

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
9.7.2.4 Ground Fault Direction for Solid Grounded Network
The solid grounded system is the common system arrangement in which the neutral is solidly
connected to the ground. For the solid ground connection, the neutral zero voltage is sufficient
to measure and determine the directional information. This results in determining the ground
fault direction based on the angle of rotation of the reference vector.
The parameter IN>_ground_type defines the ground point treatment method (setting solid).
9.7.3 Wattmetric Method
The wattmetric method is used to detect the ground fault based on the active part of the cur-
rent (resonant network) or reactive part of the current (Isolated network). The wattmetric
method is enabled when the I>_Idir parameter is configured for any value other than 0. If
I>_Idir is set to 0, the module detects the ground fault based on the vector method.
The wattmetric method is only applicable for resonant grounded network and isolated ground-
ed network.
If the ground current exceeds the set threshold and if the active current is greater than the set
threshold, the module indicates a fault.
If the ground current and the active current exceeds the set threshold (IN>, I>_Idir respec-
tively) and if the time delay IN>_t is greater than the set threshold, the module detects an
earth fault.
If I>_dir is set to 0, irrespective of the selected ground type connection, the total ground
current is compared with the set current IN> for fault detection.
For the resonant ground connection, if I>_Idir is not 0 (wattmetric method), the active part
of the ground current is compared with I>_Idir in addition to the total ground current and
IN> for the ground fault detection.
For the isolated ground connection, if I>_Idir is not 0 (wattmetric method), the reactive part
of the ground current is compared with I>_Idir in addition to the total ground current and
IN> for the ground fault detection.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
The following logic diagram illustrates the wattmetric method.
The following table displays the I>_Idir range and the wattmetric method status:
I>_Idir Range Status

0 Vector method is enabled
0.2…30 A Wattmetric method is enabled
Hinweis
Set the parameter I>_Idir to 0 in the solid ground connection.
9.7.4 3-Phase Angle Calculations
A phase sequence defines the sequential timing in which each phase-to-ground voltage
phasor lags each other phase-to-ground voltage phasor in the counter-clockwise direction.
9.7.2.2, Directional Ground Fault (Compensated/Resonant Grounded) shows a {1-2-3} phase

sequence. The {1-2-3} sequence implies that U12 leads U23 by 120° and U23 leads U31 by
120°. In addition, U1N leads U2N by 120° and U2N leads U3N by 120°.
It is mandatory to establish the phase sequence before any calculations in order to identify
correctly and relative to each other calculated phasor angles. In the module, U1N is consid-
ered as a reference phasor at 0°.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
In a standard balanced grid, all phase-to-phase phasor supply voltages are phase-to-neutral
voltages multiplied by √3 and lead the phase-to-neutral voltage phasors by 30°.
For example, in a standard 4-wire, 3-phase wye system with phase-to-neutral voltages of
120 V and V1N chosen as the reference phasor at 0° has phase-to-phase voltages of
U12 = 208 ∠ 210°; U23 = 208 ∠ 90°; U31 = 208 ∠ 330°.
objects − Phase angle I1, I2, I3, IN firmware /
SW_CT_MV_SELECTION
− Phasen angle U12, U23, U31 firmware /
SW_CT_MV_SELECTION
− Phasenangle U1, U2, U3, U0 firmware /
SW_CT_MV_SELECTION
9.7.5 Trip Time DMT (50)
DMT (Definite Minimum Time) is applicable for both the phase fault and the ground fault.
The 3 DMT settings are I>, I>>, IN>. Each setting consists of the independent trip-time de-
lays I>_t, I>>_t and IN>_t. The user-defined DMT setting is used to configure various cur-
rent thresholds for the entire dynamic primary current range.
If the current in the system exceeds the set threshold and persists for the set time specified,
the device indicates a fault. The device provides an option to set for 2 current thresholds and
2 time delay thresholds.
The following table illustrates the parameter settings and the values.
Parameter Attribute Value

I> Setting 50 A to 2500 A
I>_t Delay setting 40 ms to 60 s
I>> Setting 50 A to 2500 A
I>>_t Delay setting 40 ms to 60 s
IN> Setting 0.4 A to 1000 A
IN>_t Delay setting 40 ms to 60 s

I> Operate level 110 % of I> ±5 %
I>> Operate level 110 % of I>> ±5 %

I>_t Operate time 40 ms ±15 ms
I>>_t Operate time 40 ms ±15 ms

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
9.8.1 Revision
SW_REV.
be transferred.

Measured value, normalized -1…+1 - 2-15 normalized, percental representation
value
...
+32767
Measured value, short floating -1.000 • 1015 technological, floating point
point number ...
+1.000 • 1015

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
9.8.2.1 Overrange
Standard overrange

Settable Overrange



element or the parameterized technological overrange is exceeded (see 9.8.2.2,
Characteristic Transformer Current and 9.8.2.3, Characteristic Transformer Voltage).


0% 1-2-15
200% 0.33

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017

value".

nominal range
parameterized
Y100+100%
Current Ix Normalized value
Y100
Y0
X0 X100 X100+100%
IV
OV

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06

ue".

nominal range
(Y100+OR)
Current Ix YÜB
Normalized value
Y100
Y0
X0 X100 XÜB X100+100%
IV
OV

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017

value".

nominal range
parameterized
Y100+50%
Voltage Ux Normalized value
Y100
Y0
X0 X100 X100+50%
IV
OV

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06

ue".

nominal range
(Y100+OR)
YÜB
Voltage Ux Normalized value
Y100
Y0
X0 X100 XÜB X100+50%
IV
OV

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017

procedure


Examples
Example 1:
0.04s 0.08s 0.12s 0.16s 0.2s 0.24s 0.28s ... 3.00s 3.04s
Measured value 300 379 379 379 379 379 379 ... 379 379
Difference >80 79 79 79 79 79 79 ... 79 79
Additive total 0 79 158 237 316 395 474 ... 5925 6004
Transmission x x

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Example 2:
0.04s 0.08s 0.12s 0.16s 0.2s 0.24s 0.28s ... 239.96s 240s
Measured value 300 301 301 301 301 301 301 ... 301 301
Difference >80 1 1 1 1 1 1 ... 1 1
Additive total 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 ... 5999 6000
Transmission x x
Example 3:
0.04s 0.08s 0.12s 0.16s 0.2s 0.24s 0.28s ... 3.00s 3.04s
Measured value 300 301 300 299 300 301 300 ... 300 301
Difference >80 1 0 -1 0 1 0 ... 0 1
Additive total 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 ... 0 1
Transmission x

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
9.9 Data Interface
9.9.1.1 Analog Values
Values concerned
Phase-to-phase voltage U12, U23, U31 Apparent Power S1, S2, S3
Ground current IN Phase angle I1, I2, I3, IN
Zero voltage U0 Phase angle U12 ,U23, U31
Frequency Phase angle U1, U2, U3, U0

CASDU, Can be set by parameter
Value refer to Resolution, Significant Digits and Unit column "Value
Range"
BL…blocked peripheral element or data point marked for revision
failure
IV…invalid refer toError Handling for Spontaneous Information Objects
column "Condition"
OV…overflow refer to Error Handling for Spontaneous Information Objects
column "Condition"
03…spontaneous change of the value depending on the thresholds, or
1-16 interrogation
tion
T…test no test

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06

9.9.1.1.1 Resolution, Significant Digits and Unit

Example:
Current I1X_100% Y_100% equals 200A and standard overrange
Resolution = 2 • 200 A • 2.5•10-4 = 0.1 A


Example:
Active power P1 Y_100% [I1] = 20 A Y_100% [U1] = 110 KV
Resolution = 2 • 20 A • (110 / √3) kV • 2.5•10-4 = 0.000635 MW

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
rent (1 A or 5 A) and the nominal voltage (230 V/220 V, 110 V or 110 V/√3).

Current I1, I2, I3 0…Y_100% [Ix] + OR [Ix] norm 1) 2.5•10-4 1
Ground current IN 0…Y_100% [I1] + OR [I1] scal 2) 1 A
x…1, 2, 3 3)
s.fl.p. 2.5•10-4 A
Phase voltage (0…Y_100% [Ux] + OR [Ux]) / √3 norm 1) 3.33•10-4 1
U1, U2, U3 2)
scal 0.1 kV
Zero voltage U0 (0…Y_100% [U1] + OR [U1]) / √3
3)
x…1, 2, 3 s.fl.p. 3.33•10-4 kV
Phase-to-phase 0…Y_100% [Ux] + OR [Ux] norm 1) 3.33•10-4 1

voltage 2)
scal 0.1 kV
U12, U23, U31
3)
Wiring: x…1, 2, 3 s.fl.p. 3.33•10-4 kV
phase voltage
Active power ± (Y_100% [Ix] + OR [Ix]) • (Y_100% [Ux] / √3) norm 1) 2.5•10-4 1
P1, P2, P3 2)
scal 1 MW
x…1, 2, 3 3)
s.fl.p. 2.5•10-4 MW
1)
Active power P ± 3 • (Y_100% [I1] + OR [I1]) • (Y_100% [U1] / norm 2.5•10-4 1
√3)
scal 2) 1 MW
3)
s.fl.p. 2.5•10-4 MW
Reactive power ± (Y_100% [Ix] + OR [Ix]) • (Y_100% [Ux] / √3) norm 1) 2.5•10-4 1
Q1, Q2, Q3
scal 2) 1 Mvar
x…1, 2, 3 3)
s.fl.p. 2.5•10-4 Mvar
1)
Reactive power Q ± 3 • (Y_100% [I1] + OR [I1]) • (Y_100% [U1] / norm 2.5•10-4 1
√3)
scal 2) 1 Mvar
3)
s.fl.p. 2.5•10-4 Mvar
Apparent power ± (Y_100% [Ix] + OR [Ix]) • (Y_100% [Ux] / √3) norm 1) 2.5•10-4 1
S1, S2, S3 2)
scal 1 MVA
x…1, 2, 3
s.fl.p. 3) 2.5•10-4 MVA
Apparent power S ± 3 • (Y_100% [I1] + OR [I1]) • (Y_100% [U1] / norm 1) 2.5•10-4 1
√3)
scal 2) 1 MVA
3)
s.fl.p. 2.5•10-4 MVA
1) normalized value
2) scaled value
3) short floating point number

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06

Frequency -15% fnom…0…15% fnom norm 1) 1 mHz 1
(fnom– 15%)…0…(fnom+ 15%) scal 2) 10 mHz
fnom…parameterized line frequency
s.fl.p. 3) 10-3 Hz
1)
Power factor -1…0…1 norm 10-3 1
1, 2, 3 2)
scal 10-3 10-3
s.fl.p. 3) 10-3 1
1)
Power factor -1…0…1 norm 10-3 1
2)
scal 10-3 10-3
s.fl.p. 3) 10-3 1
Phase angle 0…360° norm 1) 2.8•10-4 1
I1, I2, I3, IN
scal 2) 10-1 °
3)
s.fl.p. 2.8•10-4 °
1)
Phase angle 0…360° norm 2.8•10-4 1
U12, U23, U31 2)
scal 10-1 °
s.fl.p. 3) 2.8•10-4 °
1)
Phase angle 0…360° norm 2.8•10-4 1
U1, U2, U3, U0 2)
scal 10-1 °
s.fl.p. 3) 2.8•10-4 °
1) normalized value
2) scaled value
3) short floating point number

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017

Ground current IN IN > X_100% [Ix] + 100% Y_100%[Ix] + 100% OV
One value (I1, I2, I3) in "Overflow" current IV
Phase voltage U1, Ux > X_100% [Ux] / √3 + OR [Ux] Y_100%[Ux] / √3 + OV
U2, U3 OR [Ux]
Phase-to-phase One value (U1, U2, U3) in overrange current IV
voltage
U12, U23, U31
Zero voltage U0 U0 > X_100% [Ux] / √3 + 50% Y_100%[Ux] / √3 + 50% OV
One value (U1, U2, U3) in overrange current IV
Active power Vx > (Y_100% [Ix] + OR [Ix]) • (Y_100% [Ux] / current OV
P1, P2, P3 √3) or
Reactive power Vx < -(Y_100% [Ix] + OR [Ix]) • (Y_100% [Ux]
Q1, Q2, Q3 / √3)
Apparent power V…P, Q, S
S1, S2, S3 x…1, 2, 3
Related value (I1, U1, I2, U2, I3, U3) current IV
in overrange
Active power P V > 3 • (Y_100% [I1] + OR [I1]) • (Y_100% current OV
Reactive power Q [U1]) / √3 or
Apparent power S V < -3 • (Y_100% [I1] + OR [I1]) • (Y_100%
[U1] / √3)
V…P, Q, S
Related value (I1, U1, I2, U2, I3, U3) current IV
in overrange

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
9.9.1.2 Binary Data
Values concerned
Forward (A) power flow direction I1 I>/I>> direction A
Reverse (B) power flow direction I1 I> I>> direction B
Forward (A) power flow direction I2 IN> direction A
Reverse (B) power flow direction I2 IN> direction B
Forward (A) Power flow direction I3
Reverse (B) power flow direction I3

SPI…single point information 0…OFF
1…ON
failure
IV…invalid sensor voltage lost, acquisition error or bounce error triggered
a remote command
a local command
1-16 interrogation
tion
T…test no test

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
9.9.2.1 Revision

1…revision
a remote command
a local command
interrogation
1-16 interrogation
tion

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
9.9.2.2 VT U1 U2 U3 nok

CASDU, IOA .. Message address can be set by parameter
a remote command
a local command
rogation
1-16 interrogation
tion

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
10 Temperatures
Content
10.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................308

10.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................309
10.3 Revision ............................................................................................................310
10.4 Acquisition ........................................................................................................311
10.5 Smoothing.........................................................................................................313
10.6 Adaptation.........................................................................................................314
10.7 Gradient monitoring ..........................................................................................315
10.8 Change monitoring ...........................................................................................316
10.9 Data Interface ...................................................................................................317

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Temperatures
10.1 Introduction
Acquisition of the temperature-dependent resistances (resistance thermometer Pt100 or

Ni100).
These resistance thermometers can be connected using 2-, 3- or 4-wire technique.
The processing of the analog inputs takes place in a grid of 400ms.
The assignment of the temperatures to the analogue inputs in the OPM II takes place for each
data point by placing an image on a HW-PIN in the system technique with the category
firmware / AI_T. This category also contains all parameters of the processing functions.
Each temperature can be assigned an arbitrary analogue input for resistance thermometer.
• Revision
• Acquisition
─ Noise rejection
─ Calibration for 2-wire technique
• Smoothing
• Adaptation
• Gradient monitoring
Periodical information • Control information
− Start calibration firmware / SW_ DO
objects − Temperature in °C or °F or firmware / AI_T
resistance in Ohm
− Gradient 1 and firmware /
gradient 2 SW_AI_T_GRADIENT

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Temperatures
10.2 Block Diagram
Analogue inputs for

resistance thermometer
IOMx IN V0 … IOMx IN V1
Not used in AI-8310
ϑ ϑ
Calibration for
2-wire technique
Noise rejection
Smoothing
Adaptation
Gradient monitoring
Change monitoring
Start calibration AI IOMx
Temperature or
Gradient 1
Gradient 2
resistance
Revision
Data interface

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Temperatures
10.3 Revision
SW_REV.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Temperatures
10.4 Acquisition
The resistance thermometer can be connected using 2-, 3- or 4-wire technique. The selection
is carried out with the parameter Connection techn. and the corresponding wiring of the
analogue inputs. The constant current necessary for the measurement is supplied by the
system element.
With the 2-wire technique it is necessary to compensate for the voltage drop on the measuring
circuits by means of a calibration process (see Calibration for 2-Wire Technique).
In 3- and 4-wire technique, it is absolutely necessary to connect the common and, in 4-wire
technology, in addition the current source output directly to the resistance thermometer.
The measuring values determined by the ADC are checked for limit violation (plausibility
check). Measuring value jumps are suppressed (transient filter), and the values are averaged.
10.4.1 Noise rejection
The noise rejection is carried out for a parameterized line frequency of 50Hz, 60Hz or 16.7Hz
(parameter line frequency).
10.4.2 Automatic calibration
submodule.
After assembly, a works calibration of the input circuit takes place, whereby the offset of the
ADC is stored non-volatile in an EEPROM on the system element or submodule.
value is corrected by the stored and currently measured offset-deviation.
10.4.3 Calibration for 2-Wire Technique
10.4.3.1 2-Wire Technique, Calibration for SICAM AK IEC and SICAM TM IOMs
Preconditions
• Automation unit ready for operation
• Resistance thermometer completely wired plant side and connected to the system element
• Provisions in the application program of the open-/closed-loop control function for setting and
resetting the “Start calibration AI” periodical information

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Temperatures
Process
1. Short-circuiting of all resistance thermometers connected in 2-wire technique.
The short circuit should take place as close to the resistance thermometer as possible.
2. Set "Start calibration AI” periodical information.
3. Wait 30 seconds.
4. Reset "Start calibration AI“ periodical information.
5. Any pending "Checksum in EEPROM faulty“ diagnostic message is reset.
6. Check temperature value.
10.4.3.2 2-Wire Technique, Calibration for SICAM A8000 I/O Modules
Preconditions:
• Automation unit ready for operation.
• Resistance thermometer completely wired plant side and connected to the system
element.
Process:
1. Short circuit all resistance thermometers connected in 2-wire technique. The short circuit
should take place as close to the resistance thermometer as possible..
2. Measure the wire resistance using a resistance measuring device.
3. Enter this value to the parameter “wire resistance”.
4. Transform automation unit and load parameters.
5. Any pending calibration diagnostic message is reset.
6. Check temperature value.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Temperatures
10.5 Smoothing

steps.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Temperatures
10.6 Adaptation
The current resistance value of the resistance thermometer is determined from the acquired
measured value. This resistance value is converted into a temperature value.
The selection according to which characteristic (Pt100 or Ni100) conversion is to take place, is
carried out by setting the parameter Measuring range.
Measuring range:
Pt100 -50°C…+350°C / -58°F…+662°F

Pt100 -100°C…+700°C / -148°F…+1292°F
Ni100 -60°C…+250°C / -76°F…+482°F
Pt1000 -100°C…+700°C / -148°F…+1292°F (only available for AI-8310)
By means of the parameter value_selection it can be selected whether the temperature is

to be transferred in degrees Celsius, in degrees Fahrenheit or the resistance value in Ohm.
If the calculated temperature value is outside the useable measuring range, the quality
descriptor OV is set in the spontaneous information object.
If the resistance value is selected for the data transfer, other resistance thermometers can
also be connected. The parameter Measuring range is ineffective. The calculation of the
temperature must be done by a programm (e.g. in the open-/closed-loop control function).
The measurable resistance range depends on the system element used. If the measured
resistance value is not within the system-element-dependent range, the quality descriptor IV is
set in the spontaneous information object.
Temperature measurement:
Defined Measuring Range Useable Measuring Range

-70°C to +370°C
Pt100 (measuring range 1) -50°C to +350°C 72,33 Ohm to 236,65 Ohm
-120°C to +720°C
Pt100 (measuring range 2) -100°C to +700°C 52,11 Ohm to 351,30 Ohm
-80°C to +270°C
Ni100 -60°C to +250°C 59,90 Ohm to 309,80 Ohm
-120°C to +720°C
Pt1000 -100°C to +700°C 521,10 Ohm to 3513,00 Ohm
Resistance measurement:
Pt1000 40,0 Ohm to 400,0 Ohm
Pt1000 400,0 Ohm to 4000,0 Ohm

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Temperatures
10.7 Gradient monitoring
The gradient monitoring is used for signalling of measured values changes, at which after a
definable time (parameter gradient-monitoring time Gradient_dt) a definable limit (parameter
gradient-limit Gradient_dy) has been exceeded. Per measured value it is possible to define
two gradients which are independent from each other. The gradient monitoring happens in a
time scale of the parameter-settable gradient monitoring time by comparing the actual meas-
ured value with the current value. If the gradient-limit is exceeded according to amount
(change comparison without polarity sign) after the gradient-monitoring time, then the trans-
mission of the corresponding spontaneous information object Gradient x (single-point infor-
mation) takes place with status ON. The spontaneous information object is transmitted with
status OFF, if the gradient-limit (without hysteresis) is under-run again.
The activation of the gradient monitoring happens by assigning the software data-point Gradi-
ent x for the corresponding measured value and the parameter-setting of the gradient-
monitoring time and the gradient-limit.
Parameters:
Gradient-monitoring time in seconds

The parameter-setting is only possible in multiples of the processing grid
(400 ms)  0.4 s | 0.8 s | 1.2 s | etc.
Gradient-limit in units °C, °F or Ohm

The unit is set by parameter value_selection
temperature
or
resistance
change of value > gradient_dy (1)
gradient_dt ( 1) t
gradient_dt ( 2)
information objects
spontaneous
gradient 1
gradient 2

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Temperatures
10.8 Change monitoring

procedure


With temperatures, the percentages given refer to the parameterized measuring range. With
resistances, the percentages are dependent of the system element used.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Temperatures
10.9 Data Interface
10.9.1.1 Temperature or Resistance

TI…Type identification TI 36 measured value, short floating point
Value Temperature in °C or °F or
resistance in Ohm
failure
IV…invalid ADC faulty (e.g. offset error), or the acquisition submodule is not
supplying any data
the temperature in no inside the plausible range
OV…overflow Calculated temperature value is outside the useable measuring
range
03…spontaneous alteration of the temperature depending on the thresholds, or
20…interrogated by station inter- After receipt of a GI request or automatically (e.g. after start-up,
rogation parameter change etc.)
1-16 interrogation
tion
T…test no test

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Temperatures
10.9.1.2 Gradient 1 and Gradient 2

SPI…single point information 0…measured value adaptation < parameter set gradient
1…measured value adaptation > parameter set gradient
failure
IV…invalid ADC faulty (e.g. offset error) or
the acquisition submodule is not supplying any data or
the temperature is not in the plausible range
a remote command
a local command
20…interrogated by general upon receipt of a GI request or
1-16 interrogation
tion
T…test no test

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Temperatures
10.9.2.1 Revision

1…revision
a remote command
a local command
interrogation
1-16 interrogation
P/N…positive/negative not evaluated
confirmation
from the open-/closed-loop control function

Start calibration AI binary See section Calibration for 2-Wire Technique"

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
11 Pulse commands
Content
11.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................322

11.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................326
11.3 Command Output Procedure............................................................................327
11.4 Circuitry Variants ..............................................................................................336
11.5 Functions Independent of the Hardware of the System Element .....................342
11.6 Functions Dependent on the Hardware of the System Element ......................357
11.7 Additional Functions .........................................................................................361
11.8 Data Interface ...................................................................................................369

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Pulse commands
11.1 Introduction
The pulse command output is used for the chronologically limited activation of an actuator
over a binary output. The activation of the actuator is thereby dependent on the result of a
series of checks.
The number of checks is dependent on the system element used and can be found in the
respective data sheets:
• Command Output without Hardware-Related Checks (OC)

• Command Output with Internal Checks (IC1)
• Command Output with Continuity Check (CC1)
• Command Output with Resistance Check (RC1)
The possible wiring variants of the actuator are dependent on the system element used:
• 1-pole Circuitry
• 1½-pole Circuitry
• 2-pole Circuitry
• Circuitry with Motor
The command output procedure supports the following messages with process information:
• Single command
Command wich causes an operational equipment to change its state into one defined
target state. For command output the single command needs an output relay. The return
information of the operational equipment comes with one single-point information.
• Double command
Pair of commands whose single commands cause an operational equipment to change its
state into two defined target states. For command output the double command needs two
output relays. The return information of the operational equipment comes with one double-
point information.
• Regulating step command
Command that causes an operational equipment to change its state in predefined steps.
For command output the regulating step command needs two output relays. To create the
return information, logic is required in the open-/closed-loop control function.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Pulse commands
The assignment of the commands to the binary outputs in the OPM II takes place for each
data point by placing an image on a HW-PIN in the system technique. The category for the
image is to be selected according to the required circuitry and the command type:
Category Command type circuitry

firmware / DO_SC_1POL Single command 1-pole
firmware / DO_SC_1.5POL Single command 1½-pole
firmware / DO_SC_2POL Single command 2-pole
firmware / DO_DC_1POL Single command, 1-pole
double command, regulating step
command
firmware / DO_DC_1.5POL Single command, 1½-pole
command
firmware / DO_DC_2POL Single command, 2-pole
command
These categories also contains all parameters of the processing functions.
The processing of a command output procedure in general follows standardized procedures.

Special cases are covered by specific procedures.
Note
If a single command is assigned to one of the categories " firmware / DO_DB_1POL", "firmware /
DO_DB_1,5POL" or "firmware / DO_DB_2POL", this single command is furtheron treated like a double
command. In this case the single command state SCS "OFF" is also supported and the return information
of the operational equipment comes with one double-point information.
Attention
If the single command is used like in the aforementioned note, the "Return Information to Pulse Command
Assignment" is not supported.
The pulse command output comprises the following processing functions:
• Functions independent of the hardware of the system element

These functions do not require the hardware of the system element to have particular
features and functions
• Functions dependent on the hardware of the system element
These functions require features and functions implemented in the hardware of the system
element, such as equipment to accomplish resistance check, current flow measurement,
and so on.
• Additional functions

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Pulse commands
Functions Independent of the System Element's Hardware

• Prepare command output procedure
─ Formal check
─ Retry suppression
─ Direct command or
select- and execute command ("select/execute")
• Initiate command output procedure
─ System-element overlapping 1-out-of-n check
─ Control location check
─ Command locking
─ 1-out-of-n check
─ Synchronization
─ Revision
• Monitor pulse duration
─ Output time
─ Return information monitoring
─ Command prolongation
• Terminate command output procedure
Functions Dependent on the System Element's Hardware

• Prepare control circuit
─ Idle monitoring
─ Selective activation check
─ Resistance check
─ Current flow measurement or continuity check
─ Interference voltage check
─ Earth fault check
• Activate actuator
─ Selective activation check
─ Current flow measurement or continuity check
─ Activation of actuators with series-break contacts
• Deactivate actuator
─ Idle monitoring
Further Functions
• Error handling
• Monitoring the command output sequence (phase-counter)
• Periodical control circuit check
• Switching sequence
• Regulating step command
• Regulating command
• Command output for auto-reclose function

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Pulse commands
− Command output busy firmware / SW_DI
− Sum command output in pro- firmware / SW_DI
gress
− Sum command output error firmware / SW_DI
− Command interlocked firmware / SW_DI
− Command 1-out-of-n interlocked firmware / SW_DI
− Command C00 …Cnn fault firmware / SW_DI
− Check cycle running firmware / SW_DI
− Start check cycle command out- firmware / SW_DO
put
− Enable synchronization firmware / SW_DO
− Enable 1-out-of-n firmware / SW_DO
− Com. interlocking C00 …Cnn firmware / SW_DO
− Command retirn information firmware / SW_DO
− AR CB_controllable firmware / SW_DO
− AR CB_on firmware / SW_DO
Spontaneous information • Process signals to be output

objects − Command C00 …Cnn firmware / DO_SC. / DO_DC..
− Sync. running C00 …Cnn firmware / SW_CO_SYNC_IP
− Sync. abortion C00 …Cnn firmware / SW_CO_SYNC_A
− Sum command interlocked firmware / SW_CO_VERR
− Control location firmware /
SW_CONTROL_LOCATION
− Command fault firmware / SW_CO_EA
Acknowledgement

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
326
11.2
Pulse commands
IN Dxx
Command Cxx in progress
internal
System
Sum command output in progress
Command state information
Synchronization enabling
Command 1-out-of-n interlocked
Block Diagram
command
1-out-of-n enabling
prolongation
monitoring and
Command state
Command interlocked
Command interlocking C00 … Cnn
Command output busy
Command C00 … Cnn error
Sum command output error
check
circuit
Command C00 … Cnn (ACT)
Command
interlocking
Binary outputs
Command C00 … Cnn

Prepare control
Control location
Synchronization
1-out-of-n check
Activate actuator
output procedure
Initiate command
(ACTCON / ACTTERM)
OUT C00 … OUT Cnn
Revision
Command error acknowledgement
Control location
Sum command interlocked
Sync. in progress C00 … Cnn
Sync. terminated C00 … Cnn
Spontaneous information objects
Data interface
Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06

SICAM RTUs, Common functions / Peripheral Elements
Pulse commands
11.3 Command Output Procedure
11.3.1 Principle of the Command Output
Functions independent of hardware of Functions dependent on hardware of

system element system element

command (ACT)
Prepare command output  Formal check

procedure  Retry suppression
 Direct or select- and
execute command

command (ACT/CON)
 Control location check

Initiate command output
 Command interlocking
procedure
 1-out-of-n check
 System-element
overlapping
1-out-of-n check
 Synchronization
 Revision
Prepare control circuit

 Idle check
 Selective activation
check
 Resistance check
 Current flow
measurement or
continuity check
 External voltage
monitoring
 Earth fault check

command (ACT/CON)
Monitor pulse duration  Output time Periodical: Activate actuator

 State information  Selective activation
monitoring check
 Command  Current flow check
prolongation
 Idle check Deactivate actuator
Terminate command
initiation

command (ACT/TERM)

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Pulse commands
11.3.2 Command Output without Hardware-Related Checks (OC)
Output relay Command relay Actuator

optional
External Internal External
Function Actions and Checks Error Handling

Prepare command output Receipt of the spontaneous information
procedure object command (ACT)
• Formal check Cancel
• Retry suppression
• Direct command or Send the spontaneous information object Cancel
select and execute command (ACTCON) when select com-
command mand
procedure
• Control location check Cancel with extra info
• Command locking Set periodical information "Command output Cancel with extra info
busy"
• 1-out-of-n check Cancel with extra info
• Synchronization Cancel with extra info
• Revision Cancel with extra info
Activate actuator Send the spontaneous information object
command (ACTCON) and
set system-internal information "Command
C00…Cnn running"
• Activate command relay
• Activate output relay
Monitor pulse duration

• Output time
• Return information
monitoring
• Command prolongation
Deactivate actuator
• Deactivate output relay
• Deactivate command relay
Terminate command output Send the spontaneous information object

procedure command (ACTTERM) and
reset periodical information "Command
output busy" and reset system-internal
information "Command C00…Cnn running"
If a faulty state is detected during this procedure the command output is immediately
cancelled. Depending on the error, various measures are initiated (see Error Handling).

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Pulse commands
11.3.3 Command Output with Internal Checks (IC1)
Output relay Command relay Actuator

optional

procedure object command (ACT) and
command mand
procedure
busy
Prepare control circuit
• Idle check Selective activation check Cancel with locking
command (ACTCON) and set system-
internal information "Command C00…Cnn
running"
• Activate command relay Periodical selective activation check Cancel with locking
• Activate output relay Periodical selective activation check Cancel with locking
• Output time
monitoring
Deactivate actuator
• Deactivate output relay Selective activation check Cancel with locking
• Deactivate command relay Idle check Cancel with locking
information "Command C00…Cnn running"

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Pulse commands
11.3.4 Command Output with Continuity Check (CC1)
Output relay Semi-conductor switch Group relay Command relay Actuator

optional
Measurement circuit

command mand
procedure
busy"

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Pulse commands
By means of the parameter command sequence the number and therefore the duration of the
checks can be set in the part "Prepare control circuit".
Please note that by means of this parameter not each and every system element can be
parameterized. Refer to the respective manuals (e.g.: DC0-003-2.xx).

Prepare control circuit Command sequence "long"
• Idle check Cancel with locking
• Measurement circuit check Check of the semi-conductor switch Cancel with locking
• Activate command relay Selective activation check Cancel with locking
• Activate output relay Selective activation check Cancel with locking
• Continuity check Check of the group relay Cancel with locking
• Deactivate command relay Selective activation check Cancel with locking
• Activate the group relay Selective activation check Cancel with locking
• Continuity check Check of the command relay Cancel with locking
(parameter Cur-
rent_flow_test_cocont
_dis)
• Continuity check Output relay check Cancel with locking
• Continuity check Check of the measurement circuit and the Cancel with diagnostic
(parameter Cur- external wiring for continuity
rent_flow_test)
Prepare control circuit Command sequence "short"
• Idle check Cancel with locking
• Measurement circuit check Check of the semi-conductor switch Cancel with locking
• Activate the group relay Selective activation check Cancel with locking
• Continuity check Check of the command relay Cancel with locking
(parameter Cur-
rent_flow_test_cocont
_dis
• Continuity check Check of the measurement circuit and the Cancel with diagnostic
(parameter Cur- external wiring for continuity
rent_flow_test_*)
C00…Cnn running"
• Activate semi-conductor
switch
• Continuity check Periodical check of the semi-conductor Cancel with locking
(parameter Cur- switch Cancel with locking
rent_flow_test) Periodical selective activation check Cancel with diagnostic
Check of the external wiring for overcurrent
• Output time
monitoring

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Pulse commands

Deactivate actuator
• Deactivate semi-conductor Checking the relays, the semiconductor
switch switch, the measurement circuit and the
external wiring for continuity (exception: for
automatic-breaker output circuits)
• Continuity check Output relay check Cancel with locking
• Deactivate the group relay Selective activation check Cancel with locking
• Deactivate command relay Idle check Cancel with locking
information "Command C00 .. Cnn running"

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Pulse commands
11.3.5 Command Output with Resistance Check (RC1)
Output relay Group relay

Command relay Actuator
optional
Measurement circuit &

Test voltage
Semi-conductor switch
RSYM

select and execute command (ACTCON) when select
command command
procedure
busy"
Prepare control circuit Semi-conductor switch is closed
• Idle check Selective activation check Cancel with locking
• Activate command relay Selective activation check Cancel with diagnostic
• Interference voltage check Output relay check Cancel with locking
• Ground fault check Check of the group relay and earth-fault Cancel with diagnostic
check for 1½ and 2-pole output
• Activate the group relay Selective activation check Cancel with diagnostic
• Interference voltage check Output relay check Cancel with locking
• Resistance check 1-out-of-n check of the external command Cancel with diagnostic
circuit and earth-fault check for 1-pole
output
C00 .. Cnn running"
• Activate output relay Periodical selective activation check Cancel with diagnostic
• Current flow measurement Periodical check of the semi-conductor Cancel with diagnostic
switch, the measurement circuit and the
external wiring (exception: output circuits
with series-break contacts)

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Pulse commands

• Output time
monitoring
Deactivate actuator
• Deactivate semi-conductor
switch
• Deactivate output relay Selective activation check
• Current flow measurement Output relay check Cancel with locking
• Activate semi-conductor
switch
• Deactivate command relay Selective activation check Cancel with diagnostic
• Resistance check Check of the command relay Cancel with diagnostic
• Deactivate the group relay Idle check Cancel with diagnostic
information "Command C00 .. Cnn running"
cancelled. Depending on the error, various measures are initiated (see Principle of the Com-
mand Output).

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Pulse commands
11.3.6 Dynamic Behaviour
The time that passes by from arrival of a spontaneous information object command (ACT) –
direct command, execute command, but not selection command – until activation of the actu-
ator is often of great importance (thereto see picture Principle of the Command Output).
Within this period of time - dependent on the type of command output – various checks are
performed.
The period of time has fixed and variable portions:
• Fixed portion
The fixed portion depends on the type of command output and on the selected checks
• Variable portion
The various applications can use functions which may cause waiting times, namely:
─ System-Element Overlapping 1-out-of-n check
─ Synchronization
In the following tables the fixed portions are summarized:
Type of Command Output Selectable Check Fixed Portion

Without hardware-related checks (OC) There are no selectable checks 10 ms
With internal checks (IC1) There are no selectable checks 20 ms
With continuity check (CC1) Command sequence "short" 50 ms
Command sequence "long" 110 ms
With resistance check (RC1) No check of the selectable checks 60 ms
is selected
Earth fault check 100 ms
Resistance check 170 ms
Earth fault and resistance check 210 ms

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Pulse commands
11.4 Circuitry Variants
The circuitries shown below are principle circuitries. Actual circuitries can be found in the
appropriate system element manual.
Depending on which system element is used with wich circuitry variant, it may be necessary to
assign one group relay (if there are more than one) using the parameter Group_relay_*, and
one output relay (if there are more than one) using the parameter output_relay_*, to a
command relay.
If a configuration relay is available (the configuration relay can be used instead of a group re-
lay), it can be set with the parameter Group_relay, by selecting the highest possible group
relay number.
In addition there is - dependent on the used system element - the possibility to define the
polarity of the connected battery, using the parameter Polarity. This way it is defined
whether the measurment for current flow measurement or continuity check is carried out in the
plus or minus circuit.
Note
The parameter Polarity must be set correct according to the choosen external circuitry (see the
documentation of the corresponding system element).

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Pulse commands
11.4.1 1-pole Circuitry
Advantage Simplest wiring of the actuators (e.g. external common busbar

with direct connection to the battery).
Disadvantage Single errors in the wiring can lead to unintentional actuation

of the actuator.
Single errors near the busbar (e.g. short-circuit) lead to block-
ing of all actuators.
Peripheral element
Command relay 0 Actuator
Command relay 1
Command relay n
Output relay

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Pulse commands
11.4.2 1½-pole Circuitry
Advantage Single errors in the wiring cannot lead to unintentional actua-

tion of the actuator. Wiring of the actuators over an external
common busbar is possible.
Disadvantage Greater wiring expenditure of the actuators than with 1-pole

circuitry.
Single errors near the busbar (e.g. short-circuit) lead to block-
ing of all actuators.
Peripheral element
Command relay 1
Command relay n
Output relay

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Pulse commands
11.4.3 2-pole Circuitry
Advantage The occurrence of an error on one actuator is non-retroactive

on the other actuators
Disadvantage Greater wiring expenditure of the actuators
Peripheral element
Command relay 1
Command relay n
Output relay

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Pulse commands
11.4.4 Circuitry with Motor
Advantage Direct connection of motors
Peripheral element
Group relay
Excitation
winding
Command relay
Output relay

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Pulse commands
11.4.5 Special Case Double Command
Normally following assignment is to be adhered to:
• OFF-command at the less significant bit

• ON-command at the more significant bit
The two output bits of a double-point information must lie within a half-nibble.
When using the system element in an ACP platform it is possible to overrule this circuitry rule
with the parameter ON_before_OFF.
Parameter ON_before_OFF = NO … the above described normal case applies
Parameter ON_before_OFF = YES … ON-command at the less significant bit

OFF-command at the more significant bit
Pay attention, that the parameters, which are marked with a wildcard (<parameter_*>), are
assigned to the command relay. These parameters must be treated as follows:
Parameter ON_before_OFF = NO … <parameter_0> OFF-command

<parameter_1> ON-command
Parameter ON_before_OFF = YES … <parameter_0> ON-command

<parameter_1> OFF-command
Note
If the parameter ON_before_OFF changes, then the parameter with a wildcard (<parameter_*>) must be
corrected.
If the double-point information items are used also for the return information of pulse commands, you need
to take care for the correct (uniform) circuitry and the setting of the parameter ON_before_OFF of the
pulse commands.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Pulse commands
11.5 Functions Independent of the Hardware of the System

Element
11.5.1 Prepare Command Output Procedure
The command output procedure is carried out by means of a spontaneous information object
"Command". For the command output procedure, the function pulse commands supports both
methods for command transmission according to IEC 60870-5-101/104:
• Direct command and

• Select and execute command
In addition, the pulse command output supports single-, double and regulating step
commands:
• The Single Command activates one command relay and supports exclusively the single
command state "ON".
• The Double Command activates two command relays (OFF and ON), but only one at a
time. It supports the double command states "OFF" and "ON".
• The Regulating Step Command activates two command relays (HIGHER and LOWER),
but only one at a time. It supports the regulating step command states "HIGHER" and
"LOWER".
11.5.1.1 Formal Check
Before a command can be executed, a formal check is performed on the spontaneous

information object "command".
The following checks are performed:
• Cause of transmission is
─ "Activation" or
─ "Cancellation of activation"
• Qualifier of command is
─ No determination or
─ Short command execution time or
─ Long command execution time
• Command state in case of a single command is
─ ON (OFF is not allowed)
• Command state in case of a double command is
─ OFF or
─ ON
• Command state in case of a regulating step command is
─ LOWER or
─ HIGHER
If the formal check is not passed,

of transmission)

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Pulse commands
11.5.1.2 Retry Suppression
As a result of message repetition (Retries) on the link several spontaneous information objects
"Command" can be received with identical content. This can lead to errors of the command
output such as e.g. 1-out-of-n errors.
With the function Retry Suppression these spontaneous information objects are ignored for a
parameterized time "Retry_suppression_T".
11.5.1.3 Direct Command
The procedure for the command transmission according to IEC 60870-5-101/104 for "direct
command" is set by means of the parameter select_execute_t = 0.
On receipt of the spontaneous information object "Command" with the cause of transmission
"Activation" and the data point identifier "execute" the command output procedure with
following checks is initiated:
• 1-out-of-n check
• System-element overlapping 1-out-of-n check
• Control location check
• Command locking
• Synchronization
• Revision
• Control circuit checks (dependent on system element)
• Special case "actuator already in desired end position"
Depending on these checks a positive or negative confirmation of the activation takes place.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Pulse commands
11.5.1.4 Select and Execute Command
The procedure for the command transmission according to IEC 60870-5-101/104 for "select
and execute command" is set by means of the parameter select_execute_t > 0. The
parameterized value specifies, within which time the execute command must be received
following the selection command.
Selection Command (select)

"Activation" and the data point identifier "select", the selection command is checked for being
permitted.
• Parameter "Select_Execute_t" > 0

─ No command selected
─ No command executing
If these conditions are not met:
• The command is rejected

• A negative confirmation of the activation is sent
If these conditions are met, following further checks are performed:
• System-element overlapping 1-out-of-n check

• Command locking
• Revision
• Special case "actuator already in desired end position"
Upon positive confirmation of the activation the execute command is waited for.
Expiration of timeout
If the timeout (parameter select_execute_t ) expired:
• The selected command is canceled
Deactivation
This waiting state can be terminated by means of a spontaneous information object
"Command" with the cause of transmission "deactivation". The qualifier of command "S/E" is
not relevant.
• Parameter select_execute_t > 0

• The command to be deactivated is selected, i.e. the elements of the spontaneous
information object of select and execute command are identical except for the elements
"cause of transmission", "S/E" (not relevant), and for the elements of timetag.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Pulse commands
• A negative confirmation of the deactivation is sent

• The selected command is NOT cancelled
If these conditions are met:
• The selected command is cancelled and

• A positive confirmation of the deactivation is sent
Execute Command (execute)

"activation" and the data point identifier "execute", within the parameterized time se-
lect_execute_t following a selection command, the execute command is checked for being
permitted.

• Command not executing
• The command to be executed is selected, i.e. the elements of the spontaneous
information object of Select- and Execute command are identical except for the element
"S/E" and for the elements of timetag
• The command is rejected and

If these conditions are met the command output is initiated with the following further checks:
• Command locking
• Synchronization
• Revision
• Special case "Actuator already in desired end position"

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Pulse commands
11.5.2 Initiate Command Output Procedure
11.5.2.1 1-out-of-n Check
On a system element the output of only one command at a time is permitted at all times.
For this the command output of a system element is busy as a result of receipt of a
spontaneous information object "Command". The command output remains busy until the end
of the command output procedure.
The 1-out-of-n check cannot be deactivated and is always effective for all commands of a
system element.
The receipt of a spontaneous information object "Command" during a busy command output
has the effect, that:
• The command will be rejected

• A negative confirmation of the activation will be sent
• The periodical information "Command 1-out-of-n interlocked" will be set for 2 seconds
• A spontaneous information object "Sum command interlocked" (positive transient) will be
transmitted with the originator address of the command.
If a 1-out-of-n check is required over several system elements (e.g. alle commands of an
automation unit), the system-element overlapping 1-out-of-n check hast to be set up (see next
section).
11.5.2.2 System-Element Overlapping 1-out-of-n check
The system-element-overlapping 1-out-of-n check is to be resolved with the help of a logic in

the overlapping open-/closed-loop control function and can be activated with the parameter
1_out_of_n_t_* > 0.
Procedure:
On receipt of a spontaneous information object "Command" the periodical information

"Command output busy" is set and the higher-level open-/closed-loop control function is made
available.
The logic in the higher-level open-/closed-loop control function checks amongst other things, the
periodical information "Command output busy" of all other system elements which are to be
taken into account for the 1-out-of-n check.
The result of this check must be made available to the command output with a positive edge
of the periodical information "1-out-of-n enable" within the settable monitoring time (Parameter
"1_out-of_n_t").
Until enabling arrives the following takes place continuously
• a check for Revision

• a check for Command Locking
Furthermore, this information must remain set until the actuator is activated.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Pulse commands
Note
In case of the select and execute command the periodical information "1-out-of-n enabling" must remain set
until also the execute command has terminated.
In case of the switching sequence function the periodical information "1-out-of-n enabling" must remain set
until also the second command has terminated.
If, in case of a direct command or selection command, the "1-out-of-n enabling" does not
arrive within the variable monitoring time, or if, in case of an execution command, "1-out-of-n
enable" is not set,

• The periodical information "Command 1-out-of-n interlocked" is set for 2 seconds
• A spontaneous information object "Sum command interlocked" (positive transient) is
Note
The system-element-overlapping 1-out-of-n check is only possible if the synchronization with enabling over
command locking is deactivated (Parameter Sync_t = 0)
11.5.2.3 Control Location Check
The control location check is used to check whether the control location, specified with the
originator address in the spontaneous information object "Command", has command
authority.
The originator address specified in the spontaneous information object "Command" must
correspond with the control location previously set.
If the originator address in the spontaneous information object "Command" does not match
the control location previously set or if no control location has been preset:


DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Pulse commands
11.5.2.4 Set control location
The control location is set by the spontaneous information object "control location" and is valid
for all commands of a system element. The assignment of this message is carried out in the
OPM II with the category firmware / SW_CONTROL_LOCATION.
As a result of the assignment with a valid message address (CASDU1 and CASU2 unequal
255) the control location check is activated.
For the derivation of the control location, the following values in the spontaneous information
object "Command" signify the originator address:
Originator address Control location

0 default
1...127 remote command
128...255 local command
Note
The selection of the control location and the generation of the spontaneous information object "Control
location" must be programmed in an application program of the open-/closed-loop control function.
If for the spontaneous information object "Control location" the format "Measured value,
Scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a" is selected, only one control location can be set.
If for the spontaneous information object "Control location" the format "single command" is
selected, up to 256 control locations can be set at the same time. Due to a command with the
single command state "ON", the originator address is added to the list of control locations.
For the spontaneous information object "Control location" with the format "Single command" a
check on formal correctness takes place. Depending on these check a positive or negative
ACTCON is sent. In case of a positive ACTCON also a positive ACTTERM is sent. Sending
the confirmation of the command (positive/negative ACTCON and ACTTERM) can be
switched on or off by the parameter ACTCON_yes_no.
With the spontaneous information object "Control location" in the "Command" format with the
single command state OFF, all control locations are deleted ("No control location"). In this
case the originator address is not evaluated.
Note
If for the spontaneous information object "Control location" the format "Single command" is selected, the
control location(s) is (are) to be set at every startup of the system element.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Pulse commands
11.5.2.5 Command Locking
With the help of the command locking, commands can be rejected or allowed process-
dependent. For this a process-dependent interlocking logic is to be created in the higher-level
open-/closed-loop control function. This interlocking logic can be designed individually for each
command and assigned to the peripheral element with the periodical information "Com.
Locking C00 .. Cnn".
If the periodical information "Com. Locking C00 .. Cnn" is set, on receipt of a spontaneous
information object "Command"

• The periodical information "Command locked" is set for 2 seconds
If no assignment of the periodical information "Com. Locking C00 .. Cnn" is carried out in the
open-/closed-loop control function, the command locking is inactive for this command.
11.5.2.6 Synchronization
A typical case of application is the switching on of a circuit breaker dependent on a

synchronization event (e.g. from Synchrocheck with ?U, ?F, ?f in the permitted range).
Depending on the system element there are two methods of enabling:
• Synchronization with enabling by means of the periodical information "Command

interlocked"
• Synchronization with enabling by means of the periodical information "Synchronization
enabling"
Generally applies:
A confirmation of the activation is not dependent on the enabling of the synchronization, i.e. it
is transmitted immediately.
If an enabling of the synchronization is to be waited for, the spontaneous information object

"Sync. running C00 .. Cnn" is transmitted with the state ON and the originator address of the
command.
If an enabling of the synchronization has been given or an abort condition detected, the
spontaneous information object "Sync. running C00 .. Cnn" is transmitted with the state OFF
and the originator address of the command.
Synchronization with enabling via the periodical information "Command interlocked"

This enables, despite a command interlocking at the time of receipt of the spontaneous
information object "Command", the waiting for enabling by the higher-level open-/closed-loop
control function.
This method of synchronization can be activated with the parameter Sync_t_*.
Note
The synchronization with enabling by means of the periodical information "Command interlocked" is only
available on Ax 1703 platforms.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Pulse commands
The application function of the higher-level open-/closed-loop control function must logically
combine the synchronization enabling with the logic for the command interlocking. I.e. if there
is no command interlocking and the synchronization enabling is given, the periodical
information "Com. Interlocking C00…Cnn" is to be reset for at least 100 ms (enabling).
Note
An assignment of the periodical information "Com. Interlocking C00 .. Cnn" must exist in the open-/closed-
loop control function.
Parameter "Sync_t"
>0
spontaneous information object „Command"
Conditions for locking =0 Command

&
Open-/closed-loop periodical information „Com. Locking Cnn“
Synchronization enabling control function
Basic system element Peripheral Element
If the enabling is not received within the parameterized time (Parameter "Sync_t"):

• A negative termination of the activation is sent
• The periodical information "Command locked" is set for 2 seconds and
If a further spontaneous information object "Command" is received while waiting for the
enabling:
• The command waiting for enabling is rejected, i.e. the command output procedure in
progress is cancelled
• If a negative termination of the activation for the command waiting for enabling is
transmitted
• A spontaneous information object "Sync. Abortion C00 .. Cnn" (positive transient) is
• The command output procedure is initiated for the newly received command.
If a spontaneous information object "Revision" is received while waiting for the enabling:
• The command waiting for enabling is rejected, i.e. the command output procedure in
progress is cancelled
• A negative termination of the activation for the command waiting for enabling is sent

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Pulse commands
Synchronization with enabling via the periodical information "Synchronization

enabling"
This enables waiting for the enabling by the higher-level open-/closed-loop control function
without to logically combine the synchronization enabling with the command interlocking.
This method of synchronization can be activated with the parameter Sync_Input_t_*.
The application function of the higher-level open-/closed-loop control function must give the
synchronization enabling for at least 100ms.
Parameter "Sync_input_t"
>0
spontaneous information object „Command"
&
periodical information „Com. Locking Cnn“
=0 Command
&
periodical information „Synchronization enabling“
Until enabling arrives the following takes place continuously
• Check for Revision

• Check for Command Locking
• System-Element Overlapping 1-out-of-n check
If due to the previously stated checks, the synchronization is cancelled,
• The command waiting for enabling is rejected, i.e. the command output procedure in pro-
gress is cancelled
• A negative termination of the activation for the command waiting for enabling is sent
If the enabling is not received within the parameterized time (Parameter "Sync_Input_t"):

• A negative termination of the activation is sent

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Pulse commands
11.5.2.7 Revision
The revision enables the blocking of the output of all commands of a system element.

information in the format "single-point information with time tag CP56Time2a". The
classification of this message is carried out in the OPM II with the category firmware/SW_REV.
Note
application program of the open-/closed-loop control function.
11.5.3 Monitor Pulse Duration
11.5.3.1 Command Output Time
The command output time defines how long the actuator is actuated.
• A command output time independent of the process

• A command output time dependent on the process (return information monitoring)
For the process independent command output time, the output time is defined in the
spontaneous information object "Command":
• Short or long command output time:

The output time is to be parameterized for each automation unit.
• No definition:
For each data point the output time can be set with the parameter output_t_*.
If the command output time = 0:

So that the output time is effective in the spontaneous information object "Command", the
return information monitoring must be deactivated with the parameter RS_Mon_t.
For the process dependent command output time the duration of the command output is
normally determined by the status information (see return information monitoring) and the
command prolongation time (see command prolongation).

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Pulse commands
11.5.3.2 Return Information Monitoring
The return information monitoring is used to:
• Limit the command output to the output time required by the process
• Signal an unsuccessful command output procedure
The return information monitoring can be activated for each command with parameter
RS_Mon_t. For a proper functioning of the return information monitoring a positive edge of the
return information is necessary.
The source of the return information can be set for each command using the parameter
RS_Mon_Source_*. This way it is determined whether the system-internal return information
sent from the peripheral element and/or those created by the open-/closed-loop control function
shall be evaluated. If the open-/closed-loop control function is selected as the source, the
application program must consider the relation to the command in progress and set the
periodical information "command return information" accordingly.
Note
With regulating step commands, for proper functioning, the periodical information "command state infor-
mation" created by the open-/closed-loop control function has to be used.
Note
In order to avoid errors in the signaling of an unsuccessful command output procedure, the return
information monitoring time (Parameter "RS_Mon_t") should be longer than the command output time.
Maintained actuator
Actuate actuator
Command output time
State information
State information
monitoring time
„Command ACT“
information object
Spontaneous
„Command ACTCON“ positive positive
„Command ACTTERM“ positive positive
Diagnostic information
Note
With double commands, the associated double-point information is evaluated as return information, i.e. if
the double-point information makes a change to an intermediate or faulty position a negative termination of
the activation is sent.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Pulse commands
11.5.3.3 Command Prolongation
With the function command prolongation the command output is extended after reaching the
end position of the actuator by a parameterized time (Command_prolong_t). As a result, it is
possible to bring the actuator to a safe end position. The command prolongation is only
effective if the status information arrives before the command output time expires.
The function command prolongation can be activated for all commands of a system element.
Note
The command prolongation is only possible with return information monitoring activated.
Actuate actuator
Command output time
State information
Command prolongation time
„Command ACT“
information object
Spontaneous
„Command ACTCON“ positive
„Command ACTTERM“ positive

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Pulse commands
Actuator does not reach the desired end position
If the actuator does not reach the end position or only reaches it after expiry of the return
information monitoring time,
• The actuator is actuated for the duration of the command output time
• The activation is negatively confirmed
• A diagnostic information is set
Actuate actuator
Command output time
State information
State information monitoring time
„Command ACT“
information object
Spontaneous
„Command ACTTERM“ negative
Diagnostic information

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Pulse commands
Actuator already in the desired end position

If the actuator is already in the desired end position, the behavior can be set with the
parameter SI_outp_same_state_* for all commands of a system element:
Behaviour
action 0 1 2 3 4 5
Confirmation of the command positive positive positive positive positive negative
(ACTCON)
Activate actuator with: Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
Command output time - - √ √ - -
command prolongation time √ √ - - - -
Termination of the command negative positive negative positive negative -
(ACTTERM)
Behaviour Parameter SI_Output_same_state_x

0 CON+/output (command prolongation_t)/TERM-
1 CON+/output (command prolongation_t)/TERM+
2 CON+/output/TERM-
3 CON+/output/TERM+
4 CON+/do not output/TERM-
5 CON-/do not output
Example for behavior 0
Actuate actuator
Command output time
State information
Command prolongation time
„Command ACT“
information object
Spontaneous
„Command ACTTERM“ negative
Note
If the periodical information "command state information" created by the open-/closed-loop control function is
used as the source for the return infomation, the verification of "Actuator already in the desired end posi-
tion" may fail because of the temporal sequence. For this reason this function should be carried out by
means of command interlocking. However, in this case the set behaviour (parameter
RS_outp_same_state_*) has no effect.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Pulse commands
11.6 Functions Dependent on the Hardware of the System

Element
11.6.1 Idle Check
Checking that all relays (command relay, group relay, output relay) are in their idle states
(deactivated) by reading back the relay winding activation.
If an error is detected during the idle check, all relays are deactivated again and a new idle
check is performed. If still no idle state exists, as error handling an abortion with block takes
place.
The idle check is carried out periodically, even if there is no command to be output.
11.6.2 Selective Activation Check
The selective activation check checks whether only the desired relay(s) has (have) been
activated by reading back the relay winding activation.
With the selective activation check a further 1-out-of-n check is carried out in order to prevent
an unwanted activation of several actuators as a result of a defective module.
If an error is detected during the selective activation check, a further attempt is made to
activate the desired relay. If the relay is still not in the correct position, as error handling an
abortion with block takes place.
11.6.3 Continuity Check
The continuity check is used for controlling the relay contacts on the module and the external
command circuit. Thereby both non-closing as well as unwanted closed relay contacts are
detected.
The continuity check in the part "activate actuator / deactivate actuator" of the command
output can be switched on and off using the parameter Current_flow_test.
Special case:
The continuity check in the part "prepare control circuit" of the command output can be
disabled for special circuitries.
If disabled, disable is in effect only if
• the output relay is activated, and

• the group relay is activated, and
• the command relay is deactivated.
The continuity check can be disabled using the parameter Cur-

rent_flow_test_cocont_dis.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Pulse commands
11.6.4 Resistance Check
With the resistance check a further 1-out-of-n check is carried out in order to prevent an
unwanted activation of several actuators due to an external wiring fault (e.g. short between
two or more actuators).
The resistance check can be activated for each command with the parameter resistance
check_*. Thereby the possibility exists of executing the resistance check in the course of
each command output procedure or only with the periodical control circuit check.
The resistance check determines the resistance of the actuator to be activated. The
measurement is carried out with a reference voltage of 2.5 V or 10 V depending on the
parameterized resistance value. The measured resistance may deviate by +40% to -27.6%
from the parameterized resistance value_*.
The resistance check is also drawn upon for detecting relays on the module that remain
closed after the deactivation. Thereby a resistance of ∞ must be measured.
Note
A secure detection of external wiring faults is only given if the resistance of all actuators that are activated
by a system element is approximately the same.
Do not use non-linear resistors, such as LEDs, that are connected in parallel to the actuator, otherwise the
resistance check will be activated.
11.6.5 Current Flow Measurement
With the current flow measurement the external command circuit is checked (e.g. for short
circuit or breaks) while activating the actuator.
The current flow measurement can be activated for each command with the parameter Cur-
rent_flow_test_*.
11.6.6 Activation of Actuators with Series-Break Contacts
With the connection of actuators for which the command circuit can be interrupted, a correct
current flow measurement or continuity check is no longer possible. So that no fault is
detected with these circuitry variants, the periodical current flow measurement or continuity
check can be deactivated with the parameter outp_circ_inter_*. The very first current flow
measurement or continuity check after actuation of the actuator is not influenced thereby.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Pulse commands
11.6.7 Earth Fault Check
Depending on the circuitry variant two methods for the earth fault detection are applied:
• Earth Fault Detection with 1.5- or 2-pole Circuitry by means of a current measurement
• Earth Fault Detection with 1-Pole Circuitry by means of a resistance check
For the considerations below, three methods of grounding a battery (points A, B and C in the
following drawings and explanations:)
• A…plus pole of battery is grounded

• B…battery is symmetrically grounded
• C…minus pole of battery is grounded
Legend for drawings below:
UBAT = 24...220 VDC

RSYM = 56 kΩ
RM = 900 Ω
RL = 30...44 kΩ
RE < 145 kΩ
11.6.7.1 Earth Fault Detection with 1.5- or 2-pole Circuitry
In case of these circuitry variants the earth fault check can be switched on for eachj command
using the parameter ground fault check_*, independent of resistance check or current
flow check. Thereby the possibility exists of executing the earth fault check with each
command initiation or only with the periodical control circuit check.
Attention
with 2-pole circuitry, for proper function of the earth fault detection also the group relay has to be used.
Output relay Group relay Command relay Actuator

A
I
RE
B UBAT Test voltage RL
RE
II
C RM
RSYM
An earth fault is detected in every combination of grounding methods (A, B, C) with locations
of the earth fault (I, II).

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Pulse commands
11.6.7.2 Earth Fault Detection with 1-Pole Circuitry
In case of this circuitry variant the earth fault check is always carried out in the process of the
Resistance Check.
However, one can not distinguish whether the reason is a wiring fault, a wrong resistance of
the actuator, or that an earth fault occurred.
Attention
It depends on the battery grounding method whether an earth fault can be detected.
Output relay Group relay Command relay Actuator

A
I
RE
B Test voltage RL
RE
II
C RSYM RM
Grounding Earth Fault Detection Note

Method
A I No In general not relevant because the earth
fault creates a parallel connection
II Yes The actuator is short-circuit by the earth fault
B I No Usually detected by an external monitoring
device
II Yes The measured resistance is outside the
allowed tolerance
C I No Battery short-circuit
II No Actuator is actuated without switching opera-
tion

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Pulse commands
11.7 Additional Functions
11.7.1 Error Handling
The error handling of the command output distinguishes between:
Meaning
Cancel Errors in the operation or parameterization
Cancel with extra information Errors in the operation or parameterization
Cancel with diagnostic E.g. errors of the external wiring
Cancel with locking Defect of the module
In case of negative confirmations (ACTCON, DEACTCON, and ACTTERM) the reason for
"Cancel" is indicated using a diagnostic information of warning class.
Note
In the event of an error, in principle an attempt is made to deactivate all relays in order to interrupt the
command circuit. Whether the command circuit is actually interrupted is dependent on the error.
11.7.1.1 Cancel
The command output is cancelled and a spontaneous information object with negative
"Confirmation of the activation" or negative "Termination of the activation" is transmitted.
Following this the system element is ready again for a command.
11.7.1.2 Cancel with Additional (Extra) Information
The command output is interrupted, an additional (extra) information by means of a periodical

information (e.g. "Command interlocked") and/or a spontaneous information object (e.g. "Sum
command interlocked") is signaled and a spontaneous information object with negative
"Confirmation of activation" or negative "Termination of activation" is transmitted.
Following this the system element is ready again for a command.
11.7.1.3 Cancel with Diagnostic
The command output is cancelled, and:
• a diagnostic information according to the reason is set;

• system information and internal information "Command output busy" is reset;
• a spontaneous information object with a negative "Confirmation of the activation" or
negative "Termination of the activation" is sent.
Subsequently the system element is ready again for a command.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Pulse commands
11.7.1.4 Cancel with Locking
This state is assumed if the error can be traced back to a defect of the module. The command
output function is blocked.
Thereby all relays and semi-conductor switches of the module that are assigned to the
command output are switched off. In addition, depending on the system element, the
monitoring logic (Phasencountercheck) of the module is incorrectly used to block the
command output.
Possibly neither a spontaneous information object with "Confirmation of the activation" nor
one with "Termination of the activation" is transmitted for the given command.
This state can be rectified either by a power-up or reset of the system element. The behaviour
can be set with the parameter Startup behaviour.
11.7.1.5 Acknowledgement of the Command Output Fault
Depending on type of command output (OC, IC1, CC1, etc.) and error handling after a
"Cancel", the fault is automatically reset (transient) or remains present until a new command
has been output properly. In the second case the fault can be acknowledged by means of an
operator action.
This acknowledgement takes place by means of a spontaneous information object "Command

fault acknowledgement" with type identification "Single command".
Before this command can be executed, a formal check takes place:
─ "activation"
─ not determined
─ short command execution time
─ long command execution time
─ direct command (edxecute)
─ ON (OFF is not allowed)

• the activation is negatively confirmed
11.7.2 Monitoring the Command Output Sequence
After initiation of the command output procedure and until the actuator is activated, all
hardware related activities are checked by means of a phase-counter module.
The phase-counter verifies that every access to the hardware takes place in a pre-defined
sequence. If this is not the case, the command output sequence is aborted immediately and
the system element is shut down. This state can only be rectified by a power-up of the system
element.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Pulse commands
11.7.3 Periodical Control Circuit Check
The periodical control circuit check recognizes, if the command circuits are ready for
operation, without activating the actuator. The check is done in a settable grid
(Ctl_circuit_check_t), or nonrecurring, triggered by the periodical information "Start check
cycle command output".
Sequence:
• Idle check by reading back the relay winding activation

• Check for hung relay contacts (command-, group- and output relays)
• Check of all control circuits through sequential activation of the relays. Thereby a selective
activation check and a continuity check or resistance check is carried out.
11.7.4 Switching Sequence
This function enables the sequential activation of two actuators by one spontaneous
information object "Command".
A further command can be assigned for each command with the parameter
Sw_Seq_addtl_com_*. Thereby the connection-PIN (e.g. C00/C01) of the desired additional
single command is to be specified. The parameter Sw_Seq_command_seq_* specifies, in
which order (additional command after or before) the commands are to be output.Both
commands must have their parameters set up completely and their properties "system-
element overlapping 1-out-of-n check", and "select and execute command", respectively, must
be identically set.
The second command is only output if the first command has been concluded without error.
Note
A switching sequence should only be carried out with return information monitoring activated.
Procedure of the switching sequence:
Actuate actuator A
Actuate actuator B
State information actuator A
State information actuator B
„Command output busy“
information object
„Command ACT“
Spontaneous
„Command ACTTERM“ positive

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Pulse commands
11.7.5 Regulating Step Command
The regulating step command is treated the same way as a double command. The parameter
setting is carried out using the same category as for double commands.
The command states (RCS) correspond as follows
• Next step LOWER corresponds to double command state (DCS) OFF

• Next step HIGHER corresponds to double command state (DCS) ON
Limitations versus double command

For the proper functioning of the Return Information Monitoring, the periodical information
"command return information" created by the open-/closed-loop control function is used.
Therefore, the parameter RS_Mon_Source_* has to be set up accordingly.
Attention
It is not allowed to assign a binary information input (parameter RS_Image).
In order for the command to terminate properly, a positive edge of the periodical information
"command return information" is required.
For Special Cases "Actuator already in the desired end position" please pay attention to the
note in the appropriate chapter.
11.7.6 Regulating Command
A regulating command is a command, which is put out as long as so called retrigger com-
mands arrive within the set output time (short, long, settable) of the command message at the
system element.
Only double commands can be used as regulating commands. The usage as regulating com-
mand is set with the parameter Regulating_command.
The output of the regulation command is started by the reception of a command message and
is retriggert for the set output time by the reception of further command messages with the
same content (retrigger commands).
The end of the output happens either by a command message of the same content with com-
mand output state (DCS) 0 (stop command) or by expiration of the command output time if no
further retrigger command is received.
Each received (regulation-) command message is answered with a positive ACTCON.
The end of the output, regardless by which case, is answered by a positive ACTTERM. A dif-
ferentiation, which case ended the output, can be seen in the command output status (DCS)
of the reply message.
• Expiration of the command output time: DCS <> 0

• Stop command: DCS = 0
If a stop command is received while no regulating command is running, the stop command is
answered with a negative ACTON.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Pulse commands
Note
Precondition for the correct procedure of a regulating command-sequence is, that a retrigger or stop
command is sent, after the previous command was answered with a positive ACTCON.
The following table specifies in which cases a regulating command (retrigger or stop com-
mand) is permissible or not. A not permissable regulating command will be answered with a
negative ACTCON.
Functions Regulating command

possible
Selection command 
Direct or execute command 
Retry Suppression -
Single command (TI 45) -
Double command (TI 46) 
Regulating Step Command (TI 47) 
Synchronization -
Return information monitoring -
Switching sequence -
11.7.7 Command Output Procedure for the Auto-Reclose Function
This function represents a command output procedure, which is a specially adapted standard
procedure, in order to support auto-reclosing a circuit breaker.
Note
If the auto-reclose protection function (AR) of a protective device is not provided with the ability to issue,
after a circuit breaker OFF command, a circuit breaker ON command to auto-reclose the circuit breaker, it
can make use of the function described here.
The procedure requires three information objects:
• Spontaneous information object "Command" with the cause of transmission

"AR CB_preparation"
Is used for defining the actuator to be switched and for preparing the command output
procedure.
Starts the time period (AR LS_controllable_t), during which the actuation of the actuator,
by means of the periodical information object "AR CB_on", is allowed.
• Periodical information object "AR CB_controllable"
Is used, after start, for extending the time period (AR LS_controllable_t) by means of the
spontaneous information object "Command" The extension is triggered by a positive edge
within 50ms after start. A negative edge forces the time period to be terminated.
• Periodical information object "AR CB_on"
Triggers the actuation of the actuator. The trigger is a positive edge within the time period
"AR LS_controllable_t".

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Pulse commands
The difference to a standard procedure is that several checks and functions are not
performed. The differences are shown in the following table:
Functions / Checks Standard AR

procedure procedure
Selection command  -
Direct or execute command  
Retry suppression  
Formal check  
System-element overlapping  -
1-out-of-n check
Control location check  -
Command locking  
1-out-of-n check  
Synchronization  -
Revision  
Output time  
Return information monitoring  
Command prolongation  
Confirmation of the activation (ACTCON)  -
Termination of the activation (ACTTERM)  -
Switching sequence  -
Note
In case of Command Output with Continuity Check (CC1) the procedure for "prepare control circuit" is
carried out according to command sequence "short".

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Pulse commands
11.7.7.1 Principle of the Command Output
Functions independent on hardware of system Functions independent on hardware of

element system element

command „AR_CB_prep“ (COT = 54)
 Formal check
Prepare command output  Retry suppression
procedure  Direct or select- and
execute command
 1-out-of-n check
 Command interlocking
procedure
 Revision
AR_CB_controllable
AR_CB_on
Initiate command output  Command interlocking

procedure  Revision
 Idle check Prepare control circuit

 Selective activation
check
 Resistance check
 Current flow check
 External voltage
monitoring
 Earth fault check
Monitor pulse duration  Output time Periodical: Activate actuator

 State information  Selective activation
monitoring check
 Command  Current flow check
prolongation
 Idle check Deactivate actuator
Terminate command
initiation

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Pulse commands
11.7.7.2 Time Characteristic
On receipt of a spontaneous information object "Command" with the cause of transmission

"AR CB_preparation" the command output procedure is prepared and a positive edge of the
periodical information object "AR CB_on" is waited for, for 50ms.
These waiting time can be extended to "AR LS_controllable_t" by means of the periodical
information object "AR CB_controllable" (see figure below).
If within this waiting time a positive edge of the periodical information object "AR CB_on" is
detected, the command output procedure is initiated and the selected actuator is actuated.
The duration of the output impulse is defined by the code of qualifier of command in the
spontaneous information object "command" with the cause of transmission
"AR CB_preparation" or on arrival of the return information.
Spontaneous information
object „command“ (COT = 54)
50ms
AR CB_controllable
AR CB_controllable_t
AR CB_on
Activate actuator

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Pulse commands
11.8 Data Interface
11.8.1.1 Command

TI 46 double command
TI 47 regulating step command
1…ON
DCS…double command state 0…not permitted
1…OFF
2…ON
3…not permitted
RCS…regulating step command 0…not permitted
state 1…next step HIGHER
2…next step LOWER
3…not permitted
QU…code of qualifier of 0...command output time corresponding to the parameter of each
command command
1...Command output time in accordance with the global
parameter for short command output time
2...Command output time in accordance with the global
parameter for long command output time
>2…not supported
S/E…select/execute See cause of transmission "Activation" and "AR CB_preparation"
06…activation Command with "select" leads to a preparation of the command
output
Command with "execute" leads to a command output
08…deactivation A prepared command output (select) is removed.
54…AR CB_preparation Command with "select" is discarded
(private range) Command with "execute" makes the command output procedure
prepared for the actuation of the actuator by the periodical infor-
mation "AR CB_On"
confirmation
Originator address In case of cause of transmission of
• "activation" or "deactivation"
must correspond with the set control location(s) if the control
location detection is activated
• "AR CB_preparation"
not evaluated

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Pulse commands
11.8.1.2 Revision

1…revision
a remote command
a local command
interrogation
21-36…interrogated by group 1- SPI is evaluated depending on quality descriptor
16 interrogation
tion

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Pulse commands
11.8.1.3 Control Location
Measured Value, Scaled Value with Time Tag CP56Time2a

TI…Type identification TI 35 measured value, scaled value with time tag
CP56Time2a
SVA…scaled value control location
BL…blocked SVA is not evaluated
IV…invalid SVA is not evaluated
02…background scan SVA is evaluated depending on quality descriptor
03…spontaneous SVA is evaluated depending on quality descriptor
05…requested SVA is evaluated depending on quality descriptor
a remote command
a local command
20…interrogated by station inter- SVA is evaluated depending on quality descriptor
rogation
21-36…interrogated by group 1- SVA is evaluated depending on quality descriptor
16 interrogation
tion

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Pulse commands
Single Command (Direct Command)

SCS…single command state 0…erases all previousely set control locations
1…takes the control location from the originator address
QU code of qualifier of SCS is taken over only if QU <3
command
tion
Originator address is evaluated as control location
11.8.1.4 Command Fault Acknowledgement (Direct Command)

1…command fault acknowledgement
mand
tion

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Pulse commands
11.8.2.1 Confirmation of the Command

TI 46 double command
TI 47 regulating step command
CASDU, IOA .. Message address Corresponding to the received command message
SCS…single command state Corresponding to the received command message
DCS…double command state
RCS…regulating step command
state
QU…code of qualifier of com- 0...command output time corresponding to the parameter of each
mand command
1...Command output time in accordance with the global parame-
ter for short command output time
2...Command output time in accordance with the global parame-
ter for long command output time
>2...in normal case not supported
if parameter QOC>8 is set, project-specific functions are executed
S/E…select/execute Corresponding to the received command message
command are met
command are met
Otherwise there is a negative confirmation
"confirmation of the activation"
- command output ended properly and
- status information in the correct state
45…Unknown cause of transmis- Negative confirmation
sion
P/N…positive/negative confirma- See cause of transmission 07, 09, 10 and 45
tion
T…test Corresponding to the received command message

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Pulse commands
11.8.2.2 Synchronization in Progress

SPI…single point information 0…no synchronization in progress
1…Synchronization in Progress
BL…blocked not blocked
failure
IV…invalid current
a remote command
a local command
1-16 interrogation
tion
T…test no test

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Pulse commands
11.8.2.3 Synchronization Abortion

SPI…single point information positive transient
failure
a remote command
a local command
1-16 interrogation
tion
T…test no test

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Pulse commands
11.8.2.4 Sum Command Interlocked

SPI…single point information positive transient
failure
a remote command
a local command
1-16 interrogation
tion
T…test no test

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Pulse commands
column A.


(OPM II)
Command output binary set: 10 ms
busy if the command output procedure is initiated (receipt
of the spontaneous information object "Command"
(ACT) regardless of whether select or execute)
reset:
if the command output procedure is terminated
(transmission of the spontaneous information object
"Command" with ACTTERM or negative ACTCON)
Sum command binary set: 10 ms
output in progress if an actuator is actuated
reset:
if the command output procedure is terminated
(transmission of the spontaneous information object
"Command" with ACTTERM or negative ACTCON)
Sum command binary Sum of the periodical information Com- 10 ms
output error mand C00…Cnn fault
command inter- binary with interlocking violation set for 2 seconds 10 ms
locked
Command binary with 1-out-of-n interlocking set for 2 seconds 10 ms
1-out-of-n inter-
locked
Command binary is set if errors occur during "Prepare control circuit" or 10 ms
C00…Cnn fault "Activate actuator"
Check cycle run- binary set for the duration of the periodical control circuit 10 ms
ning check

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Pulse commands

Data Point Value Range Meaning
(OPM II)
Start check cycle binary the "periodical control circuit check" is started with the posi-
command output tive edge for one pass
Enable synchroni- binary Enabling information for the command synchronization
zation set:
enable
reset:
inhibited
enable 1-out-of-n binary Enabling information for system-element-overlapping 1-out-
of-n check
positive edge:
enabled and must remain set until the actuator is actuated
reset:
inhibited
Command inter- binary control information for command interlocking
locking C00…Cnn set:
command interlocked
reset:
command enabled
Command return binary Return information for command (only effective if the parame-
information ter RS_Mon_Source_* is set to open-/closed-loop control func-
tion)
Evaluation see "return information monitoring" and "command
prolongation"
AR CB_controllable binary Auto-reclose function:
As long as AR CB_controllable is present, the coming edge
AR CB_on is waited for
AR CB_on binary Auto-reclose function:
Triggers the actuation of the actuator

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
12 Binary Information Output
Content
12.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................380

12.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................381
12.3 Selective Activation Check ...............................................................................382
12.4 Deactivation or Retention on Failure ................................................................383
12.5 Data Interface ...................................................................................................384

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Binary Information Output
12.1 Introduction
The binary information output is used to output binary states, that are specified either by
periodical information of the higher-level open-/closed-loop control function or can be set with
spontaneous information objects.
By means of which information (periodical information or spontaneous information objects) the

outputs are activated can be set for each system element with the parameter receive for-
mat.
The assignment of the information "Binary Information Output" to the binary outputs in the
OPM II takes place for each data point by placing an image on a HW-PIN in the system
technique with the category firmware / DO_SI. This category also contains all parameters of
the processing functions.
Each "Binary Information Output" information can be assigned a system-element-dependent

binary output.
The binary information output comprises the following processing functions:
• Selective activation check

• Deactivation or retention on failure
Periodical information • process signals to be output
− binary information output firmware / DO_SI
Spontaneous information • process signals to be output
objects − binary information output firmware / DO_SI

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
12.2 Block Diagram
Binary outputs
OUT D00 … OUT Dnn
RL RL
Output
Keep or terminate
on failure
Parameter „Reception format“

Binary information output x
Binary information output x
Data interface

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
12.3 Selective Activation Check
The selective activation check checks whether only the desired relay(s) has (have) been
activated by reading back the relay winding activation. In the event of an error a diagnostic
information is set.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
12.4 Deactivation or Retention on Failure
The behaviour of the outputs on failure of the higher-level basic system element or on receipt
of the spontaneous information object with the IV or NT quality descriptor set can be selected.
Parameters are used to determine whether the last value output is kept or terminated.
The following picture shows the behaviour on failure of the higher-level master control unit
depending on the parameter Fail_behav:
behaviour on failure of the higher-level basic system element

failure failure
power up ready raising cleared ready
firmware
de-energized startup normal operation shut down startup normal operation
ameter Fail_behav:
terminated
ameter Fail_behav:
kept
behaviour on receipt of the spontaneous information object with

the "invalid" or "not topical" quality descriptor
ameter Fail_behav:
terminated
ameter Fail_behav:
kept
spontaneous information object

quality descriptor is reset
quality descriptor is set
Attention
The behaviour on failure of the higher-level basic system element is not supported by some system ele-
ments.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
12.5 Data Interface
12.5.1.1 Binary Information Output

SPI…single point information 0…reset output
1…set output
BL…blocked SPI is not output (output remains unchanged)
NT…not topical SPI is not accepted (kept) or outputs are deactivated according to
the parameterized behaviour on failure.
IV…invalid SPI is not accepted (kept) or outputs are deactivated according to
a remote command
a local command
rogation
1-16 interrogation
tion

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
12.5.2 Periodical information to the Peripheral Element

Binary information binary 0…reset output
output x 1…set output
The activation of the output after a change of state takes
place without delay

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
13 Binary Information- and Command Output
Contents
13.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................388

13.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................390
13.3 Single-Point Information (TI 30) or Periodical Information ...............................391
13.4 Single Command (TI 45) or Double Command (TI46) .....................................392
13.6 Data Interface ...................................................................................................400

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Binary Information- and Command Output
13.1 Introduction
The binary information- and command output is used to output binary states, that are specified
either by periodical information of the higher-level Sopen-/closed-loop control function or can be
set with spontaneous information objects.
The output can take place on an output or output pair.
Single Output
The assignment of the information "Binary Information OUT Dxx" to the binary outputs in the
OPM II takes place for each data point by placing an image on a HW-PIN in the system tech-
nique with the category firmware / DO_SX for binary information and single commands.
This category also contains all parameters of the processing functions.
In this category the output can be activated either via a periodical information or a spontane-
ous information object. Which information is used can be set for each data point with parame-
ter receive format.
If receive format "spontaneous information object" is chosen, it is possible to select alter-

natively following type identifications per output:
• TI 30 Single-point information with time tag CP56Time2a

• TI 45 Single command
Output Pair
The assignment of the information "Binary Information OUT Dxx/Dyy" to a binary output pair in
the OPM II takes place for each data point by placing an image on a HW-PIN in the system
technique with the category firmware / DO_SX for single and double commands.
This category also contains all parameters of the processing functions.
In this category the output (output pair) can exclusively be activated via a spontaneous infor-
mation object.
Following type identifications can be used alternatively for each output pair:
• TI 45 Single command
• TI 46 double command

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
The binary information and command output comprehends following processing functions for

Single or double commands
• Formal Check
• direct command or select- and execute command ("select/execute")
• Persistent command
• Pulse command
• Establish the cause of transmission of the belonging return information
− Binary information output OUT Dxx firmware / DO_SX
Spontaneous infor- • process signals to be output
mation objects − Binary information output OUT Dxx (TI30) firmware / DO_SX
− Binary information output OUT Dxx (TI45) firmware / DO_SX
− Binary information output OUT Dxx/Dyy (TI45) firmware / DO_DX
− Binary information output OUT Dxx/Dyy (TI46) firmware / DO_DX

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
13.2 Block Diagram
Binary outputs
OUT D00 … OUT Dnn
RL RL
output
keep or terminate
On failure
Parameter „Reception format“
Persistent-, pulse
command
Direct or
select and execute
command
Formal check
Single- or Double command
Binary information output OUT Dxx/Dyy (TI45,TI46)
Binary information output OUT Dxx/Dyy (TI45,TI46)
Binary information output OUT Dxx (TI45)


Binary information output OUT Dxx
(ACTCON / ACTTERM)
command Cxx running
Control location
Control location
system periodical information spontaneous information objects

internal
Data interface

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
13.3 Single-Point Information (TI 30) or Periodical Infor-

mation

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
13.4 Single Command (TI 45) or Double Command (TI46)
Single command or double command

• Formal Check
• direct command or select- and execute command ("select/execute")
• Persistent command output
• Pulse command output
• Establish the cause of transmission of the belonging return information
• Peculiarity
─ Single commands on an output pair
13.4.1 Assignment to an Output Pair
For the further processing the circuitry of the binary outputs is of vital importance. Following
assignment is to be adhered to:
• OFF-Information at the less significant bit

• ON-Information at the more significant bit
The two binary information bits must lie within a half-nibble.
Output specific parameters are identified with parameter <parameter_0> and <parame-
ter_1> .
Meaning:
<parameter_0> OFF-Information
<parameter_1> ON-Information

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
13.4.2 Formal Check
Before a single command can be executed, a formal check of the spontaneous information
object "Binary information output" takes place.
─ "Activation" or
─ "Cancellation of activation"
─ no determination or
─ short command execution time or
─ long command execution time
─ Persistent command
─ OFF (in case of a persistent command, assigned to a binary information pair) or
─ ON
• Command state in case of a double command is
─ OFF or
─ ON
• Parameter receive format is "spontaneous"

of transmission)
13.4.3 Direct Command
command" is set by means of the parameter Select_Execute_t" = 0.
On reception of the spontaneous information object "binary information" with the cause of
transmission "Activation" and the data point identifier "execute", the selection command is
checked for being permitted.
• Parameter Select_Execute_t = 0
• Binary information output is available (i.e. the last command output is already completed)
─ command not selected
─ command not executing

If these conditions are met, the command is executed according the code of qualifier of com-
mand (QU) as persistent- or pulse command.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
13.4.4 Select and execute command
The procedure for the command transmission according to IEC 60870-5-101/104 for "select-
and execute command" is set by means of the parameter Select_Execute_t"" > 0. The set
value specifies, within which time the execute command must be received following the select
command.

"Activation" and the data point identifier "select", the selection command is checked for being
permitted.
• Parameter Select_Execute_t > 0

• Binary information output is available (i.e. the last command output is already completed)
─ command not selected
─ command not executing

• there is a positive confirmation of the activation.

• The execute command is waited for
If the timeout (parameter Select_Execute_t) expires:
• the selected command is canceled
Deactivation
This waiting state can be terminated by means of a spontaneous information object "Com-
mand" with the cause of transmission "cancel activation". The qualifier of command "S/E" is
not relevant.

• The command to be deactivated is selected, i.e. the elements of the spontaneous infor-
mation object of select and execute command are identical except for the elements "cause
of transmission", "S/E" (not relevant), and for the elements of timetag.
• a negative confirmation of the deactivation is sent

• the selected command is NOT canceled
• the selected command is canceled and

• a positive confirmation of the deactivation is sent

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
The command output is now completed.
Execute Command (execute)

On receipt of the spontaneous information object "Command" with cause of transmission set
to "activation" and the data point identifier "execute" within the parameterized time se-
lect_execute_t following a selection command gets checked, whether the execute com-
mand is permitted.

• command not executing
• The command to be executed is selected, i.e. the elements of the spontaneous infor-
mation object of Select- and Execute command are identical except for the element "S/E"
and for the elements of timetag
• The command is rejected and

If these conditions are met, the command is executed according the code of qualifier of com-
mand (QU) as persistent- or pulse command.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
13.4.5 Persistent command
The persistent command is defined by the code of qualifier of command QU = 3 in the spon-
taneous information object „binary information output OUT Dxx“ or „binary information output
OUT Dxx/Dyy“.
• A positive confirmation of the activation is sent

• The acquisition of binary information gets informed, that a command affects on the binary
information (command Cxx running); see chapter "Cause of transmission of the belonging
return information".
• The output or the output pair is activated depending on the type identifier (TI) and the cat-
egory (DO_SX or DO_DX).
• Depending on the parameter Term_with_Conf either there will be sent a positive "cancel
of activation" after the timeout of parameter Termination_t or at once after sending the
positive „confirmation of the activation.
• If the belonging binary information changes, resp. after timeout of parameter (Parameter
RS_react_t), the binary information acquisition gets informed, that now there is no more
command affecting the binary information. See chapter "Cause of transmission of the be-
longing return information"
• Thus the command output is completed.
The following table shows the behavior of the outputs depending on the spontaneous infor-
mation objects and the qualifier of command.
Assignment to HW-PIN
Spontaneous Information Object Single Output Output Pair
Qualifier of com- Output_0 Output_1
Type identification mand
Single command (TI SCS = ON ON ON OFF
45) SCS = OFF OFF OFF ON
Double command DCS = ON X ON OFF
(TI 46) DCS = OFF X OFF ON
Legend:
Output_0 less significant bit or the half-nibble

Output_1 more significant bit or the half-nibble
X not supported

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
13.4.6 Pulse command
The pulse command is defined by the code of qualifier of command QU < 3 in the spontane-
ous information object „binary information output OUT Dxx“ or „binary information output OUT
Dxx/Dyy“.

• The acquisition of binary information gets informed, that a command affects on the binary
information (command Cxx running); see chapter "Determination of cause of transmis-
sion".
• The output or the output pair is activated depending on the type identifier (TI) and the cat-
egory (DO_SX or DO_DX).
• After the expiration of the output time interval the output gets deactivated.
The output time interval is set in the spontaneous information object „Binary information
output OUT Dxx“ oder „Binary information output OUT Dxx/Dyy“
Short or long command output time:
The output time is to be parameterized for each automation unit.
No definition:
The output time interval can be set for each data point with parameter Output_t .
• Depending on the parameter Term_with_Conf either there will be sent a positive "cancel
of activation" after the output time interval or at once after sending the positive „confirma-
tion of the activation.
• If the belonging binary information changes, resp. after timeout of parameter (Parameter
RS_react_t), the binary information acquisition gets informed, that now there is no more
command affecting the binary information. See chapter "Determination of the cause of
transmission".
• Thus the command output is completed.
Characteristic:
If parameter Fail_behav is set to retain, the output will not be deactivated after the expiration
of the output time interval on failure in the higher-level basic system element.
The following table shows the behavior of the outputs depending on the spontaneous infor-
mation objects and the qualifier of command.
Assignment to HW-PIN
Spontaneous Information Object Single Output Output Pair
Qualifier of com- Output_0 Output_1
Type identification mand
Single command SCS = ON IMPULSE OFF IMPULSE
(TI 45) SCS = OFF X IMPULSE OFF
Double command DCS = ON X OFF IMPULSE
(TI 46) DCS = OFF X IMPULSE OFF
Legend:
Output_0 less significant bit or the half-nibble
Output_1 more significant bit or the half-nibble
IMPULSE output activated for the duration of the corresponding output time interval
X not supported

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
13.5.1 Selective activation check
The selective activation check checks whether only the desired relay(s) has (have) been acti-
vated by reading back the relay winding activation. In the event of an error a diagnostic infor-
mation is set.
13.5.2 Deactivation or retention on failure
The behaviour of the outputs on failure of the higher-level basic system element, or on receipt
of the spontaneous information object with the IV or NT quality descriptor set, can be selected.
Parameters are used to determine whether the last value output is kept or terminated.
The following figure shows the behavior as a function of the parameter Fail_behav:

failure failure
firmware
parameter Fail_behav:
terminated
kept
Attention:
During startup the value output will be terminated.
Depending on configuration or product family, this
startup time may vary.

terminated
kept

quality descriptor is reset
quality descriptor is set
Attention
The behavior on failure of the higher-level basic system element is not supported by some system ele-
ments.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
13.5.3 Cause of transmission of the belonging return information
So that the binary information acquisition can determine the cause of transmission, it gets in-
formed, that a command affects on the binary information to be acquired. There is a distinction
if the activation takes place by a single output or an output pair.
The binary information gets marked as controlled by command, if the binary information
change takes place within the parameter-settable response time. The response time is set by
parameter RS_react_t.
Activation by a single output
For each output the belonging binary information input must be assigned.
The binary information input is set by the parameters RS_Image_CASDU1,

RS_Image_CASDU2, RS_Image_IOA1, RS_Image_IOA2 and RS_Image_IOA3. The belonging
binary information input must be used as single-point information and must be located on the
same peripheral element.
See also section "Single-point information", chapter "Determination of the cause of transmis-
sion".
Activation by a output pair
For each output pair the belonging binary information input (single-point information) or the
belonging two binary information inputs (double-point information) must be assigned.
This is determined by the parameters RS_Image_CASDU1, RS_Image_CASDU2,

RS_Image_IOA1, RS_Image_IOA2, RS_Image_IOA3 and RS_Image_TI.
One binary information input
• If the return information of an output pair is acquired by one binary information input, the
parameter RS_Image_TI must be set to single-point information (TI30).
• The belonging binary information input must be on the same peripheral element.
• See also section "Single-point information", chapter "Determination of the cause of trans-
mission".
Two binary information inputs
• If the return information of an output pair is acquired by two binary information inputs, the
parameter RS_Image_TI must be set to double-point information (TI31).
• The belonging two binary information inputs must be on the same peripheral element.
• See also section "Double-point information", chapter "Determination of the cause of
transmission".

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
13.6 Data Interface
13.6.1 Spontaneous information objects towards the peripheral element
13.6.1.1.1 Binary information output

TI…Type Identification TI 30 Single-point information with time tag CP56Time2a
SPI…single point information 0…reset output
1…set output
BL .. blocked SPI is not output (output remains unchanged)
SB .. substituted not evaluated
NT .. not topical SPI is not accepted (kept) or outputs are deactivated according to
IV…invalid SPI is not accepted (kept) or outputs are deactivated according to
a remote command
a local command
interrogation
21 -36 interrogated by group 1- SPI is evaluated depending on quality descriptor
16 interrogation
tion
T…Test not evaluated

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06

TI…Type Identification TI 45 - single command
TI 46 - double command
SCS…Single command state 0…
1…ON
DCS…double command state 0…not valid
1…OFF
2…ON
3…not valid
QOC…Qualifier of command
QU…code of qualifier of com- 0…command output time corresponding to the parameter of each
mand command
1…command output time in accordance with the global parame-
ter for short command output time
2…command output time in accordance with the global parame-
ter for long command output time
3…sistent command
>3…not supported
See transmission cause "Activation"
06…activation Command with "select" leads to a preparation of the command
output
Command with "execute" leads to a command output
08…deactivation A prepared command output (select) is removed.
tion
T…Test 0…no check

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
13.6.2.1 Confirmation of the Command

TI…Type Identification TI 45 - single command  TI 46 - double command
CASDU, Corresponding to the received command message
SCS…Single command state Corresponding to the received command message
DCS…double command state Corresponding to the received command message
QOC…Qualifier of command
QU…Qualifier of command code 0…command output time corresponding to the parameter of each
command
1…command output time in accordance with the global parameter
for short command output time
2…command output time in accordance with the global parameter
for long command output time
3…persistent command
S/E…select / execute Corresponding to the received command message
command are met.
command are met.
"confirmation of the activation".
- depending on the parameter Term_with_Conf
the termination of the activation takes place immediately after the
activation or after the parametrized time.
45…unknown cause of transmis- negative confirmation
sion
P/N…positive/negative confirma- see cause of transmission 07, 09, 10 and 45
tion
T…Test Corresponding to the received command message

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
13.6.2.2 Periodical Information to the Peripheral Element

Binary information Binary 0…reset output
output x 1…set output
The activation of the output after a change of state takes
place without delay

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
14 Setpoint Values by means of Currents and
Voltages
Content
14.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................406

14.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................407
14.4 Data Interface ...................................................................................................413

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Setpoint Values by means of Currents and Voltages
14.1 Introduction
Setpoint values can be set either by periodical information of the higher-level open-/closed-loop
control function or by spontaneous information objects.
This function can also be used to output measured values, such as for instance for activating
analogue measuring devices.
By means of which information (periodical information or spontaneous information objects) the

outputs are activated can be set for each system element with the parameter receive for-
mat.
If "spontaneous" is selected for the receiption format, the following type identifications are
possible:
• TI 34 measured value, normalized value

• TI 35 measured value, scaled value
• TI 36 measured value, short floating point
• TI 48 setpoint command, normalized value
• TI 49 setpoint command, scaled
• TI 50 setpoint command, short floating point
The assignment of the setpoint value to the analogue outputs in the OPM II takes place for
each data point by placing an image on a HW-PIN in the system technique with the
corresponding category. The category in the OPM II is used to determine whether current
(firmware / AO_I ) or voltage (firmware / AO_U) is output: This category also contains all
parameters of the processing functions.
Setpoint values comprise the following processing functions:
• Formal check (for setup command only)

• Select- and Execute command ("select/execute") (for setup command only)
• Adaptation
• Substitute value or retention on failure
− Setpoint value [IOMx] I/Om-n firmware / AO_I or AO_U
Spontaneous information • process signals to be output
objects − Setpoint value [IOMx] I/Om-n firmware / AO_I or AO_U

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
14.2 Block Diagram
Analogue outputs
e.g. SM-0572
IOMx I/O 2-3 IOMx I/O 6-7
RL RL
Output
Substitute value or
terminate on failure
Adaptation
Parameter „Receive format“
Select-and execute
Setpoint value [IOMx] I/O m-n

Setpoint command
Meassured value
ACTCON
ACT
Data interface

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
14.3.1 Formal Check
Before a setpoint command can be executed, a formal check is performed on the

spontaneous information object "setpoint command x".
─ "activation" or
─ "cancellation of activation"
• Parameter receive format is "spontaneous"
• Type identification in the spontaneous information object matches that one which was set
• the setpoint command is rejected

14.3.2 Direct Command
command" is set by means of the parameter select_execute_t = 0.
On receipt of the spontaneous information object "setpoint command" with the cause of
transmission "activation" and the data point identifier "execute" the setpoint value output is
initiated.
14.3.3 Select and Execute Command
The procedure for the command transmission according to IEC 60870-5-101/104 for the
"select-and execute command" is set by means of the parameter select_execute_t. The
set value specifies, within which time the execute command must be received following the
select command.

On reception of the spontaneous information object "setpoint command" with the cause of
transmission "Activation" and the data point identifier "select", the selection command is
checked for being permitted:

• The setpoint command to be selected is not selected
• The setpoint command is rejected


Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06

• The execute command is waited for
If the timeout (parameter select_execute_t ) expired:
• The selected setpoint command is canceled
Deactivation
This waiting state can be terminated by means of a spontaneous information object "Setpoint
Command" with the cause of transmission "deactivation" and the data point identifier "select".
Following checks are performed:
• The setpoint command to be deactivated is selected, i.e. the elements of the spontaneous
information object of select and execute command are identical except for the elements
"cause of transmission", "S/E" (not relevant), and for the elements of timetag.
• A negative confirmation of the deactivation is sent

• The selected setpoint command is NOT cancelled
• The selected setpoint command is cancelled and

• A positive confirmation of the deactivation is sent
Execute command (execute)

On reception of the spontaneous information object "Setpoint Command" with the cause of
transmission "activation" and the data point identifier "execute" within the settable time se-
lect_execute_t following the select command, the execute command is checked for being
permitted.
• The setpoint command is selected, i.e. the elements of the spontaneous information object
of select and execute command are identical except for the elements "S/E" (not relevant)
and for the elements of timetag.
• The setpoint command is rejected


• The setpoint value output is initiated.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
14.3.4 Adaptation
The adaptation enables the received setpoint value to be adapted to the current- or voltage
value to be output. The value range of the received setpoint value depends on the format of
the spontaneous information object "setpoint value".
Spontaneous Information Value Range Meaning

Object
Setpoint command, normal- - 1…+ 1-2-15 normalized, percental representation
ized value, or
Measured value, normalized
value
Setpoint command, scaled - 32768 technological, integer
value, or ...
Measured value, scaled value + 32767
Setpoint command, short - 1.000 • 1015 technological, floating point

floating point, or ... all in all 17 places including sign and decimal point
Measured value, short float- + 1.000 • 1015 (decimal separator),
ing point up to 3 decimal places
periodical Information
Setpoint value - 1.000 • 1015 technological, floating point
...
+ 1.000 • 1015
By parameterizing two interpolation points the current- or voltage value to be output is

adapted linearly. For this the technological or normalized value Y0 is parameterized for the
lower limit of the output range X0 and the technological or normalized value Y100 for the upper
limit of the output range X100.
The parameterized output range must thereby lie within the limits defined by the hardware.
Note
The X-values define the current to be output or the voltage to be output.
The Y-values define the received setpoint value

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
14.3.4.2 Characteristic
Example:
Output of -10 mA to +10 mA

Activation via a setpoint value positioning command, normalized value
Setpoint value Y100
X0 X100
Y0
X0 X100 Y0 Y100
-10 mA 10 mA -1 +1

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
14.3.5 Substitute value or retention on failure
The behaviour of the outputs on failure of the higher-level basic system element or on receipt
of the spontaneous information object with the IV or NT quality descriptor set can be selected.
By means of the parameter Fail_behav it is determine whether the last value output is kept
or a parameterized substitute value (fail_subst value) is output.
The following picture shows the behavior dependent on the variable parameters:

failure failure
firmware
substitute value
substitute value
kept
set point command or measured value GA

substitute value
substitute value
kept
spontaneous information object spontaneous information object

quality descriptor is set quality descriptor is reset

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
14.4 Data Interface
14.4.1.1 Setpoint value

TI…Type identification TI 48 setpoint command, normalized value
TI 49 setpoint command, scaled
TI 50 setpoint command, short floating point
Value Setpoint value
QOS…qualifier of setpoint com-
mand
QL…code of qualifier of setpoint not evaluated
command
S/E…select/execute See transmission cause "Activation"
06…activation Setpoint command with "select" leads to preparation of setpoint
value output
Setpoint command with "execute" leads to setpoint value output
08…deactivation A prepared setpoint value output (select) is removed.
tion

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017

CASDU, IOA .. Message address can be set by parameter
Value Setpoint value
BL…blocked Value is not output
NT…not topical Value is not accepted (kept) or substitute value is output,
according to the parameterized behaviour on failure
IV…invalid Value is not accepted (kept) or substitute value is output,
according to the parameterized behaviour on failure
OV…overflow not evaluated
01…cyclic Value is evaluated depending on quality descriptor
02…background scan Value is evaluated depending on quality descriptor
03…spontaneous Value is evaluated depending on quality descriptor
05…requested Value is evaluated depending on quality descriptor
20…interrogated by station Value is evaluated depending on quality descriptor
interrogation
21-36…interrogated by group Value is evaluated depending on quality descriptor
1-16 interrogation
confirmation

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
14.4.2.1 Confirmation of the Setpoint Value

TI…Type identification TI 48 setpoint command, normalized value
TI 49 setpoint command, scaled
TI 50 setpoint command, short floating point
according to the received setpoint command
CASDU, IOA .. Message address same as in the received setpoint command
Value same as in the received setpoint command
QOS…qualifier of setpoint com-
mand
QL…code of qualifier of setpoint same as in the received setpoint command
command
S/E…select/execute same as in the received setpoint command
command are met.
command are met.
- setpoint value is prepared ("select")
10…Termination of the activation not supported
P/N…positive/negative confirma- see cause of transmission 07 and 09
tion
T…test same as in the received setpoint command
Originator address same as in the received setpoint command

Setpoint value [IOMx] I/O 2-3 Y_0%…Y_100% Output value
… The activation of the output after a change of state
Setpoint value [IOMx] I/O 6-7 takes place without delay

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
15 Return Information to Pulse Command
Assignment
Content
15.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................418

15.2 Sequential Procedure for Command Transmission..........................................419
15.3 ACP 1703 Platform ...........................................................................................420
15.4 Ax 1703 Platform ..............................................................................................423

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
Return Information to Pulse Command Assignment
15.1 Introduction
This function coordinates the information acquisition and the pulse command output with
regard to the follwoing tasks:
• Return Information Monitoring for pulse command (single and double command)
• for pulse command (single and double command)
• Breaker Tripping Detection for double-point information
• Determination of the Cause of Transmission for double-point information
• Determination of the Cause of Transmission for single-point information
• Coordination of the Sequential Procedure for Command Transmission according to
IEC 60870-5
Note
for the function to work properly, a single-point information is allowed be assigned to a single command
only, and a double-point information is allowed be assigned to a double command only.
The execution of this functions depends on which platform and on which system element(s)
they are used.
We differentiate between the following platforms:
• ACP 1703 Platform

The single-point or double-point information can be assigned to a pulse command by
means of parameters.
─ Information Acquisition and Pulse Command Output on the Same Peripheral Element
By means of the parameter RS_Imageit is possible to set up a predefined or a settable
assignment.
For the settable assignment the peripheral elements with information acquisition must
be connected to the same Ax 1703 PE bus as those peripheral elements with pulse
command output.
─ Information Acquisition and Pulse Command Output on Different Peripheral Elements
The peripheral elements with information acquisition must be connected to the same
Ax 1703 PE bus as those peripheral elements with pulse command output.
• Ax 1703 Platform
The single-point or double-point information to the pulse command assignment is
predefined.
─ Information Acquisition and Pulse Command Output on the Same Peripheral Element
The rule for the assignment depends on the peripheral element.
─ Information Acquisition and Pulse Command Output on Different Peripheral Elements
A maximum of two peripheral elements (i.e. one pair of peripheral elements ) is
supported. These two peripheral elements must have two successive peripheral board
addresses (PBA).
The peripheral element with information acquisition must have the lower peripheral
board address.
The rule for the assignment depends on both peripheral elements.
Attention
The information on which peripheral elements can form a pair can be found in the appropriate system
element manuals.

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
15.2 Sequential Procedure for Command Transmission
The standard compliant sequential procedure provides the following sequence for the execute
command:
Controlling Station Communication Services Controlled Station Direction

Execute command C_SC, C_DC, C_RC [ACT] Execute command 
Execution confirmation C_SC, C_DC, C_RC [ACTCON] Execute response 
Control operation com- M_SP, M_DP, M_ST Control operation com- 
plete plete
(return information)
Control operation termi- C_SC, C_DC, C_RC [ACTTERM] Control operation termi- 
nated nated
If information acquisition and pulse command output with predefined assignment are located
on the same peripheral element, the sequence is assured by the peripheral element.
If information acquisition and pulse command output are located on different peripheral
elements or with predefined assignment on the same peripheral element, the sequence is
assured by the higher-level basic system element.
Attention
The execution of the sequential procedure for regulating step commands (C_RC) is not assured because
the return information is to be created by the open-/closed-loop control function.
15.2.1 Special Case of Switching Sequences
Switching sequences are not defined in the IEC 60870-5-5 standard and represent a special
case with respect to the procedure sequence for the command transmission.
The following table shows the sequence for the execute command:
Controlling Station Communication Services Controlled Station Direction

Execute command C_SC, C_DC [ACT] Execute command 
Execution confirmation C_SC, C_DC [ACTCON] Execute response 
Control operation com- M_SP, M_DP Control operation com- 
plete plete
(return information for
command A)
Control operation com- M_SP, M_DP Control operation com- 
plete plete
(return information for
command B)
Control operation termi- C_SC, C_DC [ACTTERM] Control operation termi- 
nated nated
Attention
This sequential procedure is only assured on ACP 1703 platforms.

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
15.3 ACP 1703 Platform
15.3.1 Information Acquisition and Pulse Command Output on the Same

Peripheral Element
If information acquisition and pulse command output are located on the same peripheral
element, a predefined or a settable assignment of the return information to the pulse
command can be set up for the pulse command, by means of the parameter RS_Image, using
OPM II.
Predefined Assignment
A predefined assignment takes place if the parameter RS_Image is not set. The rule for the
assignment of the binary input to the binary output depends on the peripheral element used.
Binary inputs Binary outputs

IN D00 … IN Dnn OUT C00 … OUT Cnn
Peripheral element
Acquisition with Activate actuator
time stamp
IN Dxx Command
Inversion Prepare control
state
circuit
monitoring
Treatment of
double point
Determination of information e.g.
cause of Breaker-tripping
transmission detection
Control location
Command Cxx in progress check
Initiate command
output procedure
Control location
Spontaneous information objects System internal System internal Spontaneous information objects
Ax 1703 PE-bus
Command ACTTERM
Command ACTCON
Single- double point
Control location
Command ACT
The peripheral element guarantees the sequential procedure for

information
command transmission according to IEC 60870-5-5
Internal distribution of messages with process information (data flow control)
Basic system element

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
Settable Assignment
A settable assignment takes place if the address of the desired return information is entered
into the parameter RS_Image.

Peripheral element
Acquisition with Activate
time stamp actuator
Command
state
circuit
monitoring
Treatment of
double point
cause of Breaker tripping

Control location
check
Command Cxx in
Initiate command
output procedure
progress
IN Dxx
IN Dxx
Ax 1703 PE-bus
Command ACTCON
Command ACTTERM
Settable assignment
command state to command
information
Definitive specification of the cause of transmission

of single- or double point information
Coordination of the sequential procedure for

Control location
Command ACT
information
ACTTERM
Command
Command
ACTCON

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
15.3.2 Information Acquisition and Pulse Command Output on Different

Peripheral Elements
If information acquisition and pulse command output are located on different peripheral
elements, the single-point or double-point information has to be assigned to the pulse
command by means of the parameter RS_Image, using OPM II.

Peripheral element Peripheral element

time stamp Single- or Pulse
double commands
information
Command
state
circuit
monitoring
Treatment for
double point

Control location
check
Command Cxx in
Initiate command
output procedure
progress
IN Dxx
IN Dxx
Ax 1703 PE-bus
Command ACTCON
Command ACTTERM
Settable assignment
information
Definitive specification of the cause of transmission

point information
Control location
Command ACT
Single- double
ACTTERM
Command
Command
ACTCON

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06
15.4 Ax 1703 Platform
15.4.1 Information Acquisition and Pulse Command Output on the Same

Peripheral Element
The single-point or double-point information to the pulse command assignment is predefined.

The rule for the assignment of the binary input to the binary output depends on the peripheral
element used.

Peripheral element
time stamp
IN Dxx Command
state
circuit
monitoring
Treatment of
double point
cause of Breaker-tripping
Control location
Command Cxx in progress check
Initiate command
output procedure
Control location
Ax 1703 PE-bus
Command ACTTERM
Command ACTCON
Control location
Command ACT
The peripheral element guarantees the sequential procedure for

information

DC0-011-2.06, Edition 05.2017
15.4.2 Information Acquisition and Pulse Command Output on Different

Peripheral Elements
The single-point or double-point information to the pulse command assignment is predefined.

The rule for the assignment of the binary input to the binary output depends on the peripheral
elements used.

Peripheral element Peripheral element

time stamp Single- or Pulse
double point commands
information
Command
state
circuit
monitoring
Treatment of
double point

(only double point information)
Control location
check
Command Cxx
Initiate command
in progress
output procedure
IN Dxx
IN Dxx
Ax 1703 PE-bus
Command ACTCON
Command ACTTERM
Predefined assignment

information

Control location
Command ACT
information
ACTTERM
Command
Command
ACTCON
---- end of document ----

Edition 05.2017, DC0-011-2.06

GF PE IEC ACP Ax ENG PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GF PE IEC ACP Ax ENG PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Preface, Table of Contents

Disclaimer of Liability Copyright

Subject to change without prior notice.

Document label: SICRTUs-HBGFPEIECACPAX-ENG_V2.06

Siemens AG Bestellnr.: DC0-011-2.06

This document is applicable to the following product(s)

This document describes the standardized, parameter-settable acquisition, processing and

• Return Information to Pulse Command Assignment

In the corresponding system-element data sheets and system-element handbooks of those

• Reference is made to this description

SICAM RTUs, Common functions / Peripheral Elements 3

• Conceptual activities, as for example design and configuration

In this document, reference is often made to important information, notifications and

4 SICAM RTUs, Common functions / Peripheral Elements

<parameter group> | <parameter Parameter (qualified reference, includes

<parameter group> | <parameter Parameter group (qualified reference,

<parameter group | *> Parameter group

<parameter_*> A parameter name that ends with "_*", as

# "#" in a parameter group or in a parameter

SICAM RTUs, Common functions / Peripheral Elements 5

Several Fundamental Terms

periodical Information A periodical information is an information with a deterministic

spontaneous information A spontaneous information object is an object, which with

system-internal A system-internal information is used exclusively for the

6 SICAM RTUs, Common functions / Peripheral Elements

1 Single-Point Information .................................................................................................19

1.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................20

2 Double-Point Information ................................................................................................31

2.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................32

SICAM RTUs, Common functions / Peripheral Elements 7

2.4 Common Functions ............................................................................................ 47

3 Integrated Totals via Count Pulses ............................................................................... 59

3.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................ 60

8 SICAM RTUs, Common functions / Peripheral Elements

3.5.2.2 Set Counter ..............................................................................................77

4.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................82

5.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................100

SICAM RTUs, Common functions / Peripheral Elements 9

5.3.5.4 Characteristics ....................................................................................... 107

6 Measurement in Single-Phase Systems ..................................................................... 117

6.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 118

7 Measurement in Three-Phase and Single-Phase Systems ....................................... 131

7.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 132

10 SICAM RTUs, Common functions / Peripheral Elements

7.4.2 Acquisition ...................................................................................................140

SICAM RTUs, Common functions / Peripheral Elements 11

7.8.1 Revision ...................................................................................................... 173

8 Measurement in Three-Phase Systems – Extended Frequency Range................... 197

8.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 198

12 SICAM RTUs, Common functions / Peripheral Elements

8.5.1 Frequency Instantaneous Value..................................................................215

SICAM RTUs, Common functions / Peripheral Elements 13

9 Measurement in Three-Phase Systems – I/O Module ................................................ 267

9.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 268

14 SICAM RTUs, Common functions / Peripheral Elements

9.7.5 Trip Time DMT (50) .....................................................................................289

10.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................308

11.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................322

SICAM RTUs, Common functions / Peripheral Elements 15

11.3.3 Command Output with Internal Checks (IC1) ............................................. 329

16 SICAM RTUs, Common functions / Peripheral Elements

11.7.1.4 Cancel with Locking ...............................................................................362

12 Binary Information Output ............................................................................................379

<parameter_> A parameter name that ends with "_", as